1622 pcfr-technical specifications · 323113 chain link fence ... placemaker design studio, llc...

Technical Specifications

CITY OF PLANT CITY – FIRE STATION #31702 N Park RD

Plant City, Florida 33563

VERSION 171018

ArchitectWannemacher Jensen Architects, Inc.

180 Mirror Lake DriveSt. Petersburg, Florida 33701-3214

AA0002277

10

Technical SpecificationsSection 000100 – Table of Contents

Project No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #03

iVERSION: 171018

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL CONDITIONS011000 SUMMARY012300 ALTERNATES013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS014200 REFERENCES015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS017300 EXECUTION017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK & EXISTING CONDITIONS023120 ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCES AND GATES025116 TERMITE CONTROL

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE032900 VAPOR BARRIER033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY042000 UNIT MASONRY042300 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY042301 STRUCTURAL CLAY UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

DIVISION 5 – METALS051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING053100 STEEL DECKING054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY064116 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION071353 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION071900 WATER REPELLENTS072100 BUILDING INSULATION072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM079200 JOINT SEALANTS

Technical SpecificationsSection 000100 – Table of ContentsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

iiVERSION: 160922

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS087100 DOOR HARDWARE088000 GLAZING088300 MIRRORS088813 FIRE-RESISTANT RATED GLAZING089119 FIXED LOUVERS

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING092400 EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM092900 GYPSUM BOARD093013 CERAMIC TILING095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES096519 RESILIENT ATHLETIC TILE FLOOR099100 PAINTING

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES101400 SIGNAGE102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES107516 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION21 00 00 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING22 05 03 PLUMBING22 05 10 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR PLUMBING WORK22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS – PIPING SYSTEMS22 11 00 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS22 13 13 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEMS22 13 16 PIPE, VALVES, AND FITTINGS – STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT, AND DRAIN22 13 19 GREASE INTERCEPTORS22 14 13 STORM WATER SYSTEM22 16 13 NATURAL GAS PIPING22 42 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL23 05 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK23 05 10 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

Technical SpecificationsSection 000100 – Table of Contents


iiiVERSION: 171018

23 05 31 ROOF CURBS23 05 93 FINAL TEST AND BALANCE23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION23 21 15 COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK23 33 15 SMOKE DAMPERS23 34 23 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT23 72 13 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS23 81 29 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW – HEAT PUMP

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL26 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS26 05 21 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS

AND BELOW)26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROLS26 24 16 PANELBOARDS26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES26 29 21 DISCONNECT SWITCHES26 32 13 GENERATOR26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS27 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

DIVISION 32 – LANDSCAPING323113 CHAIN LINK FENCE328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION329100 PLANTING SOIL329223 SODDING329300 PLANTING

Technical SpecificationsSection 000100 – Table of ContentsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

ivVERSION: 160922

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical Specifications Section 011000 – Summary

Project No. 1622 Plant City Fire Station #3

011000-1 VERSION: 171017

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Work by Owner.4. Purchase contracts.5. Access to site.6. Work restrictions.7. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and

procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Plant City Fire Station #3

1. Project Location:1710 N Park RdPlant City, FL 33563

B. Owner: City of Plant City, Florida.C. Architect:

Wannemacher Jensen Architects, Inc.180 Mirror Lake Drive N.St. Petersburg, FL 33702

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:1. Civil Engineer:

Vickstrom Engineering Services, Inc.505 20th Ave. NESt. Petersburg, FL 33704

2. Structural Engineer:Master Consulting Engineers5523 West Cypress Blvd. Suite 200Tampa, FL 33607

3. Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Engineers:Collwill Engineering Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Technical Specifications Section 011000 – Summary Project No. 1622 Plant City Fire Station #3

011000-2 VERSION: 171017

4750 E. Adamo Dr. Tampa, FL 33605

4. Landscape Architect: PlaceMaker Design Studio, LLC 3000 Gulf to Bay, Suite 402 Clearwater, FL 33759

E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by the Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements

for establishing, administering and using the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the

following: 1. A new 1-story, 8,419-square-foot building containing facilities for the Plant City

Fire Department. 2. Other site work required to serve the new facilities, their users and staff.

B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without

interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

1.6 PURCHASE CONTRACTS A. General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and

equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase

contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.

1.7 ONWER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner shall furnish those products indicated on the Drawings as Owner-furnished or

furnished by Owner. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, protecting and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during

construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

Technical Specifications Section 011000 – Summary


011000-3 VERSION: 171017

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Nonsmoking Construction Site: No smoking allowed on the construction site except in those areas designated by the Owner for smoking.

D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

F. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of

language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms

used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled

on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

Technical Specifications Section 011000 – Summary Project No. 1622 Plant City Fire Station #3

011000-4 VERSION: 171017

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 012300 – Alternates


012300-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form

for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a correspond-ing change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, ma-terials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents.

C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as neces-sary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully inte-grated into the project.

D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alter-nates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates.

E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specifica-tion Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and meth-ods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate.1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and sim-

ilar items required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATESA. Add Alternate No. 1:

1. Add Magnagrip Diesel Exhaust Extraction System to Apparatus Bay as shown.

Note:Add Alternate 1 include all mechanical, plumbing, electrical, structural & civil work & materi-als related to the items listed under those Add Alternates.


Technical SpecificationsSection 012300 – AlternatesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

012300-2VERSION: 171018

Technical SpecificationsSection 013100 – Project Management and Coordination


013100-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:1. General coordination procedures.2. Coordination drawings.3. Requests for Information (RFIs).4. Project Web site.5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and

submitting Contractor's construction schedule.2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation

and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. RFI: Request from Owner or Contractor seeking information required by or

clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed

for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products.2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone

Technical SpecificationsSection 013100 – Project Management and CoordinationProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

013100-2VERSION: 171018

numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project

Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURESA. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of

their Work is required.C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.2. Preparation of the schedule of values.3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.4. Delivery and processing of submittals.5. Progress meetings.6. Preinstallation conferences.7. Project closeout activities.8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGSA. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to

requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates



013100-3VERSION: 171018

coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination

drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and

operating system as original Drawings.2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable

Data File (PDF) format.3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in

preparing coordination digital data files.a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

digital data files as they relate to Drawings.b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCAD

Format.c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of

AIA Document C106.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFIin the form specified.1. Owner will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.


013100-4VERSION: 171018

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:1. Project name.2. Project number.3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts

the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.D. Owner's Action: Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Owner's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Ownerafter 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Owner's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Owner's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Owner's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposalaccording to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Owner in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following:



013100-5VERSION: 171018

1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.7. Date Owner's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Owner within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal

Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT WEB SITEA. Provide, administer, and use Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing

project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:1. Project directory.2. Project correspondence.3. Meeting minutes.4. Contract modifications forms and logs.5. RFI forms and logs.6. Task and issue management.7. Photo documentation.8. Schedule and calendar management.9. Submittals forms and logs.10. Payment application forms.11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.12. Online document collaboration.13. Reminder and tracking functions.14. Archiving functions.

B. Provide up to seven Project Web site user licenses for use of the Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site users.

C. On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy of Project Web site files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect.

D. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Project Web site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS


013100-6VERSION: 171018

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:a. Tentative construction schedule.b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.d. Lines of communications.e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.f. Procedures for RFIs.g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.j. Submittal procedures.k. Preparation of record documents.l. Use of the premises.m. Work restrictions.n. Working hours.o. Owner's occupancy requirements.p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.q. Procedures for moisture and mold control.r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.s. Construction waste management and recycling.t. Parking availability.u. Office, work, and storage areas.v. Equipment deliveries and priorities.w. First aid.x. Security.y. Progress cleaning.



013100-7VERSION: 171018

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:a. Contract Documents.b. Options.c. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Purchases.f. Deliveries.g. Submittals.h. Review of mockups.i. Possible conflicts.j. Compatibility requirements.k. Time schedules.l. Weather limitations.m. Manufacturer's written instructions.n. Warranty requirements.o. Compatibility of materials.p. Acceptability of substrates.q. Temporary facilities and controls.r. Space and access limitations.s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.t. Testing and inspecting requirements.u. Installation procedures.v. Coordination with other work.w. Required performance results.x. Protection of adjacent work.y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to

Project closeout.


013100-8VERSION: 171018

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:a. Preparation of record documents.b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for

final inspection for acceptance.c. Submittal of written warranties.d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.f. Requirements for demonstration and training.g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial

Completion and for final payment.i. Submittal procedures.j. Coordination of separate contracts.k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each

contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:1) Interface requirements.2) Sequence of operations.3) Status of submittals.4) Deliveries.5) Off-site fabrication.6) Access.



013100-9VERSION: 171018

7) Site utilization.8) Temporary facilities and controls.9) Progress cleaning.10) Quality and work standards.11) Status of correction of deficient items.12) Field observations.13) Status of RFIs.14) Status of proposal requests.15) Pending changes.16) Status of Change Orders.17) Pending claims and disputes.18) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




013100-10VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 014000 – Quality Requirements


014000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control.B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility

to verify performance characteristics.

Technical SpecificationsSection 014000 – Quality RequirementsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

014000-2VERSION: 171018

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, andceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require

that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTSA. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the

standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.



014000-3VERSION: 171018

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating

materials and size of mockup construction.1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two

dimensions.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities

and responsibilities.B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having

jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed

in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the

wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:1. Specification Section number and title.2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLANA. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of

Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.


014000-4VERSION: 171018

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed

tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection

during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTSA. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in

other Sections. Include the following:1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.



014000-5VERSION: 171018

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service

representative making report.2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.


014000-6VERSION: 171018

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with

the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative

of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.



014000-7VERSION: 171018

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ

workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROLA. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those

required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed

to in writing by Owner.3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that

requires testing or inspecting will be performed.4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit

a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.


014000-8VERSION: 171018

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300"Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed

in the Work during performance of its services.2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ

tests are conducted.3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether

tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or

approve or accept any portion of the Work.6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing

and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency.7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.



014000-9VERSION: 171018

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each

party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONSA. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special

tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as follows:1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control

procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect through Contractor with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOGA. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the

following:1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


014000-10VERSION: 171018

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTIONA. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.


Technical SpecificationsSection 014200 – References


014200-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONSA. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,

applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of

Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDSA. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

Technical SpecificationsSection 014200 – SummaryProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

014200-2VERSION: 171018

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMSA. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials;

www.aapfco.org.4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists;

www.aatcc.org.6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association;

www.americanbearings.org.7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International);

www.concrete.org.8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The);

www.ahrinet.org.14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;

www.amca.org.20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.



014200-3VERSION: 171018

24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute;

(See ASCE).30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers; www.ashrae.org.31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials

International); www.astm.org.35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com.39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-

Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com.40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association;

www.buildershardware.com.43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture

Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.com.46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.);

(See ICC).48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton

Federation); www.bwfbadminton.org.49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.;

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.


014200-4VERSION: 171018

55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services);

www.csa-international.org.65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute);

www.cti.org.68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association;

www.dasma.com.70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See

ECA).73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball

Federation); www.fiba.com.80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball

Federation); www.fivb.org.81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association,

Inc.; www.floridaroof.com.84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.89. GBI – Green Building Initiative



014200-5VERSION: 171018

90. GG – Green Globes91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See

AHRI).93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants;

www.iapsc.org.97. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).98. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).99. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.100. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.101. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.102. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.103. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.104. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.105. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering

Society of North America); www.ies.org.106. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).107. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.108. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.109. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;

www.igshpa.okstate.edu.110. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.111. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com.112. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation,

Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org.113. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).114. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International

Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.115. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.116. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).117. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.118. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.119. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).120. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.121. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.122. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.123. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.


014200-6VERSION: 171018

124. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.

125. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.126. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.127. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding

& Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.128. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.129. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry

Inc.; www.mss-hq.org.130. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;

www.naamm.org.131. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International); www.nace.org.132. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.133. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.134. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.135. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.136. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.137. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.138. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.139. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.140. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.141. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.142. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.143. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.144. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).145. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.146. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.147. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.148. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).149. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association;

www.nomma.org.150. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.151. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.152. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International);

www.nsf.org.153. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.154. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.155. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.156. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.157. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.158. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.



014200-7VERSION: 171018

159. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org.

160. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.161. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.162. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.163. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.164. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.165. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.166. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.167. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.168. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers;

(See ASCE).169. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.170. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.171. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.172. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;

www.smacna.org.173. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.174. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.175. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.176. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.177. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.178. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.179. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.180. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.181. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.182. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.183. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.184. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);

www.tileusa.com.185. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.186. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA -

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.

187. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

188. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.189. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.190. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.191. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.192. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).193. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.


014200-8VERSION: 171018

194. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.195. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.196. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.197. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.198. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.199. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.200. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.201. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.202. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);

www.wicnet.org.203. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.205. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;

www.iapmo.org.3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and

Technology; www.nist.gov.4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy

Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.



014200-9VERSION: 171018

14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; www.trb.org.

15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of

Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys.2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available

from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock

Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building

Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board;

(See USAB).F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of

Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program;

www.cal-iaq.org.5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.


014200-10VERSION: 171018

7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry; http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.




Technical SpecificationsSection 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls


015000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGESA. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be

included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas

for construction personnel.B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water

absorption or water damage.

Technical SpecificationsSection 015000 – Temporary Facilities and ControlsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

015000-2VERSION: 171018

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.4. Waste handling procedures.5. Other dust-control measures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect

each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with

flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIESA. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes,

temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.



015000-3VERSION: 171018

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables,

plan racks, and bookcases.2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals.

Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.4. Coffee machine and supplies.5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor

temperature of 68 to 72 deg F.6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk

height.C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to

accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENTA. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required

by locations and classes of fire exposures.B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide

vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type

heating units is prohibited.2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum

interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000

"Summary."


015000-4VERSION: 171018

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATIONA. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures

adequate for construction.D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use

of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as

facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture

levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of

sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by

Owner.H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate

illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection

requirements without operating entire system.2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.



015000-5VERSION: 171018

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office.1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.a. Police and fire departments.b. Ambulance service.c. Contractor's home office.d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.e. Architect's office.f. Engineers' offices.g. Owner's office.h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documentsand maintain electronic communications.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATIONA. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply

treatment as required to minimize dust.C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and

paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads

and paved areas.2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,

regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.


015000-6VERSION: 171018

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform

public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to

handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300"Execution."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered

"tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATIONA. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,

utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- andsedimentation-control Drawings, requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is most stringent.1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by

construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures

during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and

sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas

disturbed during removal.



015000-7VERSION: 171018

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pestsand their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations.2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to

authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed

areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Covered Walkway and Roadway: Erect protective covering for walkways and roadwaysfor passage of individuals and motor vehicles through or adjacent to Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Construct protective walkway and roadway coverings using scaffold or shoring

framing.2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades,

warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway and roadway protection for duration of the Work.

L. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete,

insulate temporary enclosures.


015000-8VERSION: 171018

M. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROLA. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document

visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials

are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:1. Protect porous materials from water damage.2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with

concrete.4. Remove standing water from decks.5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items

with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic

matter.4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.5. Do not install material that is wet.6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry

before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the

building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in

conditions.



015000-9VERSION: 171018

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative

humidity, and exposure to water limits.a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and

gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVALA. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste

and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


Technical SpecificationsSection 016000 – Product Requirements


016000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products

for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standardwarranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable

product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

Technical SpecificationsSection 016000 – Product RequirementsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

016000-2VERSION: 171018

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in

Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but

incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent

damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of

units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.



016000-3VERSION: 171018

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials

and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIESA. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,

other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer

for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to

provide specific rights for Owner.B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information

and properly executed.2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,

prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements

for submitting special warranties.C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURESA. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract

Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other

items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard

options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.


016000-4VERSION: 171018

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide

the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor'sconvenience will not be considered.

3. Products:a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'

names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected byArchitect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or



016000-5VERSION: 171018

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTSA. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for

comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.5. Samples, if requested.




016000-6VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 017300 – Execution


017300-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. Installation of the Work.4. Cutting and patching.5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.6. Progress cleaning.7. Starting and adjusting.8. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or

performance of other work.B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions

after installation of other work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and

elevation of improvements comply with requirements.C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

Technical SpecificationsSection 017300 – ExecutionProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

017300-2VERSION: 171018

E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify

Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:a. Primary operational systems and equipment.b. Fire separation assemblies.c. Air or smoke barriers.d. Fire-suppression systems.e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.f. Control systems.g. Communication systems.h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.i. Conveying systems.j. Electrical wiring systems.k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.e. Equipment supports.f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.



017300-3VERSION: 171018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For

exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual

locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and

systems are to be installed.3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:1. Description of the Work.2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to

adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.


017300-4VERSION: 171018

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUTA. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.2. Establish limits on use of Project site.3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to

obtain required dimensions.4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work

progresses.6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard

established by authorities having jurisdiction.C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,

building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERINGA. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property

corners.



017300-5VERSION: 171018

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior

written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked

construction to its original condition.D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and

other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities,

existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATIONA. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment

and elevation, as indicated.1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90

inches in unoccupied spaces.B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible

results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.


017300-6VERSION: 171018

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to

be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components

at heights directed by Architect.2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage



017300-7VERSION: 171018

elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTSA. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed

by Owner's construction personnel.1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction

schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness

necessary for proper execution of the Work.1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum

the entire work area, as appropriate.D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.


017300-8VERSION: 171018

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTINGA. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper

operation without binding.C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and

safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTIONA. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


Technical SpecificationsSection 017419 – Construction Waste Management


017419-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste

resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

D. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

E. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of

total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for

commencement of the Work.

Technical SpecificationsSection 017419 – Construction Waste ManagementProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

017419-2VERSION: 171018

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,

submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste. Include the following information:1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.3. Total quantity of waste in tons.4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of

total waste.B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit

calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit documentation to GBI-authorized Assessor signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements for the credit have been met. Respond to questions and requests from GBI-authorized Assessor until GBI-authorized Assessor has made its determination on Project's Green Globes certification application. Document correspondence with GBI-authorized Assessor as informational submittals.

H. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of

successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements.B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification

program.C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review



017419-3VERSION: 171018

methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste

management coordinator.2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its

disposition.3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of

containers and bins needed to avoid delays.4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling

and disposal facilities.5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANA. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and

requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in

this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste. Include the following:1. Total quantity of waste.


017419-4VERSION: 171018

2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste.

3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).4. Revenue from salvaged materials.5. Revenue from recycled materials.6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each

type of waste.9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATIONA. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,

storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be

responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of

submittal return.2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.

Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating

materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling

dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING WASTE, GENERALA. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives

received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner.



017419-5VERSION: 171018

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste

until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated

materials if found.2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling

receiver or processor.

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTEA. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets

from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile

chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTEA. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,

remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be

disposed of accumulate on-site.


017419-6VERSION: 171018

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.


Technical SpecificationsSection 017700 – Closeout Procedures


017700-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,

record Specifications, and record Product Data.5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For cleaning agents.B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALSA. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items

specified in other Sections.

Technical SpecificationsSection 017700 – Closeout ProceduresProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

017700-2VERSION: 171018

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURESA. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be

completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having

jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver tolocation designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,

and maintenance.C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10

days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial

Completion.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of

products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local

emergency responders.



017700-3VERSION: 171018

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion

a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final

completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURESA. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining

final completion, complete the following:1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificatefor Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected

by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories

for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.


017700-4VERSION: 171018

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIESA. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product andthe name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal’s GS-37, or if GS-37 is not

applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.



017700-5VERSION: 171018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANINGA. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to

comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,

and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning.


017700-6VERSION: 171018

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary

Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in

Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORKA. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for

determination of Substantial Completion.B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing

defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,

and other damaged transparent materials.2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,

including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


Technical SpecificationsSection 017823 – Operation and Maintenance DataProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

017823-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSRetain or delete this article in all Sections of Project Manual.

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation

and maintenance manuals, including the following:1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Emergency manuals.3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.4. Product maintenance manuals.5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements:Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.Retain first subparagraph below to reference the Section that specifies preparation of material frequently included in operation and maintenance manuals.1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals.2. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training".

1.3 DEFINITIONSRetain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project.Definition in "System" Paragraph below is from ASHRAE's "Technology Handbook."

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.1. Architect and Owner will comment on whether content of operations and

maintenance submittals are acceptable.2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to

revisions and field conditions.B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

Retain one or both subparagraphs below. Indexing requirement in first subparagraph can be performed automatically using PDF publishing software.


017823-2VERSION: 171018

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with

applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.Retain "Initial Manual Submittal" Paragraph below, which facilitates completion of manuals prior to their use in demonstration and training applications specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Owner’s comments.

Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Owner’s comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.Collate and submit in no more than (2) two volumes.

2. Submit in three ring binders.3. Submit (2) two hard copies in addition to PDF electronic files.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORYA. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and

maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of


017823-3VERSION: 171018

equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that

designed the systems contained in the manuals.7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.Retain subparagraph below if paper copies of operation and maintenance data are required.1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

"Manual Contents" Paragraph below describes typical requirements for binding copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Revise to suit Project.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.Retain one or both of "Manuals, Electronic Files" and "Manuals, Paper Copy" paragraphs below based on type of deliverables required for operations and maintenance data. Retain first paragraph for projects requiring electronic manuals.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.

Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

Retain "Manuals, Paper Copy" Paragraph below for projects requiring paper copy manuals.Consider other special requirements, such as using photographs instead of drawings to demonstrate unusual installations.


017823-4VERSION: 171018

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALSIn this article, include emergency information that must be immediately available during emergency situations to protect life and property and to minimize disruptions to building occupants.

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:1. Fire.2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, errormessages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALSIn this article, include information needed for daily operations and management of systems and equipment.

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems

and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design

responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:


017823-5VERSION: 171018

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALSRevise "Content" Paragraph below to suit Project. For simple projects that require few manuals, this information may be included on title page.

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.


017823-6VERSION: 171018

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services."Warranties and Bonds" Paragraph below provides information if product fails. For specific products, additional information may be necessary.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,

include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.Revise "Source Information" Paragraph below to suit Project. For simple projects that require few manuals, this information may be included on title page.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.


017823-7VERSION: 171018

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.Retain "Maintenance Service Contracts" Paragraph below if service contracts are specified for systems, subsystems, or equipment.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent."Warranties and Bonds" Paragraph below provides information if product fails. For specific products, additional information may be necessary.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATIONDelete "Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory" Paragraph below for less-complex projects.

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare

information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not

available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.


017823-8VERSION: 171018

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.Retain first subparagraph below. Including record Drawings in operation and maintenance manuals is not recommended. See the Evaluations in Section 017839"Project Record Documents."1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals.2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839

"Project Record Documents."G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting

operation and maintenance documentation.END OF SECTION 017823

Technical SpecificationsSection 017900 – Demonstration and Training


017900-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.3. Demonstration and training video recordings.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and

training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration

and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator.C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of

end of each training module.1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following

information:a. Name of Project.b. Name and address of videographer.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

Technical SpecificationsSection 017900 – Demonstration and TrainingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

017900-2VERSION: 171018

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.

1.6 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required

to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAMA. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design

responsibility.c. Operating standards.d. Regulatory requirements.e. Equipment function.



017900-3VERSION: 171018

f. Operating characteristics.g. Limiting conditions.h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:a. Emergency manuals.b. Operations manuals.c. Maintenance manuals.d. Project record documents.e. Identification systems.f. Warranties and bonds.g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error

messages.b. Instructions on stopping.c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:a. Startup procedures.b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.c. Routine and normal operating instructions.d. Regulation and control procedures.e. Control sequences.f. Safety procedures.g. Instructions on stopping.h. Normal shutdown instructions.i. Operating procedures for emergencies.j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:a. Alignments.b. Checking adjustments.c. Noise and vibration adjustments.d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:a. Diagnostic instructions.b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:a. Inspection procedures.b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.d. Procedures for routine cleaninge. Procedures for preventive maintenance.f. Procedures for routine maintenance.


017900-4VERSION: 171018

g. Instruction on use of special tools.8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.b. Repair instructions.c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and

reassembly instructions.d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTIONA. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training

modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGSA. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and

training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not studentpractice.



017900-5VERSION: 171018

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

C. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

D. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

E. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.

F. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



017900-6VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 023120 – Ornamental Steel Fences and Gates


023120-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 023120 – ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes the following:

1. Ornamental steel fences and gates.B. Related Section:

1. Division 033000 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete footings for support of fence posts.

1.3 REFERENCESA. ASCE/SEI 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.B. AAMA – American Architectural Manufacturers Association.C. ASTM A36 – Carbon Structural Steel.D. ASTM A500 – Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in

Rounds and Shapes.E. ASTM A123 – Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.F. ASTM B117 – Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.G. ASTM D822 – Tests on Paint and Related Coatings Using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-

Arc Exposure Apparatus.H. ASTM D1794 – Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation

(Impact).I. ASTM D3363 – Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.J. Florida Building Code – Fifth Edition (2014).

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install fence and gate assemblies to

withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of components or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.

1.5 SUBMITTALSA. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specification Sections.B. Product data for components and finishes specified.C. Sustainable Design Submittals:

Technical SpecificationsSection 023120 – Ornamental Steel Fences and GatesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

023120-2VERSION: 171018

1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

D. Shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, spacing of components, and anchorage.E. Samples: 8 by 10 inches minimum size sample of fence panel of the selected design

showing fabrication method, workmanship and selected finish coating.F. Copy of warranties specified in Paragraph 1.8 for review by Architect.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fencing and gate assemblies from one source and

by a single manufacturer.B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in design, fabrication,

and production of aluminum canopies, protective covers, and sunshades.C. Installer qualifications: Approved by manufacturer(s) for installation.D. Assemble components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of D1.2 "Structural Welding

Code—Aluminum”.1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.F. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Field Measurements: Check adjacent construction by accurate field measurements

before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by

authorized company official in which the manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship within one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of,other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following:1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, coating finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering.B. Twenty (20) year warranty for factory finish against cracking, peeling, and blistering

under normal use.C. Provide warranties in accordance with Section 01770 – Closeout Procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCING AND GATE ASSEMBLIES



023120-3VERSION: 171018

A. Ornamental fencing system consisting of modular open grill fencing panels fabricated by welding flat steel bars and rods, supported by steel posts and gates and gate hardware.

B. Basis-of Design: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the “Shadow” fixed louver panel fencing assemblies as manufactured by Ametco Manufacturing Corporation, or comparable louver fencing assemblies manufactured by one of the following:1. Smith Fence Co..2. Mitchell Metals, LLC.

C. Fence panel:1. Horizontal Fixed louver bars: Formed louver shaped bars, 1-31/32 by 1/16-inch.

Extend louver flange to allow 80 percent direct visual screening.2. Cross rods: 5/32-inch-diameter rods welded perpendicular to back side of lover bars

and spaced at 5-7/32 inches.3. Perimeter side support bars: 2 by 1/4-inch flat bars.4. Panel height: 62-3/8 inches.5. Panel width: 64-21/32 inches.

D. Gates:1. Provide gates of type and size indicated on the drawings. Equip gates with

manufacturer’s standard hardware as required for complete functional operation.2. Type: Hinged swinging single gate.3. Construction: Welded frame fabricated from steel tubing with open grille panels

matching louver panels fencing material.4. Hinges: Size and type as determined by manufacturer. Provide three (3) hinges for

each leaf.5. Latch: 3/4-inch diameter slide bolt to accommodate padlock.

E. Factory Finishes:1. Hot-dip galvanized to 1.25 ounces per square foot minimum zinc coating in

accordance with ASTM A123. Provide polyester powder coating on standard size components. Provide 2-part polyurethane coating on gate panels.

2. Polyester powder coating: Electrostatically applied colored polyester powder coating heat cured to chemically bond finish to metal substrate.a) Minimum hardness measured in accordance with ASTM D3363: 2H.b) Direct impact resistance tested in accordance with ASTM D2794. Withstand 160 inch-pounds.c) Salt spray resistance tested in accordance with ASTM B117. No undercutting,

rusting, or blistering after 500 hours in 5 percent salt spray at 95 degrees F and 95 percent relative humidity and after 1000 hours less than 3/16 inch undercutting.

d) Weatherability tested in accordance with ASTM D822: No film failure and 88 percent gloss retention after 1 year exposure in South Florida with test panels tilted at 45 degrees.

3. Polyurethane coating: 1.0 mil dry film thickness of coating of test panel cured 30 minutes at 180 degree F and aged 14 days shall resist the following test conditions without failure:


023120-4VERSION: 171018

a) 5 percent salt spray for 500 hours.b) 100 percent relative humidity for 1000 hours.c) Water immersion for 100 hours.d) 20 double rubs with cloth saturated with either lacquer thinner, acetone, MEK,

gasoline, or xylene.e) Exposure to lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids, and cutting oils.f) 16 cycles of 24 hours at 100 percent humidity, 24 hours at 10 degrees F, and 24

hours at 77 degrees F.g) Hardness: H to 2H.h) Flexibility: 1/8 inch conical mandrel.

4. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Prior to fabrication, field measure required dimensions.B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

C. Provide cast concrete footings for fence posts in accordance with Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and the drawings.1. Minimum footing diameter:

a. Terminal and gate posts: 12 inches.b. Intermediate line posts: 10 inches.

2. Allow 8 inches minimum embedment of posts.3. Allow 6 inches minimum concrete beneath post bottom.

D. Provide setting holes for embedment of fence posts. Hole shall be 2 inches minimum greater than post width.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install fencing in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved

shop drawings.B. Install fence posts plumb and level by setting post in hole cast in concrete and grouting

solid. Temporarily brace fence posts with 2 by 4 wood supports until grout is set.C. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged assemblies or components. Remove

damaged components from site and replace.D. Secure fence panels with stainless steel anti-intruder bolts to fence posts prior to setting

posts in footings.E. Gates:

1. Install gates and adjust hardware for smooth operation.2. After installation, test gate. Open and close a minimum of five times. Correct deficiencies and adjust.

F. Touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by manufacturer and matching original coating.



023120-5VERSION: 171018

3.4 CLEANINGA. Periodically clean exposed surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering to

remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly and dry.



023120-6VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 025116 – Termite Control


0025116-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 025116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered

Label.B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying

that treatments furnished comply with requirements.C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit

report for Owner’s record information, including the following as applicable:1. Date and time of application.2. Moisture content of soil before application.3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.6. Areas of application.7. Water source for application.

D. Warranty: Specimen copy of special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to

regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water

saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 COORDINATION

Technical SpecificationsSection 025116 – Termite ControlProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

025116-2VERSION: 171018

A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction.

1.7 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that

termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENTA. General: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product’s EPA-Registered Label.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. “Dragnet FT” permethrin; FMC Corporation; Agricultural Products Group.2. “Prelude” permethrin; Syngenta.3. “Prevail” cypermethrin; FMC Corporation; Agricultural Products Group.4. “Probuild TC” cypermethrin; Syngenta.5. “Termidor” fipronil; BASF Corporation; Agricultural Products.6. “Premise 75” Imidacloprid; Bayer Environmental Science.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance

with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

and with manufacturer’s written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.

Technical SpecificationsSection 025116 – Termite Control


0025116-3VERSION: 171018

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.

3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENTA. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

and with manufacturer’s EPA-Registered Label for products.B. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide

quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer’s EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings,

building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers and piers; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.

3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

4. Allow not less than 12 hours of drying after application before concreteplacement or other construction activities.

C. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

D. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

E. Post warning signs in areas of application.F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.1. Place all irrigation heads a minimum of 12 inches away from structure to prevent

excessive moisture at base of structure.


Technical SpecificationsSection 025116 – Termite ControlProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

025116-4VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 042301 – Structural Clay Unit Masonry


042300-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 042301 – STRUCTURAL CLAY UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Structural clay masonry units.2. Mortar and grout.3. Steel reinforcing bars.4. Masonry-joint reinforcement.5. Ties and anchors.6. Embedded flashing.7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.8. Masonry-cell fill.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for dovetail slots for masonry anchors.2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of

adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.3. Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to clay unit

masonry assemblies.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGSA. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Structural Clay Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:1. Structural clay masonry units.

Technical SpecificationsSection 0142301 – Structural Clay Unit MasonryProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

042300-2VERSION: 171018

2. Weep holes.3. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together

with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of

deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Structural Clay Masonry Units.a. Include data on material properties.b. Include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within

specified tolerances.c. Include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive

strength of units.d. Certificate of conformance stating that brick meets or exceeds applicable

ASTM specifications.2. Mortar admixtures.3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of

ingredients.4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.5. Reinforcing bars.6. Joint reinforcement.7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

Test Reports:8. Structural Clay Masonry Units.

a. Compressive strength.b. 24 hour cold water absorption (if required).c. 5 hour boil absorption (if required).d. Saturation Coefficient (if required).e. Initial Rate of Absorption (I.R.A.).f. Efflorescence according to ASTM C67..g. Weather Classification.h. Durability of surface appearance after 50 cycles of freezing and thawing

according to ASTM C 67 or a list of addresses of buildings in Project's area where proposed brick has been used successfully and with a history of durability.

i. Include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.



042300-3VERSION: 171018

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with propertyspecification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing:

1. All tests shall be performed by an independent certified testing laboratory.a. Testing agency qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for

testing indicated.2. All tests shall be in accordance with ASTM C-67.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 96 inches long by

72 inches high by full thickness, including accessories.a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall

mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high.c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of

exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing).

d. Include flashing and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.e. Apply water repellent, as specified in Section 017900, Water Repellents, to

exterior surface and test for moisture penetration by directing a high-pressure stream of water from a hose against the exterior face of the mock-up to determine effectiveness of repellent.

2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.4. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship.a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities

specifically approved by Architect in writing.b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store clay masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored

in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.


042300-4VERSION: 171018

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended,dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills

with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover

securely in place.B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for

at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to

be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by

spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature

is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL CLAY MASONRY UNITS



042300-5VERSION: 171018

A. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hollow Clay Brick manufactured by Interstate Brick, 9780 S. 5200 W., West Jordan, Utah 84088-5689, or H.C. Muddox, 4875 Bradshaw Road, Sacramento, CA 95827-9793, supplied by Coloroc, or a comparable product by another manufacturer subject to approval by the Architect.

B. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,

headers, bonding, and other special conditions.2. Provide individual units vertically scored on both exterior and interior

exposed faces to simulate Flemish Bond arrangement (a 12 inch wide face adjacent to a 4 inch wide face) when laid end to end in each course.

C. Hollow Clay Brick:1. Color selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s available colors.

Provide second color, as selected by Architect, from the manufacturer’s available colors, for bricks located in lower courses comprising base of walls.

3. ASTM C-652 latest edition, Grade SW, Type HBX or better.4. Dimensions: Match Architect’s sample.5. Minimum compressive strength: 9,000 psi.6. Minimum Saturation Coefficient: 0.78.7. Minimum IRA: 6 g/30 sq. in.8. Maximum IRA 30 g/30 sq. in. Where IRA exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in., pre-wetting

brick is recommended.9. Shapes: Where special shapes are shown on architectural drawings,

manufacturer shall provide shop drawings for architect’s approval prior to manufacturing shapes.

2.2 REINFORCING STEELA. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M,

including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60 (Grade 400)

2.3 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENTA. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:

1. Mill galvanized, carbon- steel wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee

units where indicated.B. For single-wythe masonry, provide truss or ladder type with single pair of side

rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.

2.4 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERALA. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from

materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.


042300-6VERSION: 171018

B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.

C. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.

D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHINGA. Install masonry cell flashing pans (designed for exterior single-wythe masonry

wall systems) with built in adjoining bridge made from recycled polypropylene with chemical stabilizers that prevent UV degradation. Flashing pans shall have a sloped design to direct water to the integrated weep spout. Build into mortar bed joints to expel moisture (unimpeded by mortar droppings) to the exterior of the masonry walls at all flashing/weep vent locations including; base flashing, above door and window openings, above bond beams, and in parapet walls.1. Basis-of-Design Product and Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BlockFlash by Mortar Net Solutions or a comparable product by another manufacturer subject to approval by the Architect.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIESA. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056,

Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALA. Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 Type S consisting by proportion:

1) 1 part Portland cement (ASTM C-150 Type I, IA, ll, llA, lll, lllA or V), less than 6 months old,

2) 1/2 part hydrated lime (ASTM C-207),3) 3-1/2 to 3-1/2 parts sand (ASTM C-144).

Or Portland Cement – lime mortar1) Compressive Strength: 1800 psi.2) Water Retention: 75% minimum.3) Air Content: 12% maximum.3) Sand: 2-1/4 to 4-1/2 parts the sum of separate volumes of cementitious

materials sand (ASTM C-144). B. Grout:

1) Conform to ASTM C 476.



042300-7VERSION: 171018

2) Strength: Greater than or equal to f’m.C. Provide custom color mortar.

2.8 MORTAR MIXESA. Refer to Mortar Schedule for mixes required.

2.9 GROUT MIXINGA. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use per

ASTM C476 Course grout.B. Add admixtures per manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix.C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of grout.

2.10 MORTAR MIXINGA. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use per

ASTM C270.B. Add admixtures per manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix.

1. Do not use admixtures, including water-repellent admixtures, that will prevent or inhibit the water repellent, specified in Section 017900, Water Repellents, from properly adhering to the mortar joints and protecting those joints and the masonry wall assembly against water and moisture penetration into and throughthe wall assembly for the full duration of the period between reapplicationsrecommended by the water repellent manufacturer.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar.D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within 2 hours of mixing.E. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or 2-1/2

hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F.F. Mix colored mortar per manufacturer's instructions.

2.11 MASONRY-CELL INSULATIONA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Forced Foam insulation in Masonry:

a. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc.b. Thermco Foam Insulation by Thermco Corporation of America.c. cfiFOAM, Inc. by Southern Foam Insulation, Inc.

2.12 ACCESSORIESA. Cleaning Solutions: General purpose cleaning agent, not harmful to masonry

Work or adjacent materials.B. Compressible Joint Material: Urethane open-cell foam, 1/2 inch thick by width of

masonry unit, adhesive on 1 side only.


042300-8VERSION: 171018

C. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1, 15 pound asphalt felt.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be

performed.B. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.D. Verify items provided by other Sections of Work are properly sized and located.E. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into

masonry Work.F. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

3.3 MORTAR AND GROUT INSTALLATIONA. Work grout into masonry cavities to eliminate voids where detailed or indicated.B. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar.C. Tool exterior mortar joints as noted.

1. Provide concave and tooled mortar joints. Do not install raked joints.

3.4 INSTALLATIONA. Install masonry construction aligned, plumb, and true in required layout, making

straight, level courses, unless otherwise indicated.B. Construct masonry to full thickness as shown with masonry units of sizes noted

and specified, using whole units wherever possible.C. When required, cut brick neatly by wet-saw to obtain sharp edges without

damage to unit, as approved for providing required bond pattern and proper fit at adjoining items.

D. Build-in items furnished by other trades, and leave accurate openings necessary for subsequent installation of other Work in a manner to maintain required strength and appearance of masonry construction.

E. Fill solidly with mortar around conduit and sleeves passing through masonry Work.

F. Build-in loose angle steel lintels, providing bearing specified and bed lintels in mortar.

G. Provide threaded steel anchors where indicated on Drawings to be built into masonry construction for attachment of Work by other trades.



042300-9VERSION: 171018

H. Conform to requirements of ASTM A307.I. Include nuts with hardened washers where required.J. Provide minimum 1/2 inch shank diameter by 10 inch length with pigtail end,

where size and type are not indicated on Drawings.K. Hot-dip galvanize anchors where used in exterior exposed construction.L. Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining face of brick to be left exposed.

Remove grout and mortar from these surfaces immediately.M. Protect base of brick walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatters by

means of coverings spread on ground or over wall surfaces.N. Adhere to the International Building Code (IBC) or TMS 402/ACI530/ASCE5.

3.5 COURSINGA. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated on Drawings. Protect from

displacement.B. Maintain brick courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints

of uniform thickness.C. Lay scored brick units end to end (running bond) to simulate Flemish Bond

arrangement (a 12” wide face adjacent to a 4” wide face in each course, with each course staggered so that the 4” wide face is centered on the 12” wide face above and below, with the faces of the same width aligned vertically every other course) on both exterior and interior exposed faces. Form concave mortar joints.

3.6 PLACING AND BONDINGA. Lay brick units, in full bed of mortar, with full head joints uniformly jointed with

other Work.B. Bond: Running bond unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.C. Mortar Joints: Concave unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.D. Back-bevel bed joints to remove excess mortar droppings in cavity as Work

progresses.E. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not

permitted.F. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.G. Interlock intersections and external corners.H. Do not shift or tap brick units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where

adjustment needs to be made, remove mortar and replace.I. Perform job-site cutting of brick units with waterbath diamond blade saws to

provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken brick unit corners or edges.

3.7 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT MATERIAL


042300-10VERSION: 171018

A. Install compressible joint material horizontally on top of brick unit below steel shelf angles to provide an expansion joint to allow deflection of angle. Fill joint with backer rod and sealant on weather side.

3.8 EMBEDDED FLASHINGA. Install at all flashing/weep vent locations including; base of wall, above door and

window openings, above bond beams, and in parapet walls.

3.9 WEEPS AND VENTILATORSA. Install weep holes in brick veneer masonry at maximum 16 inches on center

horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles, lintels, bottom of walls, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install cavity ventilators in masonry at maximum 48 inches on center horizontally, at 2 courses above through-wall base flashing, and 3 courses below top of wall.

3.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION INSTALLATIONA. Foam wall insulation is to be pumped into open brick cavities indicated to receive

insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun.

B. Install the wall insulation into the open brick cavities by pumping the foam fromabove through the open top course of brick before each bond beam is installed.Do not inject the foam by drilling injection holes into the brick.

3.11 GROUTED COMPONENTSA. Reinforce bond beam with 2 No. 5 bars, placed top and bottom, unless noted

otherwise.B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within

1/2 inch of dimensioned position.D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTSA. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion

joints.B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner

joints per manufacturer's instructions.C. Size control joint in compliance with Section 079000 for sealant performance.D. Provide fire-stopping sealant at construction joints in fire-rated walls and

partitions. Provide and install per 078400.E. Install control joints at jambs of masonry openings, and at locations indicated on

Drawings, and at maximum 30 feet on center if not indicated otherwise.



042300-11VERSION: 171018

F. Form expansion joint as indicated on Drawings.

3.13 BUILT-IN WORKA. As Work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal

frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items specified in other Sections.

B. Build in items plumb and level.C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill

frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 8 inches from framed openings.

D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.14 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20

feet or more.C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative.D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 20 feet.E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/16 inch in 3 feet.F. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

3.15 CLEANINGA. Remove brick units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged, and replace with new units, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints including corners, openings, and adjacent Work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealant.

C. Cleaning shall conform to Interstate Brick Bulletin 4 “Brick Cleaning Recommendations”, Section 040120 and BIA Technical Note #20 “Cleaning Brickwork”.1) Do not use muriatic acid or sand blasting.2) Contact brick manufacturer for recommendations.

D. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels

E. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3.16 SEALING


042300-12VERSION: 171018

A. Apply water repellant over all exposed exterior brick and mortar surfaces. Consult Interstate Brick Technical Bulletin 1 “Water Repellent Coatings”. See Section 071900, Water Repellants.

3.17 PROTECTIONA. Without damaging completed Work, provide protective boards at exposed

external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.B. Provide weather-tight protective cover over masonry walls exposed to elements

during construction to keep moisture out of cores and cavities.C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to

installer, which ensures brick masonry Work being without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


Technical SpecificationsSection 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing


054000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 054000 – COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Non-load bearing metal stud and partition framing, with anchorage and bracing.2. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Division 01 of

the specifications, Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.2 REFERENCESA. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1. “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.”2. “Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual” (Latest).

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)1. ANSI A58.1 - “Roof, Wind and Snow Loads.”

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)1. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process,

Structural (Physical) Quality.2. ASTM A570 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet & Strip, Structural Quality.3. ASTM A525 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

General Requirements.4. ASTM A611 - “Standard Specification for Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon,

Structural.”5. ASTM C955 - “Standard Specification for Lead Bearing Steel Studs, Runners

(Track), Bracing, and Bridging.”D. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 - “Structural Welding Code” and D1.3. - “Specifications for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures.”

2. AWS - “Standard Qualification Procedure.”E. Federal Specification:

1. FS TT-P-636C - Rust Inhibitive Paint.F. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA) - “Lightweight Steel Framing Systems

Manual,” latest Edition.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Design Requirements: The supplier shall design and/or verify the size and strength of

all light gauge cold-formed Metal Framing members and connections in accordance with the ML/SFA Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.1. Design shall use the superimposed design loads specified in the “Design Criteria”

section of the “Structural General Notes” in the contract drawings.

Technical SpecificationsSection 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal FramingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station

054000-2VERSION: 171018

2. Design shall be based on the Standard Building Code 1997 Edition for a wind speed of 102 mph.

3. Design shall conform to: AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. Wall bridging shall be designed to provide resistance to minor axis bending and rotation of wall studs. Designated selected exterior and/or interior walls shall be designed to provide frame stability and lateral load resistance. All connections (member to member, and member to structure) shall be designed and detailed.

4. Qualification of Field Welding: quality welding process and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure.”

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Follow Division 01 of the Specifications for Submittal Procedures.

1. All shop drawings and calculations must bear the seal and signature of an Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

2. Product Data a. Manufacturer’s literature containing product and installation specifications

and details.3. Shop Drawings

a. Documents illustrating materials, shop coatings, steel thickness, details of fabrication and erection, details of attachment, spacing of fasteners, required accessories and critical installation procedures.

4. Calculationsa. Engineering calculations or data verifying the framing assembly’s ability to

meet or exceed design requirements as stated here-in and required by local codes, prepared under the supervision of a Professional Engineer registered in the state of Florida.

5. Assurance/Control Submittalsa. Test Reports: Submit the following reports to the Architect, with copy to

Contractor. 1) Testing/Inspection reports conducted on shop and field-bolted and

welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results. Note inspection findings.

b. Certificates: Manufacturer’s certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

c. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience.

2. Installed: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.



054000-3VERSION: 171018

B. Pre-Installation Meetings1. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this

section. Notify the Architect of the meeting date and time at least 7 days prior.2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.3. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related work.

C. Agenda1. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of installation of other work including door

and window frames and mechanical and electrical work.2. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and

support provisions for interfacing work.3. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.4. Review drawings.5. Review and finalize construction schedule related to cold-formed metal framing

installation and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

6. Review required inspections, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.

7. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.

8. Review safety precautions relating to operations.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Follow Division 01 of the Specifications for Product Requirements: Transport, handle,

store and protect products.B. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in

manufacturer’s unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings and protect against mechanical damage to units. Store materials on a flat plain. Any damaged materials shall be removed from the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. All studs and/or joists and accessories shall be of the type, size, gauge and spacing

shown on the plans or as required by manufacturer design, if called for. Studs, runners (track), bracing, and bridging shall be manufactured per ASTM Specification C-955.

B. All galvanized studs, joists and accessories shall be formed from steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A-466, as set forth in Section 1.2 of the AISI Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members (latest edition).

C. All galvanized studs, joists, and related framing accessories shall have a minimum G-90 coating.

D. All section properties shall be calculated in accordance with the AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members (latest edition).

Technical SpecificationsSection 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal FramingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

054000-4VERSION: 171018

2.2 FABRICATIONA. General: Framing components may be prefabricated prior to erection. Fabricate

components plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated components in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.

B. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.

C. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONA. EXAMINATIONFollow Division 01 of the Specifications for Execution Requirements:

Verification of existing conditions before starting work.B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and

conditions are as required, and ready to receive work.C. Report in writing to the Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect

satisfactory execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STUDWALLSA. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with

manufacturer’s printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stud Walls1. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks

accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches on center spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners, or 16 inches on center for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners, at ends of tracks and at stud locations.

2. Position studs plumb in runners and space no greater than 16 inches and not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to upper and lower tracks using self-drilling, screws or welding in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations such that the connection meets or exceeds the design loads required at that connection.

3. Brace all studs at mid-height for added strength, stiffness, and fire-stopping.4. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Double studs at door, window

and sidelight jams. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing.

5. Provide deflection allowance below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for non-load bearing framing in a method recommended by stud manufacturer.a. Where walls and partitions must close out against the deck for smoke and

fire separation, provide a top track rigidly attached to vertical studs but free



054000-5VERSION: 171018

to move vertically in a 14 gauge break-formed deep leg track rigidly attached to deck with slack to accommodate structural live load deflections noted on drawings.

b. Where wall or partition studs pass by the structural deck provide vertical slide clips welded or screw attached to the structural support but do not attach rigidly to studs.

3.3 INSTALLATION: PRE-FABRICATED AND PANELIZED CONSTRUCTIONA. Panels shall be designed to resist construction and handling loads as well as service

loads.

3.4 INSTALLATION: NON-PANELIZED (STICK-BUILT) MEMBERSA. Align track accurately at supporting structure and fasten to structure as shown on shop

drawings.B. Track intersections shall butt evenly.C. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to flanges or welds of upper

and lower tracks. Axially loaded studs shall be seated squarely in both top and bottom tracks.

3.5 INSTALLATION: JOISTSA. Joist shall be located directly over bearing studs or a load distribution member shall be

provided to transfer loads.B. Provide web stiffeners where necessary at reaction points, and at points of

concentrated loads, as shown on the shop drawings.C. Bridging, either strap or solid, shall be provided as shown on the shop drawings.D. Provide additional joists under parallel partitions where the partition length exceeds ½

of the joist span.E. Provide additional studs around all openings which are larger than the stud spacing

and as noted on the shop drawings.F. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from

rotation.

3.6 FASTENING AND ATTACHMENTSA. Anchorage of the tracks to the structure shall be with methods designed for the specific

application of sheet to that surface. Size, penetration, type and spacing shall be determined by design.

B. Welds shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, and AISI Manual Section 4.2. Welds may be butt, fillet, spot, or groove type, the appropriateness of which shall be determined by, and within the design calculations. All welds shall be touched-up using zinc rich paint to galvanized members, and paint similar to that used by the manufacturer for painted members.

C. Steel drill screws shall be of the minimum diameter indicated by the design of that particular attachment detail. Penetration through joined materials shall not be less than 3 exposed threads.

Technical SpecificationsSection 054000 – Cold-Formed Metal FramingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

054000-6VERSION: 171018

D. Wire tying in structural applications is not permitted.

3.7 CONSTRUCTIONA. Site Tolerances

1. Vertical alignment (plumbness) of studs shall be within 1/960th (1/8 inch in 10.0 feet) (3.175mm in 3.048m) of the span.

2. Horizontal alignment (levelness) of walls shall be within 1/960th (1/8 inch in 10.0 feet) (3.175mm in 3.048m) of their respective lengths.

3. Spacing of studs shall not be more than +1/8 inch (3.175mm) from the designed spacing providing that the cumulative error does not exceed the requirements of the finishing materials.

4. Squareness - Prefabricated panels shall not be more than 1/8 inch (3.175mm) out of square within the length of that panel.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Follow Division 01 of the Specifications for Quality Control: Field testing and inspection.

1. Inspect all work in order to assure strict conformance to the shop drawings at all phases of construction.

2. All members shall be checked for proper alignment, bearing, completeness of attachments, proper placement, reinforcement, etc.

3. All attachments shall be checked for conformance with the shop drawings. All welds shall be touched-up in accordance with Section 3.6 – B.

4. General inspection of structure shall be completed prior to applying loads to those members.

5. Inspections where and as required by local codes shall be controlled inspections.


Technical SpecificationsSection 055000 – Metal Fabrications

Project No. 1622Plant City Fire Statoin #3

055000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Miscellaneous framing and supports.2. Metal Ladders3. Metal bollards.4. Miscellaneous steel trim.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they

are not specified in other Sections.

1.3 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply

with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shopprimers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,

sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles.2. Steel framing and supports for countertops.3. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not

specified in other Sections.

Technical SpecificationsSection 055000 – Metal FabricationsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

055000-2VERSION: 171018

6. Metal ladders.7. Metal bollards.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.B. Welding certificates.C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.”

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous

with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section

014000 “Quality Requirements” to design metal ladders ladders and architectural louver system.

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 METALSA. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.



055000-3VERSION: 171018

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.1. Size of Channels: As indicated.2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with

G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.G. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.I. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 FASTENERSA. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for

exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts,ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item

being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six

times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.G. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)

complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.


055000-4VERSION: 171018

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099120 Interior Painting."B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich

primer.C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated

metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20

and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERALA. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.



055000-5VERSION: 171018

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip withintegrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inchembedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTSA. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed

to complete the Work.B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless

otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 METAL LADDERSA. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders.2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Aluminum Ladders:1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.2. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2

inches deep, 3/4 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick.3. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch deep and not less than

1/8 inch thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel

fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets.5. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar

grating or extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension.

6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted aluminum brackets.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIMA. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of

profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.


055000-6VERSION: 171018

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or

masonry construction.C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.

2.9 METAL BOLLARDSA. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate.B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch-thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill

baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts.C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate

welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inchlarger than OD of bollard.

D. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERALA. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend

into surrounding surface.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHESA. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean

railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.



055000-7VERSION: 171018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for

installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, throughbolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTSA. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being

supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDSA. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days

before installing.B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill

annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inchtoward bollard.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.


055000-8VERSION: 171018

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


Technical SpecificationsSection 061000 – Rough Carpentry


061000-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes miscellaneous wood materials to be used in the construction of

primarily steel framed structures. Final material characteristics must be determined based on code requirements for flame spread and flammability.1. Wood blocking.2. Wood nailers.3. Wood furring.4. Wood grounds.5. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches

nominal in least dimension.C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the

following:1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated.

1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with the authority having jurisdiction for all lumber thickness and treatment.

Technical SpecificationsSection 061000 – Rough CarpentryProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

061000-2VERSION: 171018

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERALA. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the

American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of

dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.B. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. Strength as required meet code requirements.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALSA. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 lumber except that lumber

that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved

by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing, and in direct contact with masonry and concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALSA. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that

comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27 plywood. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of

treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516, for plywood.

2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated for all

plywood backing boards used throughout the project.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBERA. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee

National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.B. Miscellaneous interior blocking Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade and any of the following

species:1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.

Technical SpecificationsSection 061000 – Rough Carpentry


061000-3VERSION: 171018

2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA.3. Northern species; NLGA.4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.5 TIMBER AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBERA. For timbers of 5-inch nominal size and thicker, provide material complying with the

following requirements:1. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural No. 1 grade; SPIB.

B. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.2. Blocking.3. Nailers.4. Furring.5. Grounds.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELSA. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D

Plugged, fire-retardant treated, 5/8 inch thick.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Fasteners:

1. Provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex

nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,

and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for ac-curate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as re-quired by code and complying with the following:1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.

Technical SpecificationsSection 061000 – Rough CarpentryProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

061000-4VERSION: 171018

3. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code.D. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA De-

sign/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.

E. Fastening Methods:1. Plywood Backing Panels Screw to supports..


Technical SpecificationsSection 064116 – Interior Architectural Woodwork


064116-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 064116 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.2. Plastic-laminate countertops.3. Quartz-material countertops.4. Bamboo Plywood cabinets.5. Closet and utility shelving.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging

strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


2. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including

concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets,

soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.3. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

D. Samples for Initial Selection:1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface

finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

2. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish with edge banding on 1 edge.

3. Quartz-surfacing materials.

Technical SpecificationsSection 064116 – Interior Architectural WoodworkProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

064116-2VERSION: 171018

E. Samples for Verification:1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., for each species

and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for

transparent-finished woodwork.3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for

each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.

4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished.

5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.6. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.7. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.G. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification

Program certificates.H. Qualification Data: For Installer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate

products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage

woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork

by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.



064116-3VERSION: 171018

1.8 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other

related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for

each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Plywood finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on

components with exposed or semiexposed edges.D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not

indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure

decorative laminates by Formica Corporation, color as indicated on drawings, or comparable product by one of the following:a. Lamin-Art, Inc.b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.c. Panolam Industries International Incorporated.d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.e. Pionite

E. Quartz Material: 93 percent crushed quartz aggregate combined with resins and pigments and fabricated into slabs using vacuum vibro-compaction process complying with ISSFA-21. Manufacturers: Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Hanstone 3cm Quartz Surfacing material or comparable product by one of the following:a. Ceasar Stone Quartz.b. Zodiaq by Dupont

2. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated.3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard

range.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIESA. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with

architectural cabinets.


064116-4VERSION: 171018

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.D. Bar Pulls (European Type): Back mounted, solid metal, stainless steel finish, 6-1/4

inches long, 1-1/2 inches deep, and 1/2 inch in diameter.E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071.F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests,

B04081.G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide.

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide.

4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves.5. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high

and 16 inches wide.I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, black, molded-

plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug

Mockett & Company, Inc.L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for

steel base.M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with

product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln

dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber,

kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.1. Douglas fir-larch.2. Douglas fir-south.3. Douglas fir-larch (north).4. Hem-fir.5. Hem-fir (north).



064116-5VERSION: 171018

6. Southern pine.7. Spruce-pine-fir (south).8. Spruce-pine-fir.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that

comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Woodworker’s option.1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.

G. Adhesive for Bonding Quartz Surfacing: Manufacturer’s specifications.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERALA. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for

wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick

or Less: 1/16 inch .2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 QUARTZ-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPSA. Grade: Premium.B. Quartz-Material Thickness: 3cm.


064116-6VERSION: 171018

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors complying with the following requirements:

1. Basis of design: by Ceasarstone, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.

E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.

2.7 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVINGA. Grade: Custom.B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch plywood.

2.8 SHOP FINISHINGA. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.

Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas.B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion

and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in

Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with

requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed

shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair

damaged finish at cuts.E. ire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to

comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for completeinstallation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.



064116-7VERSION: 171018

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more

than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, masonry or hanging strips.

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7Section "Joint Sealants."

I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and

visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied

finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



064116-8VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 071353 – Sheet Membrane Waterproofing and Crack Isolation


071353-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 071353 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Sheet membrane waterproofing and crack isolation for interior installationsreceiving ceramic tile finishes.

2. Sheet membrane waterproofing and crack isolation for exterior installations receiving ceramic tile finishes.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ANSI A108.13 - Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-

Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone.B. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,

Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation.C. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation

Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation.D. ASTM C 627 - Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-

Type Floor Tester.E. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.F. ASTM E 96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.G. TCNA Handbook - TCNA Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each specified product.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealers, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Shop Drawings:

1. Include details sheet membrane waterproofing installation, with flashings and terminations.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Technical SpecificationsSection 071353 – Sheet Membrane Waterproofing and Crack IsolationProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

071353-2VERSION: 171018

2.1 SHEET MEMBRANE INTERIOR WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATIONMEMBRANE

A. Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, fluid-applied product intended for use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

B. Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, fluid-applied product intended for use as both a crack isolation membrane and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Sheet Membrane: ANSI A118.10; composite sheet membrane made from an alloy of non-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) with non woven fiber laminated to both sides.1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Noble Company.2. Basis of Design Product: NobleSeal TS.

D. Performance:1. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM ASTM E 96/E96M, Procedure E; maximum

0.15 perms.2. Crack Isolation: Rated “High Performance” in the System Crack Resistance

portion of ANSI A118.12.

2.2 ACCESSORIESA. Bonding Mortar:

1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.B. Bonding Adhesive: Type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer.

1. Basis of Design Product: NobleBond EXT.C. Mortar Bed:

1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset): ANSI A108.02.D. Seam Sealant: Waterproof type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer.

1. Basis of Design Product: NobleSealant 150.

Technical SpecificationsSection 071353 – Sheet Membrane Waterproofing and Crack Isolation


071353-3VERSION: 171018

E. Perimeter Sealant: ASTM C 920, construction sealant, type recommended by sheet membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates for unacceptable conditions affecting installation of sheet

membrane and tile.B. Correct unacceptable conditions before installing sheet membrane.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Examine, prepare, and test concrete floors for finish flooring installation in accordance

with ASTM F 710. Perform one moisture emission test in accordance with ASTM F 1869 and one alkalinity test for every 2,000 sf. Obtain instructions corrective measures from flooring and adhesive manufacturers when test results are not within specified limits.1. Surface Tolerance: Maximum variation from plane of 3/16 inch in 10 feet.

a. Floor systems over which tile will be installed shall be in conformance with applicable building codes.

2. When NobleBond EXT is used as a bonding agent:a. Moisture Emission Rate: Maximum is 4 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours

when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.b. Relative Humidity: Maximum 85 percent.c. Alkalinity Range: pH of 7.0 to 9.0.

B. When tested moisture emission rate exceeds specified maximum, consult membrane manufacturer and bond coat manufacturer for acceptable mitigation methods and materials.

3.3 INSTALLATION - SHEET MEMBRANE INTERIOR WATERPROOFINGA. Comply with ANSI A108.13, TCNA Handbook, and the manufacturer’s instructions for

installation of sheet membrane waterproofing.B. Bonded Installation for Thin-Set Applications:

1. Apply bonding adhesive for full coverage of substrate.2. Install sheet membrane and fully embed into bonding material.

a. A carpet type roller may be used to embed sheet membrane on horizontal surfaces.

b. Hand roller or flat side of trowel can be used to embed sheet membrane on vertical surfaces.

C. Overlap sheets minimum 2 inches (50 mm) shingle fashion in direction of water drainage. Seal joints watertight.

D. Turn sheet membrane installed on floors up vertical surfaces minimum 2 inches (50 mm) higher than flood plane and bond to substrate.

Technical SpecificationsSection 071353 – Sheet Membrane Waterproofing and Crack IsolationProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

071353-4VERSION: 171018

1. Shower Walls: When sheet membrane is turned up and terminated behind backer board, extend minimum 3 inches (75 mm) above flood plane and fasten to substrate win no penetrations less than 2 inches (50 mm) above flood plane.

E. Extend sheet membrane into floor drains. Cut drain opening in sheet membrane and seal to drain body. Secure membrane with floor drain clamping ring.

F. Seal sheet membrane watertight to items penetrating sheet membrane.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SHEET MEMBRANE CRACK ISOLATIONA. Comply with ANSI A108.17, TCNA Handbook, and the manufacturers instructions for

installation of sheet membrane waterproofing.B. Apply bonding mortar for full coverage of substrate.C. Install sheet membrane and fully embed into bonding material.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Upon completion of sheet membrane waterproofing installation, plug drains, dam

perimeter of waterproofing and fill with water with a minimum deep required by local code and maintain for 24 hours.1. Inspect waterproofing for leaks.2. Repair leaks and re-test until watertight.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports. Indicate corrective measures required to make installation watertight.

3.6 PROTECTIONA. Protect sheet membrane from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and prolonged exposure

to sunlight.


Technical SpecificationsSection 071900 – Water Repellents


071900-1VERSION: 160415

SECTION 071900 – WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and

horizontal surfaces:1. Cast-in-place concrete.2. Clay brick masonry.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 4 Section “Clay Unit Masonry Assemblies”

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General Performance: Water repellents shall meet performance requirements

indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation.1. Water Repellents: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing substrate assemblies representing those indicated for this Project.

B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens.1. Cast-in Place Concrete: ASTM C 642.2. Clay Brick: ASTM C 67.3. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco): ASTM D 6532.

C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following:1. Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of

treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission in comparison of treated and

untreated specimens, according to ASTM D 1653.D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in

leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514.

E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent properties after 2500 hours of weathering according to ASTM G 154 in comparison to water-repellent-treated specimens before weathering.

F. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.

Technical SpecificationsSection 071900 – Water RepellentsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

071900-2VERSION: 160415

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTINGA. Preconstruction Testing: Installed water repellents shall comply with performance

requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard substrate assemblies by a qualified testing agency.

1.5 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.2. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate

and spreading rate for each separate coat.3. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified in Part 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated, 12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator.D. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer.E. Field quality-control reports.F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by

manufacturer.B. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide water repellents

listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."C. Mockups: Apply water repellent to each type of substrate required.

1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect.2. Size: 10 sq. ft.3. Final approval by Architect of water-repellent application will be from test

applications.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted

weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according tomanufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements:1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall

assemblies.3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so

for 24 hours.4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and

below 100 deg F.5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.6. Not less than 24 hours have passed since surfaces were last wet.



071900-3VERSION: 160415

7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator

agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTSA. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of

alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.

B. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.

C. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.

D. Siliconate, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, methyl siliconate water repellent with 400 g/L or less of VOCs.

E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:1. Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB2. Hydrozo Enviroseal Double 7 For Brick3. Huls Chem-Trete BSM20 and Aqua-Trete

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance

with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent

manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.

2. Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents.

3. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent.

4. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.

5. Mortars and grout shall have been allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days.6. Remove and repoint any damaged mortar or cracks in the mortar joints

exceeding .02”.7. Allow repointed mortar to cure 7 days prior to application.


071900-4VERSION: 160415

8. All caulking and sealant work must be done and allowed to cure completely before application of water repellents. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that

could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions. Assure that all surfaces are clean and dry.

B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.

C. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.

D. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion

and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.

3.3 APPLICATIONA. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B. All materials, along with surrounding air, must be maintained above 45 Fahrenheit degrees during application.

C. Test a small area of surface to insure compatibility with existing conditions, and to establish proper coverage rates.

D. Do not dilute or alter water repellents.E. Apply water repellent from the bottom of the wall up. Initially fog the wall down with a

fine mist, followed by flooding the wall with a minimum 8 inch rundown using a manual-pump low-pressure sprayer. Roll or brush out excessive drip areas.

F. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 15 psi-pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle, roller or brush to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.

G. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.



071900-5VERSION: 160415

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following

procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied:1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water-

repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.

B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application.1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will

be tested.2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.

3.5 CLEANINGA. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or

damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.



071900-6VERSION: 160415

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 072100 – Building Insulation


072100-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.2. Glass-fiber and mineral fiber blanket insulation.3. Masonry cell insulation.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified

as part of roofing construction.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:



for low-emitting materials.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for each product.B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the

fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

Technical SpecificationsSection 072100 – Building InsulationProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

072100-2VERSION: 171018

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment.2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to

Project site before installation time.3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible

in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARDA. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman

numeral designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics.

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:a. DiversiFoam Products.b. Dow Chemical Company (The).c. Owens Corning.d. Pactiv Corporation.

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER AND MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATIONA. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber or Mineral Fiber Batts: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Provide one of the following:1. “Unfaced Precut Batts”; Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.2. “Unfaced Standard Density Batts”; Knauf Fiber Glass.3. “Thermal Batts”; Owens Corning.4. “SAFB Insulation”; Fibrex Insulations, Inc.5. “Thermafiber FS-15 Blankets”; Thermafiber.



072100-3VERSION: 171018

B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Provide one of the following:1. CertaPro AcoustaTherm Batt”; CertainTeed Corp.2. “Unfaced Batts”; Johns Manville.3. “Sound Attenuation Batts”; Owens Corning.4. “SAFB Insulation”; Fibrex Insulations, Inc.5. “Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets”; Thermafiber.

C. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content.

2.3 MASONRY-CELL INSULATIONA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Forced Foam insulation in Masonry:

a. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc.

2.4 ACCESSORIESA. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.1. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, or 33 mcg/cu. m, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


072100-4VERSION: 171018

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including

removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATIONA. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled.C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and

fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

F. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

G. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces.

H. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE MASONRY SUBSTRATESA. Install board insulation between furring members on interior surface of exterior

concrete masonry walls receiving furred gypsum board by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive

according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.



072100-5VERSION: 171018

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTIONA. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Glass-Fiber and Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing

members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

3.1 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CELL INSULATIONA. Foam wall insulation is to be pumped into open CMU block cavities indicated to receive

insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming complete coverage. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun.

B. Foam wall insulation shall be installed in the open clay masonry brick prior to each bond beam pour. Clay masonry will be exposed on both sides and cannot be drilled.Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun.

3.2 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather

exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



072100-6VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 072726 – Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers


072726-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-retarding membrane air barriers.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the

movement of air.B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides

continuity.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:1. Product Data: For coatings, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For coatings, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors

employed by the Installer, who work on Project.B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air

barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are

trained and approved by manufacturer.1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance

Program and

Technical SpecificationsSection 072726 – Fluid-Applied Membrane Air BarriersProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

072726-2VERSION: 171018

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate

temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier

performance.2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or

mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERALA. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories

from single source from single manufacturer.B. VOC Emissions: Products shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs

when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, or 33 mcg/cu. m, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air

barrier. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 783 or ASTM E 2357.

2.3 VAPOR-RETARDING MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERA. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified

bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash Liquid.2) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LM.3) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 120SP/R.

b. Synthetic Polymer Membrane:1) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Liquid.2) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 32.3) Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc.; Rub-R-Wall Airtight.



072726-3VERSION: 171018

2. Physical and Performance Properties:a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.

pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm; ASTM E 96/E 96M.c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 500 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a

complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material

manufacturer.C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.D. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.E. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-

sensitive adhesive tape.F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and

Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.G. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place,

polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

H. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil- thick, self-adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance value of 37 perms.

I. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50- to 65-mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer-recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners.

J. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.b. Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan.c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.

K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50(low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

L. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.


072726-4VERSION: 171018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or

other contaminants.2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended

by air-barrier manufacturer.3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture

by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray

affecting other construction.C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and

other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate

pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp

corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane

to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENTA. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate

according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's

recommended preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.



072726-5VERSION: 171018

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATIONA. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier

manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and

base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas

that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed

to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane

air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Fill gaps in miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.G. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations

with termination mastic.H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit

and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inchesbeyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATIONA. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips

and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same

day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to

substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.1. Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended

in writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry film thickness, applied in one coat.


072726-6VERSION: 171018

C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material or strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection

for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building

envelope with no gaps or holes.2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities,

protrusions, and mortar droppings.4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been

maintained.5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements

and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.10. Compatible materials have been used.11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been

provided.12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with

requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.

13. All penetrations have been sealed.C. Tests: As determined by testing agency.D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.



072726-7VERSION: 171018

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of

construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as

required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



072726-8VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim


076200-1VERSION: 171018

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Formed equipment support flashing.B. Related Sections:

1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. All manufacturers shall meet ES-1Wind Standards.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and

elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams and dimensions.

3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

Technical SpecificationsSection 076200 – SummaryProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #3

076200-2VERSION: 171018


1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet

metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner

to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and

ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

1.7 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining

construction to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALSA. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

1. Finish: No. 2D (dull, cold rolled).B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content.

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALSA. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.



076200-3VERSION: 171018

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 5-lb/100 sq. ft.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective

coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head.

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.4. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching

internal gutter width.C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type

recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound

sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERALA. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricates items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.


076200-4VERSION: 171018

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints.

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONSA. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

2.6 FINISHESA. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"

for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual

locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and

securely anchored.B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions

detrimental to performance of the Work.C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



076200-5VERSION: 171018

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATIONA. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to

minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches.

C. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work

securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated.6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used


076200-6VERSION: 171018

or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-outresistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not

less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920"Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder

into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposedsurfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATIONA. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing

with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed

tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.



076200-7VERSION: 171018

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



076200-8VERSION: 171018

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 079200 – Joint Sealants


079200-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 079200 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Silicone joint sealants for glazing assemblies.2. Urethane joint sealants for concrete masonry construction3. Latex joint sealants for acoustical treatments.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants.2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.3. Section 093000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.4. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at

perimeters with acoustical sealants.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured

sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide

Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

Technical SpecificationsSection 079200 – Joint SealantsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #03

079200-2VERSION: 171117

C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single

manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet.3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTYA. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to

repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable

to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.



079200-3VERSION: 171117

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERALA. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content: Sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following:1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content

of 250 g/L or less.3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content

of 775] g/L or less.4. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for

joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS FOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIESA. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS AND PRIMERSA. Two-component, non-sag, Polyurethane-base material; applicable in horizontal,

vertical, and overhead joints; principally a chemical cure to form and elastomeric substance; color introduced through a color-pak system.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:


079200-4VERSION: 171117

1. Sikaflex 2c, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, is considered to conform to the requirements of this specification and has performed satisfactorily for joint sealing for a minimum of three years.

2. Sikaflex Primer 429, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, is considered to conform to the requirements of this specification and has performed satisfactorily for joint sealing for a minimum of fifty years.

3. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified products will be considered providing the Contractor requests its use in writing to the Architect. This request shall be accompanied by (a) A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds the specified performance criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards; (b) Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a fifteen year proven record of performance of joint sealing confirmed by actual field tests and five successful installations that the Architect can investigate.

2.4 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FOR URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS AND PRIMERSA. Properties of the Mixed Polyurethane Sealant (Sika-flex-2c):

1. Pot Life: 3-4 hours2. Initial Cure (Tack-Free Time): 6-8 hours.3. Consistency: Non-sag/self-leveling.4. Color: 43 Architectural color standard via color pack system.

B. Properties of the Cured Polyurethane Sealant (Sikaflex-2c):1. Tensile Properties (ASTM D-412) at 14 days:

a) Tensile Strength: 175 psi min.b) Elongation at Break: 650% min.c) Tensile Stress at 100% Elongation: Non-sag 75 psi, self-

leveling 100 psi.2. Hardness (ASTM D-2240) at 14 days (Shore A):

a) Non-Sag: 30 max.b) Self-Leveling: 45 max.

3. Tear Strength (ASTM D-624) at 14 days – non-sag 75 lbs/in, sel-leveling 100 lbs/in.

4. Adhesion in Peel (TT-S-00227E) at 21 days:a) Concrete: 20 lb min.b) Aluminum: 25 lb min.c) Glass: 25 lb min.

5. Service Range: 40 to 170 F.6. Conform to Specification TT-S-0227E, Type I and II, Class A.7. Conform to ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade P or NS.8. Capable of + of the average joint width when tested in accordance with the

durability bond test of Federal Specification TT-S-0027E.9. Non-staining.10. Final Cure: 3 days max.

C. Properties of the Uncured Primer (Sikaflex Primer 429):



079200-5VERSION: 171117

1. Dry time prior to sealant installation: >1<8 hours2. Consistency: Brush-, dauber- or spray-applied liquid.3. Color: Clear.

D. Properties of the Cured Primer (Sikaflex Primer 429):1. Promotes adhesion to the following substrates:

a) Cast-in-Place Concrete.b) Precast Concrete.c) Concrete Unit Masonry.d) Mortar.e) Grout.f) Brick.

2. Non-staining.3. Service Range: 40 to 170 F.4. The primer shall conform to Specification TT-S-0227E, Type I and II, Class A.5. The sealant shall conform to ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade P or NS.6. Capable of being reapplied if necessary..7. Acceptable for use in joints which will be subjected to total water immersion.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTSA. Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with

ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKINGA. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

B. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.


079200-6VERSION: 171117

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants

to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with

adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:a. Concrete.b. Masonry.c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means

that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:a. Metal.b. Glass.c. Porcelain enamel.d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTSA. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.



079200-7VERSION: 171117

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used

between sealants and backs of joints.E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same

time backings are installed:1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning

or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphsbelow to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated

per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 CLEANINGA. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses

by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


079200-8VERSION: 171117

3.5 PROTECTIONA. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


Technical SpecificationsSection 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames


081113-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes hollow-metal work.B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer

recycled content and cost.C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal

thicknesses.3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal

thicknesses.4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.5. Details of each different wall opening condition.6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.7. Details of accessories.8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

Technical SpecificationsSection 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and FramesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #03

081113-2VERSION: 171117

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for

tests performed by a qualified testing agency.1. Exterior Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames: A Miami-Dade Notice of Acceptance.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Ingersoll-Rand Company. Subject to compliance with

requirements, comparable products by one of the following manufacturer’s may be submitted for consideration:1. Amweld International, LLC.2. Gensteel Doors Inc.3. Pioneer Industries, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSA. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed

and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMESA. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for

materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.



081113-3VERSION: 171117

2. Doors:a. Type: As indicated on the Drawings.b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053

inch.d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.e. Core: Steel-stiffened.

3. Frames:a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMESA. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for

materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide IR Series Flush Outswing Commercial Steel Doors w/wo Panic Exit Devices by Ingersoll-Rand.

C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated on the Drawings.b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053-inch, with

minimum G60 or A60 coating.d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.e. Core: Steel stiffened.

1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btuwhen tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames:a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053-inch,

with minimum G60 or A60 coating.b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Factory Prime.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORSA. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inchthick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.


081113-4VERSION: 171117

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.

4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042inch, and as follows:1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 MATERIALSA. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

suitable for exposed applications.C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free

of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating

designation; mill phosphatized.1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.



081113-5VERSION: 171117

2.7 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately

form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical

stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber

2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets.

4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

5. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.6. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to

permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no

visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and

bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:.1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and asfollows:1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.


081113-6VERSION: 171117

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door

silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door

silencers.b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

8. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-

mounted door hardware.2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers

where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of

hollow-metal work.2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior

doors and frames.3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and

installation types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHESA. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.9 ACCESSORIESA. Mullions: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.



081113-7VERSION: 171117

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely

fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated.

Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 860-11 as required by standards specified.1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

b. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have

been properly set and secured.f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with

grout containing antifreezing agents.2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to

floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.


081113-8VERSION: 171117

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-

fiber insulation.5. In-Place Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32inch.

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32

inch.2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before

final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.



081113-9VERSION: 171117

F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



081113-10VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 081416 – Flush Wood Doors


081416-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes solid-core doors as follows:

1. Doors with wood-veneer faces with or without factory finishing.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of door.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; requirements for veneer matching; fire ratings; and other pertinent data.

D. Samples: For each face material and finish.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated.B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.4. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTIONA. Certified Wood: Wood doors shall be certified according to the American Tree Farm

System's "AFF Standard," the AF&PA's Sustainable Forestry Initiative, FSC STD-01-

Technical SpecificationsSection 081416 – Flush Wood DoorsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #03

081416-2VERSION: 171117

001 and FSC STD-40-004, or the standards of the Programme for Endorsement of Forest Certification.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors:1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.2. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in

ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.C. Veneer for Doors Scheduled for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces) 2. Species and Cut: White birch, plain sliced 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center balance 5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only

by mullions.D. Interior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors:

1. Core: Particleboard.2. Construction: Three plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before faces are applied.E. Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance.

F. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

2.3 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality

standard, and as indicated.B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do

not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces and the top and bottom and sides after fitting and machining.1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.


Technical SpecificationsSection 083613 – Sectional Doors


083613-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 083613 – SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes: Electrically operated sectional doors, operators, controls and accessories.B. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel supports.2. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.3. Division 8 Section “Glazing”.4. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections and service for powered door

operators.

1.3 REFERENCESA. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form

a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standarddesignation.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Structural Performance: See drawings for wind pressure loads, impact resistance

requirements are Missile Level E for exterior building components and cladding. B. Spring Cycle Requirements: 25,000 cycles.

1.5 SUBMITTALSA. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating track details, head and jamb conditions,

spring shafts, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures, operator mounts and other related information.

D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of metal finishes.

Technical SpecificationsSection 083613 – Sectional DoorsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station #03

083613-2VERSION: 171117

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed

specified requirements.2. Certificates: Submit installer qualifications.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:1. Warranty documents specified herein.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on

projects of similar size and complexity, and trained and authorized by the door dealer to perform the work of this section.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLINGA. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to

avoid construction delays.C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers with identification labels intact.D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful

environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

1.9 MAINTENANCEA. Extra Materials: Provide additional material for use by owner in building

maintenance. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section. Service and repair should be performed by an authorized Raynor dealer.

B. Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s consideration and acceptance maintenance service agreement for products installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERA. Manufacturer: Raynor Door.



083613-3VERSION: 171117

1. Contact: P.O. Box 448, 1101 East River Road, Dixon, IL 61021-0448;Telephone: (800) 472-9667, (815) 288-1431; Fax: (815) 288-7142; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.raynor.com.

B. Manufacturer Product Designation: ALUMAVIEW OPTIMA & STEEL FORM S-20,see plans for locations and sizes.

2.2 DOOR OPERATORSA. Provide doors designed for electric motor operation.B. Manufacturer Product Designation: Raynor PowerHoist Optima (Model Series RG):

1. Type: Trolley.2. Motor Horsepower Rating: Continuous 1 HP.3. Electrical Requirements: 115 volt single phase.4. Duty Cycle: 30 cycles/hour.5. Control Wiring: 24 volt control with provisions for connection of safety edge to

reverse and external radio control hook-up. Three button momentary contact "open-close-stop"(Custom wiring is available).

6. Other Equipment: Portable, radio-control system.C. Portable, Radio-Control System: Consisting of SIX of each of the following:

1. (6) Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door.2. (6) Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact

type; control to close door shall be sustained- or constant-pressure type.3. (6) Remote antenna and mounting kit.

D. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" , "Stop" and "Close" for each door and momentary-contact push-button control labeled “All Open” and “All Close” for all doors. An additional “All Open” and “All Close” Control station is required within the officer study room. 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with

general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.E. (1) Keypad: Liftmaster KPW250 basis of design.

2.3 DOOR SECTIONSA. Material: 2 inches (51mm) thick, 6036-T6 aluminum alloy stiles and rails joined

together with 5/16 inch (7.9mm) diameter screws. Aluminum panels 0.050 inch (1.3mm) thick fill spaces between stiles and rails and held in place by vinyl snap beads and factory glazed where specified. Combined dimension of two adjoining intermediate meeting rails 2-13/16 inches (80.96mm). End stiles 3-1/8 inches wide as determined by overall door width. Center stiles 2-5/8 inches (66.67mm) wide. Bottom rail height 4-3/4 inches (133.34mm).

B. Mounting: Sections mounted in door opening using Lap Jamb Angle Mounting: section overlap door jambs by 1 inch (25mm) on each side of door opening.

C. Seals: Flexible U-shaped vinyl seal retained in bottom aluminum rail of door.D. Trussing: Doors designed to withstand specified windload. Deflection of door in

horizontal position to be maximum of 1/120th of door width.


083613-4VERSION: 171117

E. Color: All frame extrusions and filler panels finish coated with Custom Color Powder-Coat finish; submit color chart to Architect from manufacturers full range.

F. Windows: Provide door sections with windows in lieu of 0.050 inch (1.3mm) aluminum filler panels except for bottom two panels as pictured on plans. Window locations to be per door elevation drawings.

G. Glass Glazing: Furnish windows with the following Laminated Glass product: See Glazing Section 08800, 2.6.1. Basis of Design Product: provide as specified in Glazing Section 08800, 2.6 & tint

to match section 3.5.2. Comparable products by one of the following are also acceptable however,

provide product from same manufacturer providing the glazing for the aluminum storefront systems. See Division 8 Section “Glazing”.a) Southwall Technologiesb) Sully North Americac) Guardiand) HGP - Tampa

2.4 TRACKA. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel (ASTM A-653), fully adjustable for adequate

sealing of door to jamb or weatherseal.B. Configuration Type: Normal Headroom – AlumaView, & Low headroom – SteelForm.C. Size: 3 inches.D. Mounting: Floor-to-Header Angle-Mount consisting of continuous angle extending

from the floor up to the door header for use with steel, wood, or masonry jambs. Continuous angle size not less than 2-5/16 inches by 4 inches by 3/32 inch (59 by 102 by 2.5mm).

E. Finish: Galvanized.

2.5 COUNTERBALANCE SYSTEMA. Type: Provided with aircraft-type, galvanized steel lifting cables with minimum safety

factor of 5 to 1. Torsion Springs consisting of heavy-duty oil-tempered wire torsion springs on a continuous ball-bearing cross-header shaft.

2.6 HARDWAREA. Hinges and Brackets: Fabricated from galvanized steel.B. Track Rollers: 2 inches diameter consistent with track size, with hardened steel ball bearings.C. Perimeter Seal: Furnish doors with perimeter seal.D. Locks: Furnish door system with exterior lock with five-pin tumbler cylinder, night

latch and steel bar engaging track.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS



083613-5VERSION: 171117

A. Comply with instructions and recommendations of door manufacturer.

3.2 EXAMINATIONA. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify through direct observation and field

measurement that site conditions are acceptable for installation of doors, operators,controls and accessories. Ensure that openings square, flush and plumb.

B. Do not proceed with installation of doors, operators, controls and accessories until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install door, track and operating equipment complete with all necessary

accessories and hardware according to shop drawings, manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Power-Operated Doors: Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer’s Field Services: At Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field

service consisting of product installation and use recommendations, and periodic site visits to observe and ensure product installation is done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Site Visits: Three.

3.5 ADJUSTINGA. General: Lubricate bearings and sliding parts, assure weathertight fit around door

perimeter and adjust doors for proper operation, balance, clearance and similar requirements.

3.6 CLEANINGA. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or

replace installed products damaged prior to or during installation.B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to

Owner’s acceptance. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris from project site.



083613-6VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances & Storefronts

Project No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

084113-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes:

1. Aluminum storefront systems.2. Exterior aluminum-framed entrance doors.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 087100 “Door Hardware” for hardware for aluminum-framed entrance

doors.2. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glass and glazing requirements.

1.3 ALLOWANCESA. Preconstruction laboratory mockup, Source quality-control and field quality-control

testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,

full-size details, and attachments to other work.1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for

draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

glazed aluminum curtain walls, showing the following:a. Joinery, including concealed welds.b. Anchorage.c. Expansion provisions.d. Glazing.e. Flashing and drainage.

Technical SpecificationsSection 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances & StorefrontsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

084113-2VERSION: 171117

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vaporbarriers.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made

from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:1. Joinery, including concealed welds.2. Anchorage.3. Expansion provisions.4. Glazing.5. Flashing and drainage.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

H. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency.B. Energy Performance Certificates: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, aluminum-framed

entrances, accessories, and components from manufacturer.1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each

glazed aluminum curtain wall.C. Product Test Reports: For glazed aluminum curtain walls and aluminum-framed

entrances for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports.

E. Source quality-control reports.F. Field quality-control reports.G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum storefronts and aluminum-framed entrances

to include in maintenance manuals.B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefronts to

include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program.



084113-3VERSION: 171117

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are

trained and approved by manufacturer.B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated

and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain wall assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Project Warranty: Refer to “Conditions of the Contract” for project warranty provisions.B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

warranty document executed by an authorized company official.1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s one (1) year standard warranty commencing on

the substantial date of completion for the project provided that the warranty, in no event, start later than six (6) months from the date of shipment by the manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum storefronts.B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing of glazed aluminum storefronts and aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.1. Glazed aluminum storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure

including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.b. Glass breakage.c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:


084113-4VERSION: 171117

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,whichever is smaller.

E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do

not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Entrance Doors:a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-

pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-

pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-

factor of not more than 0.42 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 72 as determined according to NFRC 500.

I. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows:1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 37.2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 32.



084113-5VERSION: 171117

J. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4, Missile Level D & E.1. Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade.2. Small-Missile Test: For glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade.

K. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

L. Structural-Sealant Joints:1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi.

M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving

no sealant material behind.2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not

separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

2.2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMSA. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide YHS 50 FI

Standard Duty Mullion, Insulated Glazing, Missile Level E for Essential Facilities,Impact-Resistant Aluminum Storefront System by YKK AP America, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:1. EFCO Corporation.2. Kawneer North America.3. Oldcastle, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 EXTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORSA. Manufacturer: Provide exterior aluminum-framed entrance doors from the aluminum

storefront system manufacturer that are compatible with and meet the wind load and wind-borne missile impact performance requirements of the aluminum storefrontsystem.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the manual swing, Insulated Glazing, Missile Level E Impact-Resistant aluminum entrance door 50-H Wide Stile by YKK AP America, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:1. EFCO Corporation.2. Kawneer North America.3. Oldcastle, Inc.


084113-6VERSION: 171117

2.4 FRAMINGA. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.1. Construction: Thermally broken.2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.3. Glazing Plane: Front.4. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system.

B. FinishesA. Organic Coating (high performance fluorocarbon):

1. Comply with requirements of AAMA 2605.2. Surfaces cleaned and given conversion coating pre-treatment prior to

application of 0.3 mil dry film thickness of epoxy or acrylic primer following recommendations of finish coat manufacturer.

3. Finish coat of 70% minimum fluorocarbon resin fused to primed surfaces at temperature recommended by manufacturer, 1.0 mil minimum dry film thickness.

4. Acceptable coatings are Trinar by Akzo Coatings, Inc.; Nubelar by Glidden Company; Fluoroceram by Morton International, Inc.; Duranar by PPG Industries Inc.; and Fluropon by Valspar Corporation.

5. Provide in either a 2, 3, or 4 coat system as required for color selected.6. Finish color: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated.a. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T5.b. Aluminum Sheet Anodized Finish ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-H14

Aluminum Alloy, 0.050” minimum thickness.

2.5 ACCESSORIESA. Manufacturer’s Standard Accessories:

1. Fasteners: Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum alloys or AISI 300 series stainless steel fasteners. Joint fasteners may be concealed.

2. Sealant: Non-skinning type, AAMA 803.3.3. Glazing: Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with ASTM C

864, shore durometer hardness as recommended by manufacturer; exterior glazing silicone compatible EPDM gaskets, in accordance with ASTM C 864, designed to lock into gasket reglet, interior by means of silicone spacer and structural silicone adhesive.

4. Glazing Adhesive Basis-of-Design: Dow Corning 995 Structural Silicone.



084113-7VERSION: 171117

2.6 FABRICATIONA. Shop Assembly: Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of

aluminum members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.1. Hardware: Drill and cut template for hardware. Reinforce frames and door stiles

to receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.2. Welding: Conceal welds on aluminum members in accordance with AWS

recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. Members showing welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material distortion will be rejected.

B. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.

Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

C. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in

adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

D. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Anodic Finish: AAMA 612, AA- 6063-T5, Class I, or thicker.

1. Basis-of-Design Finish: YK1N Black Anodized Plus by YKK AP America.

2.8 GLAZINGA. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."B. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



084113-8VERSION: 171117

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROLA. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401

recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install manufacturer’s system in accordance with shop drawings, and within

specified tolerances.1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic

action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust

weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."



084113-9VERSION: 171117

1. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended bysealant manufacturer.

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum storefronts and aluminum-framed

entrances to comply with the following maximum tolerances:1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inchwide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon request, provide manufacturer’s field service

consisting of site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.C. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of

glazed aluminum curtain walls. Conduct test in accordance with AAMA 501.2.E. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in

ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade.2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

F. Glazed aluminum curtain walls and aluminum-framed entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE


084113-10VERSION: 171117

A. Entrance Door Hardware:1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools

and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.


NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 087100 – Door Hardware


087100-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for: a. Swinging doors.b. Sliding doors.c. Gates.

2. Electronic access control system components, including:a. Biometric access control reader.b. Electronic access control devices.

3. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware.

4. Lead-lining door hardware items required for radiation protection at door openings.

B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for:1. Windows2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets3. Signage4. Toilet accessories5. Overhead doors

C. Related Sections:1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section.2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to

threshold installation specified in this section.3. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings

modified by this section.4. Division 26 sections for connections to electrical power system and for low-

voltage wiring.5. Division 28 sections for coordination with other components of electronic access

control system.

1.3 REFERENCESA. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies

Technical SpecificationsSection 087100 – Door HardwareProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

087100-2VERSION: 171117

4. UL 305 - Panic HardwareB. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware3. Key Systems and Nomenclature

C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for

Hardware and Specialties

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. General:

1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from

Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work.

3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.

B. Action Submittals:1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for

each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including:

1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.

2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware.

3) Point-to-point wiring.4) Risers.

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are

acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include:a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects

hardware set number.b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for

each opening.



087100-3VERSION: 171117

c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.d. Name and manufacturer of each item.e. Fastenings and other pertinent information.f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on

Drawings.g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in

schedule.h. Mounting locations for hardware.i. Door and frame sizes and materials.j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each

product.k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks,

exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire and smoke alarm connection.1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent

with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

5. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying

as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled.

b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion.

1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation.

C. Informational Submittals:1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer:

a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:


087100-4VERSION: 171117

a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction.

b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” article, herein.

4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include:a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on

repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.b. Catalog pages for each product.c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each

manufacturer.d. Parts list for each product.e. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed.f. Final keying scheduleg. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature h. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both

low voltage and 110 volts.i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for

manufacturers to identify project.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and

as specified herein.1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No

Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.)a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product

category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection.2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable

manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and



087100-5VERSION: 171117

that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation.1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,

including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors.a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and

verify that all components are working properly.C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial

grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements:1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related

subcontractors.3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of

installation.4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams.5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and

electrical engineers.E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single

manufacturer.1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door

hardware, unless otherwise indicated.2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

F. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.


087100-6VERSION: 171117

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.

H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release latch. Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

J. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting

of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf.2. Maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction.3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not

more than 1/2 inch high.4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door

will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches from latch, measured to leading edge of door.

K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer and Supplier’s Architectural

Hardware Consultant. 2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after

reviewing door hardware keying system including:a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security

required, and plans for future expansion.b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.c. Requirements for key control system.d. Requirements for access control.e. Address for delivery of keys.

L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware.4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

M. Coordination Conferences:1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and

hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.



087100-7VERSION: 171117

a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor.b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when

meeting was held and who was in attendance.2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified

hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers.a. Attendees: electrified door hardware supplier, doors and frames supplier,

electrified door hardware installer, electrical subcontractor, Owner, Architect and Contractor.

b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when coordination conference was held and who was in attendance.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware

delivered to Project site.B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door

hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout

storage and installation periods.2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet

installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct,

replace or repair products damaged during Work.3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any

chemical agent.

1.7 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor

construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.


087100-8VERSION: 171117

D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

F. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor.

1.8 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations

indicated.a. Closers:

1) Mechanical: 10 years.2) Electrified: 2 years.

b. Exit Devices:1) Mechanical: 3 years.2) Electrified: 1 year.

c. Locksets:1) Mechanical: 3 years.2) Electrified: 1 year.

d. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation,

improper use or abuse.

1.9 MAINTENANCEA. Maintenance Tools:

1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as ”Scheduled

Manufacturer ” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein.

B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.



087100-9VERSION: 171117

D. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval.

2.2 MATERIALSA. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer.B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary

for hardware installation.1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware

material.

2.3 HINGESA. Provide three-knuckle, concealed bearing hinges.

1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 3CB seriesb. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager AB series, McKinney TA

seriesB. Requirements:

1. 1-3/4 inch thick doors, up to and including 36 inches wide:a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches highb. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches high

2. 1-3/4 inch thick doors over 36 inches wide:a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches highb. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high

3. 2 inches or thicker doors:a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches highb. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high

4. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height.

5. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame.

6. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:


087100-10VERSION: 171117

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pinsb. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pinsc. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pinsd. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pinse. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins

7. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches at 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and 5 inches at 2 inchesor thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

8. Doors 36 inches wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches high; doors greater than 36 inches wide furnish hinges 5 inches high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified.

9. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component.

10. Provide mortar guard for each electrified hinge specified, unless specified in hollow metal frame specification.

11. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height. Provide one additional bearing hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height.

2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGESA. Aluminum Geared

1. Manufacturers:a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Markar, Stanley.

2. Requirements:a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA

A156.25, Grade 2.b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the

hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm)diameter Teflon coated stainless steel hinge pin.

c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation.

d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles.

e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. h. Provide hinges with symmetrical hole pattern.

2.5 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon T Series



087100-11VERSION: 171117

2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 10-Line, Best 9K3 Series,B. Requirements:

1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

3. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 4. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes

mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to

protect trim.6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets.7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both

sides. a. Lever Design: Dane.b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction.

Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

2.6 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 2A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon W Series2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Sargent 7-Line, Best 7KC Series,

B. Requirements:1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Series 4000, Grade

2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with

1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.3. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 4. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes

mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to

protect trim.6. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets.7. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both

sides. a. Lever Design: Dane.b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction.

Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous.

2.7 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Falcon SFIC2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Best, Sargent

B. Requirements:


087100-12VERSION: 171117

1. Provide cylinders/cores, from the same manufacturer of locksets, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide cylinders in the below-listed configuration(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated.a. Small Format Interchangeable core cylinder with open keyway.b. Keying: Manufacturer-keyed permanent cylinders/cores, configured into

keying system per “KEYING” article herein.c. Features: Cylinders/cores shall incorporate the following features.

3. Nickel silver bottom pins.4. Project Cylinder/Core Distribution: Provide cylinders/cores complying with the

following requirements in Project locations as indicated.a. Doors with Panic Devices: Conventional cylinders with interchangeable

cores.5. Replaceable Construction Cores.

a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements.

1) 12 construction change (day) keys.b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction

cores with permanent cores.

2.8 KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in

ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference.B. Requirements:

1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system.a. Keying system as directed by the Owner.

2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Provide keys with the following features.a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm)

4. Identification:a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per

DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Blind code marks shall not include actual key cuts.

b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner.

5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core.b. Permanent Control Keys: 3.c. Master Keys: 6.d. Unused balance of key blanks shall be furnished to Owner with the cut

keys.e. Extra Keys:



087100-13VERSION: 171117

1) 10 ea Construction Keys

2.9 KEY CONTROL SYSTEMA. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Telkee2. Acceptable Manufacturers: HPC, Lund

B. Requirements:1. Provide key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking

key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of number of locks required for Project.a. Provide complete cross index system set up by hardware supplier, and

place keys on markers and hooks in cabinet as determined by final key schedule.

b. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.

2.10 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Falcon SC80 series2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Stanley D-3550, Sargent 1130 series.

B. Requirements:1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements

by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.

2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast aluminum cylinder.

3. Closer Body: 1-1/2 inch diameter with 11/16 inch diameter heat-treated pinion journal and full complement bearings.

4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and all weather requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.

5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.

6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.

7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.8. Provide stick on templates, special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or

adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

2.11 DOOR TRIMA. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood


087100-14VERSION: 171117

B. Requirements:1. Provide push plates 4 inches wide by 16 inches high by 0.050 inch thick and

beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.

5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

6. Provide pull plates 4 inches wide by 16 inches high by 0.050 inch thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 incheswide plate, adjust width to fit.

7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with

pull.

2.12 PROTECTION PLATESA. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch thick as

scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates:

a. Kick Plates: 10 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs

b. Mop Plates: 4 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1inch less width of door on pairs

c. Armor Plates: 36 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs

2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERSA. Manufacturers:


B. Provide door stops at each door leaf:1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type

locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high

rise options.3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted

overhead stop.



087100-15VERSION: 171117

2.14 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pemko, National Guard

B. Requirements:1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals)

and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items.

2. Size of thresholds::a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch high by jamb width by door widthb. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch high by 5 inches wide by door width

3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

2.15 SILENCERSA. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches of height on each single frame, and two for

each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.16 FINSHESA. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except:

1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D)2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 628 3. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D)4. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D)5. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D)6. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match7. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D)8. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D)9. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum10. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.


087100-16VERSION: 171117

B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required:

1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein.

2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed.

3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible.

4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with:a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap

doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement

Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door

hardware preparation.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the

following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer.C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on

substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.

Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or

excessive clearance.



087100-17VERSION: 171117

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches.

I. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section.

J. Wiring: Coordinate with Division 26, ELECTRICAL sections for:1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls.2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware.3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system.4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or

area, as directed by Architect.5. Testing and labeling wires with Architect’s opening number.

K. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

L. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

M. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

N. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with

electrified door hardware.O. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements

specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."P. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in

door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

Q. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

R. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

S. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


087100-18VERSION: 171117

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage qualified independent Architectural

Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each

report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTINGA. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each

door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close

freely from an open position of 30 degrees.2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly

engage lock bolt.3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial

Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATIONA. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULEA. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following

hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

B. See sheet A9.01 for Hardware Schedule.


Technical SpecificationsSection 088000 – Glazing


088000-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 088000 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.B. Section includes:

1. Transparent glass glazing for general and special purpose applications including; coated, float, heat-strengthened, impact resistant, low emissivity, laminated,insulating, and tempered glass.

2. Work Results: Manufacture, handle, deliver and install glazing systems as shown on the architectural drawings or as otherwise specified and in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

C. Related Sections:1. Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”2. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors”3. Division 8 Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls and Aluminum-Framed

Entrances”

1.2 REFERENCESA. Abbreviations and Acronyms:

1. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association2. ANSI American National Standards Institute3. ASTM Formerly the American Society for Testing and Materials4. CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission5. FT Fully Tempered6. GANA Glass Association of North America7. HS Heat-strengthened8. ICC International Code Council9. LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratories10. LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design11. Low-E Low emissivity12. LSG Light to Solar Gain13. NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council14. SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient15. SC Shading Coefficient16. USGBC The U.S. Green Building Council17. VLT Visible Light Transmittance

B. Reference Standards:1. ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass

Technical SpecificationsSection 088000 – GlazingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

088000-2VERSION: 171117

2. ASTM C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat-treated Flat Glass – Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated

3. ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass4. ASTM E 1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in

Buildings5. ANSI Z97.1 Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing

Materials Used in Buildings6. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials7. 2010 Florida Building Code, Building

C. Definitions:1. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developing from normal use that are

attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

2. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standards.

3. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass products as defined in referenced glazing publications.

4. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036

5. Fully Tempered Glass: Glass that has been heat-treated using horizontal (roller hearth) method and complies with ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class I (clear).

6. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Shop Drawings: Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the

framing system indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity.Show details indicating glazing material, glazing thickness, bite on the glass and glass edge clearance.

D. Samples: Submit 12-inch long samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch long samples of each color required, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.



088000-3VERSION: 171117

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

G. Qualification Data: For installers.H. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for laminated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant

formulations within previous 36-month period.J. Test and Evaluation Reports: Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and

adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.

K. Warranties:a. Provide a written 5-year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated

glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.

b. Provide a written 10-year warranty for insulating glass covering replacement of insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

c. Provide a written 10-year warranty from date of manufacture for sputter coated glass. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer’s published instructions.

d. Provide a written 5-year warranty from date of manufacture for fully tempered glass that has been Heat Soaked. Warrants that heat soaked tempered glass will not break spontaneously as a result of Nickel Sulfide (NS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.5% (5/1000) for a period of five years from date of manufacture.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this

Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualifiedaccording to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


088000-4VERSION: 171117

D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass and tempered glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations listed under Article 1.2, References, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTINGA. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type,

tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of

current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature

conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for

each glass type.2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. All products shall comply with ASTM standards.B. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, wind

loads and impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture,



088000-5VERSION: 171117

fabrication and installation, deterioration of glazing materials, and other defects in construction.

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing

Manual."2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing."4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American

Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer . Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IgCC.

F. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

G. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTSA. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A

(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376.


088000-6VERSION: 171117

2.4 LAMINATED GLASSA. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no

tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.1. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as

needed to comply with requirements.2. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with wind-debris-impact-resistant performance requirements specified below.

2.5 INSULATING GLASSA. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary

sealants.2. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish.3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.6 PERFORMANCEA. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-

of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

D. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with enhanced-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on Project.1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade.



088000-7VERSION: 171117

2.7 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge

and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes

acting on glass framing members and glazing components.a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 GLAZING SEALANTSA. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions forselecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.



5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALSA. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced

glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).


088000-8VERSION: 171117

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance

with the following:1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

and offsets at corners.2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before

glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as

needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets and other glazing materials including those in the GANA Glazing Manual except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.



088000-9VERSION: 171117

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

M. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction operations such as weld splatter, fire-safing or plastering. If substances do come into contact with the glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by the glass manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.5 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULEA. Glass Type: Low-E-coated, tinted, insulating laminated glass.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: VIRACON 1-5/16” Insulating Laminated VRE4-59.


088000-10VERSION: 171117

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch (30 mm).3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm.4. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass.5. Tint Color: Bronze.6. Interspace Content: Air.7. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass.

a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.180 inch (3.04 mm).

8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface.9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum.10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .27 maximum.11. Visible Light Transmittance: 30 percent minimum.12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .24 maximum.13. Safety glazing required.


Technical SpecificationsSection 088813 – Fire-Resistant Glazing


088813-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as

defined in referenced glazing publications.B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

1.4 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum

edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.Sustainable Design Submittals:

Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For installers.B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer.C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project

who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

Technical SpecificationsSection 088813 – Fire-Resistant GlazingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

088813-2VERSION: 171117

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces

are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTYA. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for

each glass type.B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERALA. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing

Manual."B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety

Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities



088813-3VERSION: 171117

having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTSA. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise

indicated.B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A

(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no

tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-

protection or fire-resistance rating is based on another product.2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements.3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZINGA. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20

minutes shall be exempt from the hose-stream test.B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing

with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass: 10-mm thickness, fire-protection-rated tempered glass; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.Schott North America, Inc.Technical Glass Products.Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

D. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5-mm thickness; faced on one surface with a clear glazing film; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


088813-4VERSION: 171117

AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.Schott North America, Inc.Technical Glass Products.Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

E. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic glass; 8-mm total thickness; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

2.6 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZINGA. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

2.7 GLAZING ACCESSORIESA. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge

blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated.Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALSA. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced

glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITSA. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge

and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written



088813-5VERSION: 171117

instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance

with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before

glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as

needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERALA. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing

products.B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of

glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.


088813-6VERSION: 171117

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days

before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


Technical SpecificationsSection 088300 – Mirrors


088300-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART I - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors.

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 8 Section "Glazing".2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the

manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage

and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For the following:

1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

2. Mirror mastic.3. Mirror hardware.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and

attachments to other work.D. Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below:

1. Mirrors, 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on 2 adjoining edges.

2. Mirror clips.


088300-2VERSION: 171117

3. Mirror trim, 12 inches (300 mm) long.E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror, signed by product manufacturer.F. Qualification Data: For Installer.G. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that

mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirror installations with a record of successful in-service performance; andwho employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror indicated.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

E. Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

F. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and

humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.



088300-3VERSION: 171117

1.9 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by

mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below:1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering mirrors that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.2. Gardner Glass Products.3. Gilded Mirrors, Inc.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALSA. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror

1. Nominal Thickness: 1/8” minimum.B. Annealed Float Glass for Inner Lite of Laminated Mirrors: ASTM C 1036, Type I

(transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; Class 1 (clear).

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85,

plus or minus 5.B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror

manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for

setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Gunther Mirror Mastics.b. Palmer Products Corporation.

2. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



088300-4VERSION: 171117

2.4 MIRROR HARDWAREA. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep

enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and

7/8 inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch (16 and 25 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Bottom Trim:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel.2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Shallow

Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow

Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.b. Top Trim:

1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel.2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Medium Gauge Aluminum Deep

Nose "J" Moulding Upper Bar.3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep

Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.4. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16

and 3/4 inch (7.9 and 19 mm) in height, respectively.5. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg

designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat.6. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Bottom Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D638 FHA Type "J" Channel.b. Top Trim: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1638 Top Channel.c. Cleat: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat.

B. Mirror Bottom Clips: Manufacturer’s standardC. Mirror Top Clips: Manufacturer’s standard Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel

shapes with plated finish indicated.1. Profile: Manufacturer’s standard.2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finish line

D. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.

E. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.



088300-5VERSION: 171117

2.5 FABRICATIONA. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible

surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge.

1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

D. Laminated Safety Mirrors: Provide laminated mirrors fabricated to produce units complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LM, and the following:1. Glass Lites: Outer lite of mirror glass with silver coating on second surface and

inner lite of clear float glass.2. Interlayer Material: Mirror manufacturer's standard 0.030-inch- (0.76-mm-) thick,

polyvinyl-butyral interlayer with a proven record of showing no tendency to delaminate from, or cause damage to, silver coating.

3. Laminating Process: Laminate glass using laminator's standard heat-plus-pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances, air or glass pockets, and other defects.

4. Seal edges of laminated units to comply with written requirements of interlayer manufacturer.

E. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with pressure-sensitive adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and film backing compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for

compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance.1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of

mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.


088300-6VERSION: 171117

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and

with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware.1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners

installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

2. For mirror hardware in the form of continuous J-channels at bottom, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, 2 slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) long.

3. For mirror hardware in the form of a continuous J-channel at bottom and continuous top trim at top, fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.

4. For metal or plastic clips, place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges.

5. Where indicated, install mirror hardware in the form of J-channels that are fabricated in single lengths to fit and cover top and bottom edges of mirrors.

6. Where indicated, install bottom trim and top clips. Fabricate bottom trim in single lengths to fit and cover bottom edges of mirrors. Locate top clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

7. Where indicated, install bottom and top clips symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

8. Install mastic as follows:a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by

manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for

coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from

construction operations.B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to

moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.


Technical SpecificationsSection 089119 – Fixed Louvers


089119-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 089119 – FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501

apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).


1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing

water intrusion.2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed

according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.

B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reportsC. Florida Product Approval, issued by the Florida Department of Business and

Professional regulation, certifyithat testing, approved and monitored by this agency, has sufficiently demonstrated that the fixed louver, as designed and manufactured, will withstand the wind pressures and wind-borne missile impact forces in compliance with all code and jurisdictional requirements for the project location when installed

Technical SpecificationsSection 089119 – Fixed LouversProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

089119-2VERSION: 171117

according to the manufacturer’s instructions as well as those instructions that may be provided with the Florida Product Approval documents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements

before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer

where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces.E. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERA. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings:B. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.



089119-3VERSION: 171117

2.4 LOUVER SCREENSA. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.2. Screening Type: Bird screening & Insect screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are

attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:1. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.047-inch wire.

2.5 MATERIALSA. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for

forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series

stainless-steel fasteners.4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.6 FABRICATIONA. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units

as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-

spacing pattern.


089119-4VERSION: 171117

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is

recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed

behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

4. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Finish louvers after assembly.B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Four-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



089119-5VERSION: 171117


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to

screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,

as indicated.E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with

concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to

remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color

and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



089119-6VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing


092216-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-

bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-

ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that

incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMSA. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

Technical SpecificationsSection 092216 – Non-Structural Metal FramingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

092216-2VERSION: 171117

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners:a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch.

G. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized

steel.H. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

I. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.



092216-3VERSION: 171117

J. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.1. Depth: 3/4 inch.2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.K. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall

attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMSA. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.a. Type: [Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms]

[Postinstalled, chemical anchor] [Postinstalled, expansion anchor].2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of

0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-

inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:[0.027 inch.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch.b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.


092216-4VERSION: 171117

5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALSA. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-

metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation

of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for

installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce



092216-5VERSION: 171117

thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIESA. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater

than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at

exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to

structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum

1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.


092216-6VERSION: 171117

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring:1. Screw to wood framing.2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMSA. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater

than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c.2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.



092216-7VERSION: 171117

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling

loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms.7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension

systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



092216-8VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 092400 – Exterior Stucco and Acrylic Finish System


092400-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 092400 – EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Fluid applied waterproof air barrier sheathing substrates.B. Materials and installation of exterior stucco wall covering.C. Acrylic-Based, Vertical Above-Grade Exterior Wall Coating for Concrete and

Stucco.D. Accessories including Channel Reveals.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place concrete

B. Section 076200: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

C. Section 079200: Joint Sealants

D. Section 092900: Gypsum BoardE. Section 076200: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

1.3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTSA. ASTM Standards:

1. A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized ) Carbon Steel Wire

2. A 653 Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality

3. B 69 Specification for Roller Zinc4. C 578 Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation5. C 847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath6. C 897 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland

Cement-Based Plasters7. C 1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base8. C 1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for

Portland Cement Plaster9. C 1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing10. C 1278 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing11. C 1396 Specification for Gypsum Board

Technical SpecificationsSection 092400 – Exterior Stucco and Acrylic Finish SystemProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

092400-2VERSION: 171117

12. D 1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

13. D2247 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humdity

14. D4541 Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tester

15. E 283 Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

16. E96 Water Vapor Permeability, wet cup method17. E 119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials18. E13619. Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure

Differences Across the Specimen20. E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Windows, Curtain

Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference21. E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

22. G 155 Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

B. Gypsum Association1. GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing

C. ICC ES (International Code Council Evaluation Service)1. AC 11 Acceptance Criteria for Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings2. AC 212 Acceptance Criteria for Water-resistive Coatings Used as Water-

resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing.D. Proprietary Publications

1. Sto S422 StoGuard Waterproof Air Barrier Handbook

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTSA. Structural (wind and axial loads)

1. Design for maximum allowable deflection, normal to the plane of the wall, of L/360

2. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements. Consult applicable code compliance report.

B. Moisture Control1. Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the stucco, either by

condensation or leakage into the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly.



092400-3VERSION: 171117

a. Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in the wall assembly, including, above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, abutments of lower walls with higher walls, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall.

b. Air Leakage Prevention—prevent excess air leakage in the design and detailing of the wall assembly. Provide continuity between air barrier components in the wall assembly. Refer to StoGuard Air Barrier and Moisture Control Handbook.

c. Vapor Diffusion and Condensation-- perform a dew point analysis of the wall assembly to determine the potential for accumulation of moisture in the wall assembly as a result of water vapor diffusion and condensation. Adjust insulation thickness and/or other wall assembly components accordingly to minimize the risk of condensation. Avoid the use of vapor retarders on the interior side of the wall in warm, humid climates.

d. Provide StoGuard Waterproof Air Barrier over concrete, or over sheathing with slip sheet.

e. At expansion joints, back joints with barrier membrane. Refer to Sto details at www.stocorp.com.

C. Grade Condition1. Do not specify the stucco for use below grade or on surfaces subject to

continuous or intermittent water immersion or hydrostatic pressure. Provide minimum 6 inch (100 mm) clearance above earth grade,minimum 3 inch (51 mm) clearance above finished grade (pavers/sidewalk). Provide increased clearance in freeze/thaw climate zones. Coat wall below acrylic finish to match color.

D. Joints1. Provide two piece expansion joints in the stucco system where building

movement is anticipated: at joints in the substrate or supporting construction, where the system is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, at columns and cantilevered areas.

2. Provide one piece expansion joints every 144 ft2 (13 m2)*. Cut and wire tie lath to the expansion joint accessory so lath is discontinuous beneath the accessory. Do not exceed length to width ratio of 2-1/2:1 in expansion joint layout and do not exceed more than 18 feet (5.5 m) in any direction without an expansion joint. Where casing bead is used back-to-back as the expansion joint, back the joint with barrier membrane.

3. Provide one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows.

Note: the requirement for one piece expansion joints at through wall penetrations may be waived in the following case: when another type of expansion joint is provided in lieu of the one piece expansion joint, for example, back-to-back casing beads.


092400-4VERSION: 171117

4. Provide minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) wide joints where the system abuts windows, doors and other through wall penetrations.

5. Provide appropriate accessories at stucco terminations and joints.6. Provide appropriate sealant at stucco terminations. 7. Indicate location of joints, accessories and accessory type on

architectural drawings.E. Solid Substrates

1. Provide surface plane tolerance not to exceed ¼ inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3.0 m).

2. Concrete—prevent the use of form oil, curing compounds or other bond breakers that inhibit bond to the surface or provide for their removal.

3. Concrete Masonry—provide open texture concrete masonry units with flush joints.

F. Stucco Thickness: General1. Direct Application to Concrete:

a. Stucco thickness shall not exceed 1/2 inch applied in one or two coats.

2. Application to Metal Plaster Bases: a. Galvanized diamond mesh metal lath:

i. Stucco thickness shall not exceed 5/8 inch and not more than 7/8 inch applied in two coats.

b. Woven wire fabric lath: stucco thickness shall be 1/2 inch applied in one or two coats

3. Thickness shall be uniform throughout the wall area.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Waterproof Air Barrier

TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT

Aging/Water Penetration Resistance

AATCC 127 and ICC ES AC 212 (Water Column)

Resist 21.6 inches waters for 5 hours before and after aging

No water penetration before and after aging

Water Resistance Testing ASTM D 2247

Absence of deleterious effects after 14 day exposure

No deleterious effects after 14 day exposure



092400-5VERSION: 171117

Water Vapor Transmission

ASTM E 96 Method B (Water Method) Measure

Sto Gold Fill: 7.10 perms Sto EmeraldCoat: 17.0 perms

Air Leakage: Sto Gold Fill

ASTM E 283 (CCMC Technical Guide Method)

<0.003 ft3/min-ft2 at1.57 psf 0.0002 ft3/min-ft2

Tensile Adhesion ASTM D 4541 > 15 psiGypsum (ASTM C 79): 16.5 psiGypsum (ASTM C 1177): >15.8 psi

Surface Burning ASTM E 84Flame Spread: <25Smoke Developed: <450

Flame Spread: <25Smoke Developed: <450NFPA or ICC Class A building material

B. Stucco

TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULT

Accelerated Weathering ASTM G 26 2000 hours

No chalking, cracking, checking, crazing, or erosion

Combustibility ASTM E 136 Non-combustible Material Pass

Freeze-Thaw ICC-ES AC 11 10 cycles No cracking, checking or crazing

Surface Burning ASTM E 84Flame spread of less than 25, Smoke Developed of less than 450

Flame Spread: < 5

Smoke Developed: < 10

Fire Resistance ASTM E 119 One hour fire resistive rating

Pass, refer to ICC-ES ESR 2323 for listed assemblies.

Wind Loads ASTM E 330Allowable and ultimate design pressures

Pass, refer to ICC-ES ESR 2323 for listed assemblies.

1.6 SUBMITTALSA. Manufacturer's specifications, details, installation instructions and product data.


092400-6VERSION: 171117

B. Sustainable Project Submittals:1. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.2. Product Data: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Manufacturer’s code compliance report.D. Manufacturer's standard warranty.E. Samples for approval as directed by architect or owner.F. Prepare and submit project-specific details (when required by contract documents).

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer requirements

1. Waterproof air barrier and stucco products manufacturer for a minimum of twenty (20) years.

2. Waterproofing air barrier and stucco finish products manufactured under ISO 9001:2000 Certified Quality System and 14001:2004 Environmental Management System.

B. Contractor requirements1. Licensed, insured and engaged in application of portland cement stucco

for a minimum of three (3) years.2. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Basis-of-Design

materials.3. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in

portland cement stucco application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.

4. Successful completion of minimum of three (3) projects of similar size and complexity to the specified project.

5. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in compliance with Basis-of-Design manufacturer’s published specifications and details and the project plans and specifications.

C. Inspections1. Provide independent third party inspection where required by code or

contract documents.2. Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements and contract

documents.



092400-7VERSION: 171117

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's

name and identification of product.B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of

90 F. Store away from direct sunlight.C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and

humidity. Store under cover off the ground in a dry location.

1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 F during application and

drying of waterproofing/air barrier. Maintain ambient and surface temperatureabove 40oF and for 24 hours after set of stucco.

B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40 F such that temperatures are maintained as in 1.8A. Prevent concentration of heat on uncured stucco and vent fumes and other products of combustion to the outside to prevent contact with stucco.

C. Prevent uneven or excessive evaporation of moisture from stucco during hot, dry or windy weather. For installation under any of these conditions provide special measures to properly moist cure the stucco.

D. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials.

1.10 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A. Protect sheathing from climatic conditions to prevent weather damage until

installation of waterproofing/air barrier.B. Provide protection of the waterproof air barrier installation with stucco no later

than 60 days after installation.C. Provide minimum 28 day cure of concrete before the installation of stucco. D. Commence the stucco installation after completion of all floor, roof construction

and other construction that imposes dead loads on the walls to prevent excessive deflection (and potential cracking) of the stucco.

E. Sequence interior work such as drywall installation prior to stucco installation to prevent stud distortion and potential cracking of the stucco.

F. Provide site grading such that the stucco terminates above earth grade minimum 4 inches and above finished grade (pavers/sidewalk) minimum 2 inches. Provide increased clearance in freeze/thaw climate zones.

G. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows, doors, and other penetrations through the wall and provide sill flashing. Coordinate installation of moisture barrier with window and door installation to provide weather proofing of the structure and to prevent moisture infiltration and excess air infiltration.


092400-8VERSION: 171117

H. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed.

I. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the wall assembly to direct water to the exterior.

J. Install copings and sealant immediately after installation of the stucco and when finish coatings are dry.

K. Attach penetrations through stucco into structural support and provide water tight seal at penetrations.

1.11 WARRANTYA. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Sto Corp.B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Structa Wire Corp.C. Provide stucco, metal lath, reinforcing mesh, primer and finish from single source

manufacturer.

2.2 EXTERIOR STUCCO AND ACRYLIC FINISH SYSTEM.A. Basis-of-Design System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

StoPowerwall Next Stucco with Structura Wire Metal Lath: Fiber Reinforced Portland Cement Stucco with Fluid Applied Waterproof Air Barrier for Concrete and Frame Construction, or a comparable product by one of the following manufacturers:.1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.2. Pleko Group LLC Products, Inc.3. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.

2.3 WATERPROOF AIR BARRIERA. Basis-of-Design Product: StoGuard – fluid applied waterproof air barrier for

sheathing substrates consisting of three components: (Choose either Sto EmeraldCoat, Sto Gold Fill and Sto Guard Mesh or Emerald Coat, StoGuard Fabric and StoGuard RediCorner).1. Sto Gold Fill – ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint treatment for rough

opening protection, joint treatment of wall sheathing, and connections with flashing.

2. Sto EmeraldCoat – ready mixed flexible waterproof coating for wall sheathing.

3. StoGuard Mesh – nominal 4.2 oz/yd2, self-adhesive, flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials (used with Sto Gold Fill to reinforce rough openings,



092400-9VERSION: 171117

inside and outside corners, sheathing joints, and connections with flashings).

4. StoGuard Fabric – nonwoven cloth reinforcement used with Sto EmeraldCoat to treat sheathing joints, inside and outside corners and rough openings.

5. StoGuard RediCorner – a preformed fabric piece used in the corners of the rough openings for quicker installation of the StoGuard system.

2.4 SLIP SHEETA. Minimum No. 15 asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1, or

one layer of Grade D kraft building paper, or paperbacked stucco lath conforming to 2.5.

2.5 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Bonding Agent and Admixture--copolymer bonding agent for brush or roller

application to prepared concrete surfaces.

2.6 LATHA. Minimum 2.5 lb./yd2 self-furred galvanized steel diamond mesh metal lath in

compliance with ASTM C 847.

2.7 MECHANICAL FASTENERSA. Appropriate non-corroding fasteners, depending on the type framing or substrate: B. Channel Reveals and Channel Reveal Intersections:

1. PVC plastic in compliance with ASTM D 1784, cell classification 13244C.2. Basis-of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements

provide 1” reveal, perforated flanges, Product Number DC58-100SE, PB Channel Reveals and PV Channel Reveal Intersections, manufactured by Vinyl Corp.

a) Continuous horizontal reveals spaced sixteen (16) inches apart and continuous horizontal and vertical reveals spaced thirty-two (32) inches apart. See Drawings.

C. All accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges and shall be designed with grounds for the specified thickness of stucco.

2.8 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTSA. Water—clean and potable.B. Clean, well graded sand free of deleterious materials in compliance with ASTM C

897 or ASTM C144.

2.9 STUCCO


092400-10VERSION: 171117

A. Basis-of-Design Product: StoPowerwall Stucco factory proportioned, fiber reinforced portland cement based stucco for trowel or pump application, field mixed with graded sand and water as manufactured by Sto Corp.

2.10 PRIMERA. Basis-of-Design Product: Sto Hot Prime®—acrylic based primer/sealer for high

pH surfaces as manufactured by by Sto Corp..B. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for

material cured at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity.1. Application: Spray, roller, or brush.2. Working time: 10-20 minutes, depending on ambient conditions.3. Admission to concrete: 680 psi, ASTM D 4541.4. Flame Spread Index: 0, ASTM E 84.5. Smoke Developed: 10, ASTM E 84.6. Water vapor transmission: 30 perms, tested at 3 dry mils applied in one

coat, ASTM E 96, wet cup method.7. VOC: <0.84 lb/gal, EPA 24.

2.11 FINISH COATA. Single component acrylic-based coating containing acrylic polymer, and colored

pigments.1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Basis-of Design Product : StoCoat Lotusan as manufactured by Sto Corp..C. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values for

material cured at 73 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity.1. Working Time: 10-20 minutes, depending on ambient conditions.2. Solids: 53%, by volume.3. Application: Spray, roller, or brush.4. Water Vapor Permeability: 40 perms, tested at 6 dry mils applied in two

coats, ASTM E 96, wet cup method.5. Flame Spread Index: <25, ASTM E 84, Class A building material.6. Smoke Developed: <450, ASTM E 84.7. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, peeling, blistering, or other

deleterious effects after 2000 hours exposure in Xenon Arc apparatus.8. Tensile Strength: 182 psi, minimum, ASTM D 412.9. Mold Resistance: No Mold Growth at 28 days, ASTM D 3273.10. Adhesion to Concrete: 550 psi, ASTM D 4541.11. VOC: 0.75 lb/gal, EPA 24.

2.12 MIXINGA. StoGuard:



092400-11VERSION: 171117

1. Sto Gold Fill – mix with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle to a uniform consistency. Do not thin, or dilute with water.

2. Sto EmeraldCoat – mix with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle to a uniform consistency. Do not thin, or dilute with water

B. Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture—no mixing required when used as a bonding agent. Use at full strength. Shake sealed container before use to a homogeneous consistency. Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture may be used as an admixture in the stucco mixture. When used in this way, dilute 1 part Sto Bonding Agent and Admixture to 3 parts clean water used as part of the mixing water for the stucco.

C. StoPowerwall Stucco - mix 200 lbs. of sand to an 80 lb bag of StoPowerwall Stucco and approximately 4 gallons of clean water in a paddle type mortar mixer. Add 1/2 to 2/3 of the required water, 1/2 of the sand, and one bag ofStoPowerwall Stucco in a paddle type mortar mixer. Then add the rest of the sand and sufficient water to achieve a uniform mix of workable consistency. Mix for 3—5 minutes after all materials are in the mixer. Stucco material can be retempered once in the first hour after mixing. Avoid retempering after the first hour and discard material older than 1.5 hours. Keep mix ratio consistent from batch to batch and mix each batch separately. Use only the amount of water necessary for a workable mix. Use of excess water is detrimental to performance.

D. Primer--mix with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency.E. Finish--mix with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. A

small amount of water may be added to adjust workability. Limit addition of water to amount needed to achieve the finish texture.

F. Mix only as much material as can readily be used.G. Do not use anti-freeze compounds or other additives.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERSA. Pre-qualify under Quality Assurance requirements of this specification (section

1.7.B).

3.2 EXAMINATIONA. Inspect surfaces for:

1. Contamination algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, laitance, mildew or other foreign substances.

2. Surface absorption and chalkiness.3. Cracks measure crack width and record location of cracks.4. Damage and deterioration.5. Moisture damage–-record any areas of moisture damage.

B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement:


092400-12VERSION: 171117

1. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing—refer to manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might adversely affect the stucco and acrylic finish installation to the General Contractor.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATIONA. Concrete (Cast-in-Place)

1. Provide a surface that is slightly scarified, water absorbent, straight and true to line and plane. Remove form ties and trim projecting concrete so it is even with the plane of the wall. Remove form release agents by washing with a trisodium phosphate detergent and rinsing with clean water. Establish surface profile by sandblasting, waterblasting, wire brushing, chipping or other appropriate means. Remove all dust, dirt, grease, laitance or other bond inhibiting material. Pre-moisten absorbent surfaces with water prior to placement of stucco.

B. Gypsum Sheathing in compliance with ASTM C1396, Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing:1. Verify installation of sheathing in compliance with applicable requirement.2. Protect the substrate with a moisture barrier as required by the applicable

code and install lath and accessories as in 3.6 B1—B6.

3.4 WATERPROOF AIR BARRIER INSTALLATIONA. Reinforcement:

1. StoGuard Mesh: Place minimum 4 inch wide mesh at sheathing joints and minimum 9 inch wide mesh at rough openings and inside and outside corners. Immediately apply Sto Gold Fill by spray or trowel over the mesh and trowel smooth. Protect from rain and freezing until dry.

B. Surface Defects and Fasteners in Sheathing:1. Spot fasteners with Sto Gold Fill. Protect from rain and freezing until dry.

C. Sheathing Surface Waterproofing:1. Apply Sto EmeraldCoat by spray or roller over sheathing surface,

including the dry joint treatment, to a uniform wet mil thickness of 10 mils in one coat. Use 3/4 inch nap roller for glass mat faced gypsum sheathing.. Protect from rain and freezing until dry. Note: Back rolling is not required for spray applications over sheathing. Inspect surface after initial applications over sheathing.

2. Coordinate installation of connecting waterproofing/air barrier components, for example at expansion joints, penetrations, openings, foundation, and roof, with other trades to provide continuous air tight membrane and moisture protection.

3. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is directed to the exterior, not into the wall assembly, and



092400-13VERSION: 171117

drained to the exterior at sources of leaks (windows, doors, structural members and similar penetrations through the wall assembly.

4. Note that some flashing components such as window or door head flashing, roof sidewall step flashing, and weep screeds at the base of the wall, require a splice strip of reinforcing mesh, joint treatment and waterproofing. This creates a “shingle lap” and proper shedding of water onto the face of the flashing, not behind the flashing.

D. Concrete Surface Waterproofing:1. Repair cracks in concrete surface up to 1/8 inch with Sto Gold Fill. For

cracks larger than 1/8 inch, up to 1/4 inch, fill with paintable latex caulk, tool flush and allow to dry. Do not use Sto Gold Fill to fill moving cracks, consult the project engineer for repair methods.

2. Apply Sto EmeraldCoat by spray or roller over concrete surface to a uniform wet thickness of 10 to 30 mils in one coat depending on surface conditions. Apply second coat of 10 to 30 wet mil thickness to achieve pin hole void free surface. If Sto EmearldCoat is to be applied using spray equipment, backrolling ofeach coat will be necessary. Sto EmeraldCoat may also be applied using a paint roller with nap thickness of 3/4 inch.

3. Coordinate installation of connecting waterproofing/air barrier components, for example at expansion joints, penetrations, openings, foundation, and roof, with other trades to provide continuous air tight membrane and moisture protection.

4. Coordinate installation of flashing and other moisture protection components with other trades to achieve complete moisture protection such that water is directed to the exterior, not into the wall assembly, anddrained to the exterior at sources of leaks (windows, doors, structural members and similar penetrations through the wall assembly.

5. Note that some flashing components such as window or door head flashing, roof sidewall step flashing, and weep screeds at the base of the wall, require a splice strip of reinforcing mesh, joint treatment and waterproofing. This creates a “shingle lap” and proper shedding of water onto the face of the flashing, not behind the flashing.

3.5 SLIP SHEET INSTALLATIONA. Install in compliance with applicable building code requirements for building

paper. Lap paper over foundation weep screed attachment flange and window/door head flashings.

3.6 STUCCO INSTALLATION

Apply the stucco in discrete panels without interruption to avoid cold joints and differences in appearance. Abut wet stucco to set stucco at natural or architectural breaks in the wall such as expansion joints, pilasters, terminations, or changes in plane. Hot or dry conditions accelerate drying and moisture loss from stucco which can affect strength and resistance to cracking. Adjustments in the application, scheduling and curing of stucco to prevent rapid loss of moisture are necessary to achieve a satisfactory


092400-14VERSION: 171117

stucco installation. Cold temperatures retard drying and strength gain and adjustments may have to be made in the application, scheduling and curing of stucco to prevent damage from frost and other trades. Do not install stucco during extremely hot, dry and/or windy conditions. Do not install stucco during freezing conditions or on frozen substrates. Do not install stucco onto grounds of accessories. Completely embed lath and flanges of accessories and completely cover attachments with stucco. Moist cure stucco minimum 48 hours for optimum strength gain and resistance to cracking. Allow final stucco application to completely dry before applying primer or finish. The finished installation must be true, plumb and square. Should stucco get into control or expansion joints, remove the stucco from within the joint before the stucco sets.

After satisfactory inspection of surfaces and correction of any deviations from specification requirements commence the stucco installation in accordance with A or B below.A. Installation over cast-in-place concrete:

1. Install foundation weep screed at the base of the wall.2. Install casing beads at stucco terminations—doors, windows and other

through wall penetrations. Install two piece expansion joints (or back-to-back casing beads) at joints in the supporting construction, buildingexpansion joints, where the stucco is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, columns, and cantilevered areas. Install one piece expansion joints at corners of windows, doors and similar through wall penetrations, and every 250 ft2. Install corner bead at outside corners and corner lath at inside corners. Install full accessory pieces where possible and avoid small pieces. Seal adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant. Abut horizontal into vertical joint accessories. Attach at no more than 7 inches on center into concrete/masonry with appropriate fasteners.

3. Pre-moisten concrete prior to the placement of stucco. 4. Scratch Coat: apply the stucco with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate

contact with the substrate and complete coverage to an approximate thickness of 1/4 inch. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a second coat. Score horizontally.

5. Brown Coat: as soon as the first coat is firm enough to receive the second coat without damage, apply the second coat. Alternatively, moist cure the first coat up to 48 hours and dampen the scratched surface with water immediately before applying the second coat. Apply the second coat with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the first coat to an approximate thickness of 1/8 or 1/4 inch and as needed to bring the stucco to the desired thickness. Use a rod or straight edge to bring the surface to a true, even plane. Fill depressions in plane with stucco. Final thickness of stucco shall not exceed 1/2 inch.

6. After the stucco has lost sufficient moisture so that the surface sheen has disappeared, float the surface lightly with a darby or wood float to densify the surface and to provide a smooth, even surface. Float before the stucco becomes so rigid that it cannot be moved beneath the float.



092400-15VERSION: 171117

7. Moist cure after the stucco has set by lightly fogging the surface for at least 48 hours. Fog as frequently as required during the 48 hour period to prevent loss of moisture from the stucco. Avoid eroding the stucco surface with excess moisture. If relative humidity exceeds 75% the frequency of moist-curing can be diminished.

B. Installation over frame construction with sheathing:1. Weep Screed Installation

a. Install foundation weep screed at the base of the wall securely to framing with the appropriate fastener. Locate foundation weep screed so that it overlaps the joint between the foundation and framing by a minimum of 1inch. Locate the foundation weep screed minimum 4 inches above earth grade, 2 inches above finished grade (paved surfaces, for example).

2. Weather Protectiona. Protect sills of rough openings with barrier membrane. b. Apply moisture barrier in compliance with the applicable building

code. Wrap paper into rough opening and lap over barrier membrane at jambs. Lap paper over foundation weep screed attachment flange and window/door head flashings. Refer to Sto Details.

3. Casing Bead and Expansion Joint Installationa. Install casing beads at stucco terminations—doors, windows and

other through wall penetrations. Install expansion joints (or back-to-back casing beads) at building expansion joints, where the stucco is to be installed over dissimilar construction or substrates, at changes in building height, at floor lines, columns, and cantilevered areas. Install one piece expansion joints at corners of windows, doors, and similar through wall penetrations, and every 144 ft2 . Install full accessory pieces where possible and avoid small pieces. Seal adjoining pieces by embedding ends in sealant. Abut horizontal into vertical joint accessories. Attach at no more than 7 inches into framing with appropriate fasteners.

4. Lath Installationa. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath

i. General--install metal lath with the long dimension at right angles to structural framing. Terminate lath at expansion joints. Do no install continuously beneath joints.

ii. Seams/Overlaps--overlap side seams minimum 1/2 inch and end seams minimum 1 inch. Stagger end seams. Overlap casing beads and expansion joints minimum 1 inch over narrow wing accessories, minimum 2 inches over expanded flange accessories. Do not install lath continuously beneath expansion joints.

iii. Attachment--fasten securely through sheathing into structural framing at 7 inches on center maximum vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Wire tie at no more than 9 inches on center at: side laps, accessory overlaps, and where end laps occur between supports.


092400-16VERSION: 171117

5. One Piece Expansion Joint Installationa. Install one piece expansion joints over lath at through wall

penetrations, for example, above and below doors or windows. Install one piece expansion joints over lath every 144 ft2. Wire tie one piece expansion joints to lath at no more than 7 inches on center. Make certain lath is discontinuous beneath joints.

6. Inside and Outside Corners a. Install corner lath at inside corners and corner bead at outside corners

over lath. Attach through lath into framing at no more than 7 inches on center with appropriate fasteners.

7. Stucco Installationa. Scratch Coat: apply stucco with sufficient pressure to key into and

embed the metal lath. Apply sufficient material, 3/8—1/2 inch, to cover the metal lath and to permit scoring the surface. Score the stucco upon completion of each panel in preparation for a second coat. Score horizontally.

b. Brown Coat: as soon as the first coat is firm enough to receive the second coat without damage, apply the second coat. Alternatively, moist cure the first coat up to 48 hours and dampen the scratched surface with water immediately before applying the second coat. Apply the second coat with sufficient pressure to ensure intimate contact with the first coat and as needed to bring the stucco to a uniform thickness that matches the grounds of the accessories. Use a rod or straight edge to bring the surface to a true, even plane. Fill depressions in plane with stucco. Final thickness of stucco shall be minimum 1/2 inch, maximum 7/8 inch.

c. After the stucco has become slightly firm float the surface lightly with a darby or wood float to densify the surface and to provide a smooth, even surface.

d. Moist cure after the stucco has set by lightly fogging for at least 48 hours. Fog as frequently as required during the 48 hour period to prevent loss of moisture from the stucco. Avoid eroding the stucco surface with excess moisture. If relative humidity exceeds 75% the frequency of moist curing can be diminished.

C. Primer Installation 1. Sto Hot Prime—Moist cure stucco for a minimum of 48 hours. Apply

primer evenly with brush, roller or proper spray equipment over the clean, dry stucco and allow to dry before applying finish.

D. Finish Installation1. Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions and the following:2. Apply acrylic-based finish to primed stucco when dry. Apply finish by

spraying or troweling with a stainless steel trowel, depending on the finish specified. Follow these general rules for application of finish:a. Weather conditions: Apply when ambient and surface temperatures

are 40 degrees F and rising. Do not apply in freezing conditions or during precipitation. Do not apply if the surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the ambient due point temperature.



092400-17VERSION: 171117

b. Concrete and stucco substrates: Apply 805 Sto Hot Prime in one coat by brush, roller, or spray to a thickness of 6 – 8 wet mils.

c. Allow primer to dry completely before applying finish coating.d. Decorative and Protective finish coating (one coat application): Apply

one coat, 5 -7 wet mils, 216/216D/217 StoCoat Lotusan to primed surface.

e. Do not apply finish into or over joints or accessories. Apply finish to outside face of wall only.

f. Do not apply finish over irregular or unprepared surfaces, or surfaces not in compliance with the requirements of the project specifications.

g. Protect installed materials from rain, freezing, and continuous high humidity until completely dry.

h. Do not overcoat with solvent-based materials.i. Finish color and texture: To be selected by the Architect from the

manufacturer’s full range of colors and textures.

3.7 PROTECTIONA. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind

them.B. Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing.C. Provide protection of installed primer and finish from dust, dirt, precipitation,

freezing and continuous high humidity until fully dry.



092400-18VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 092900 – Gypsum Board


092900-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Interior gypsum board.2. Exterior gypsum board for ceiling and soffits.3. Glass-mat gypsum sheathing board.4. Tile backing panels.



2. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives and sealants, indicating compliance with

requirements for low-emitting materials.C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and

conditioned.C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are

mold damaged.1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

Technical SpecificationsSection 092900 – Gypsum BoardProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

092900-2VERSION: 171117

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERALA. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content.B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each

area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARDA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:1. American Gypsum.2. CertainTeed Corp.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.4. Lafarge North America Inc.5. National Gypsum Company.6. PABCO Gypsum.7. Temple-Inland.8. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Gypsum board wall assembly panels from floor to eight feet above finish.

2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITSA. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard

edges.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:a. CertainTeed Corp.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLCLafarge North America Incc. National Gypsum Company.d. USG Corporation.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.



092900-3VERSION: 171117

2.4 GLASS-MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARDA. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat

laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Sheathing.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens-Glass Gold.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP.d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing.

2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.

2.5 TILE BACKING PANELSA. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with

manufacturer's standard edges.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 1/2 inch.3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to

ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIESA. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:a. Cornerbead.b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.e. Expansion (control) joint.f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:a. Fry Reglet Corp.b. Gordon, Inc.c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALSA. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.B. Joint Tape:


092900-4VERSION: 171117

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping

compound.2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,

fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories.3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound.D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALSA. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards

and manufacturer's written recommendations.B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [50] <Insert value> g/L or less.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members

from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size

recommended by panel manufacturer.D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.2. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content not.



092900-5VERSION: 171117

E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.c. Pecora Corporation.d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.



F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation."G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERALA. Comply with ASTM C 840.B. Install panels with face side out. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the

number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inchof open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.


092900-6VERSION: 171117

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARDA. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces with the exception of those surfaces where abuse-resistant type is specified.

2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate

courses of panels.



092900-7VERSION: 171117

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a

substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELSA. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to

produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIESA. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locationsapproved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARDA. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically

indicated as not intended to receive tape.D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:


092900-8VERSION: 171117

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.3. Level 3: Panels that are substrate for wall covering (vinyl).4. Level 5: At all panel surfaces exposed to view.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and

other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


Technical SpecificationsSection 093013 – Ceramic Tiling


093013-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 093013 – CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Porcelain Tile.2. Glazed Wall Tile.

B. Related requirements:1. Section 071353 “Sheet Membrane Waterproofing and Crack Isolation.”2. Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” for tile backing panels.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


for low-emitting materials.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealers, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.C. Shop Drawings: Include tile locations and patterns. Include details and locations of

contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Metal corner protector, edge trim, and edge strips in 6-inch lengths.3. Elastomeric sealant sample for Architect’s approval of color.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Mockups: Install mockups, if required by Owner, to verify selections made under

sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.B. Elevated slabs to receive tile shall also include a mortar setting bed over specified

waterproofing.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Technical SpecificationsSection 093013 – Ceramic TilingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

093013-2VERSION: 171117

1. Tile and Trim Units: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type, color, texture, and size indicated, but not fewer than 10 units.

2. Grout cleaning product – 1 container with instructions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and

labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete

and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single

source or producer.1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of

consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:1. Waterproof membrane.2. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERALA. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,

compositions, and other characteristics indicated.B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.



093013-3VERSION: 171117

2.3 TILE PRODUCTSA. Unglazed Porcelain Tile: (PFT-1)

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Glazed Wall Tile including: (CWT-1)1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on

the Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings.

2. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:a. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module

size 6 by 6 inches.

2.4 WATER PROOF MEMBRANE

A. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.

B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.C. Latex-Portland Cement Waterproof Mortar: Flexible, waterproof mortar consisting of

cement-based mix and latex additive.D. Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part, fluid-applied product intended for

use as both waterproofing and tile-setting adhesive in a two-step process.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Mortar Bed Reinforcing: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.0162-inch

diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82, except for minimum wire size.B. Elastomeric Sealants: ASTM C 920.

1. Non-Traffic Surfaces: Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786 or approved equal.

2. Traffic Surfaces: Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.3. Colors: Match color of grout in adjacent tile.

C. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.


093013-4VERSION: 171117

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

3. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F (60 and 100 deg C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

D. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluationof Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

E. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.1. Products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of

Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for

TCA designations indicated.B. Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for

Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to installation methods and setting and grouting materials indicated.

C. Waterproofing: Install to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is securely bonded to substrate.1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and has

passed testing to determine that it is watertight.D. Cementitious Backer Units: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated, and treat

joints to comply with ANSI A108.11.E. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to produce

a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Cut and drill tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items to produce



093013-5VERSION: 171117

straight aligned joints. Fit tile to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

G. Jointing Pattern: Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths.1. Lay tile in grid pattern with highlight tile as indicated on marked up submittals.

H. Joint Widths: Produce uniform joint widths not to exceed 1/8” in floor and 1/16” wall tile.

I. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants."J. Grout: Install to comply with ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.K. Cleaning: After grouting, clean ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of grout and

foreign matter.L. Temporary Protective Coating: After setting and grouting of tile provide rosin paper

covering for the duration of the construction.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATIONA. Interior Installation Method: slab on grade construction:

1. Mortar in accordance with ANSI A 108.5.2. Epoxy Grout in accordance with ANSI A118.3.

3.3 WALL TILE INSTALLATIONA. Interior Installation Method: All walls:

1. Mortar or adhesive in accordance with ANSI A 108.52. Unsanded-Portland Cement Grout in accordance with ANSI A 108.10.



093013-6VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings


095113-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 095113 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension

systems.B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other

ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product specified.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


2. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish re-

quired, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and

texture.2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long

Samples of each type, finish, and color.D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and oth-er information specified.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical

panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physi-cal properties without delaying the Work.

Technical SpecificationsSection 095113 – Acoustical Panel CeilingsProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

095113-2VERSION: 171117

C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physi-cal properties without delaying the Work.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements.1. Fire-response tests were performed by UL, ITS/Warnock Hersey, or another inde-

pendent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having juris-diction and that performs testing and follow-up services.

2. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.

3. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS/Warnock Hersey's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency, are identical in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E 119.

4. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspect-ing agency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original,

unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protect-ed against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, sur-face contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabi-lized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are en-

closed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged

with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

Verify extra materials amount with Owner.2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to

2.0 percent of amount installed.



095113-3VERSION: 171117

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELSA. Acoustical Panel: APC1

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Acoustical Panel (Washable): APC21. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the

Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration in-dicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400; plenum

mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing

ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not manufacturers' proprietary product des-ignations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range of products that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

D. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of alkylated phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fun-gus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria.

E. Panel Protection of light fixtures: Use specified acoustical panels to protect light fixtures in listed UL assembly.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMSA. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated, Steel Suspension System: Main and

cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A, not less than G60 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.

1. End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type.


095113-4VERSION: 171117

2. Face Design: Flat, flush.3. Cap Material: aluminum cold-rolled sheet.4. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERALA. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that com-ply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Archi-tectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classifi-

cation for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indi-cated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following require-ments:1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but pro-vide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same mate-rial and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms

reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter re-quired to fit penetration exactly.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANTB. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and

effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.4. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation



095113-5VERSION: 171117

of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit, or 33 mcg/cu. m, and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands.b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or

abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting per-formance of acoustical panel ceilings.1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors

whose installation is specified in other Sections.1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well

in advance of time needed for coordinating other work.B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border

widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at bor-ders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below

per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Rec-

ommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2."

3. U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceil-ings": U.B.C. Standard 25-2.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension sys-tem.

2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceil-ings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.


095113-6VERSION: 171117

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspen-sion members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits estab-lished by referenced standards and publications.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to in-serts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for sub-strate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevat-ed temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are se-cure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in an-chors that extend through forms into concrete.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly

from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not

more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a toler-ance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one

another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension

system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges

of suspension system runners and moldings.



095113-7VERSION: 171117

3. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having ju-risdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufac-turer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required.

5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.5 CLEANINGA. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for clean-ing and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of dam-age.



095113-8VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories


096513-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 096513 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Thermoplastic rubber base.2. Rubber Molding Accessories

B. Related Sections:1. Section 096519 "Resilient Tile Flooring"

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:


for low-emitting materials.3. Laboratory Test Reports: For resilient base, indicating compliance with

requirements for low-emitting materials.C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's

standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALSA. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of

each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.

Technical SpecificationsSection 096513 – Resilient Base and AccessoriesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

096513-2VERSION: 171117

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the

weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not

less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within rangerecommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Resilient base shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of

Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC RUBBER BASE (RB1)A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the

Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

C. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.D. Outside Corners: Job formed.E. Inside Corners: Job formed

2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Rubber reducer transition strip for resilient flooring.B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on the Drawings.C. Locations: As indicated on the Drawings.D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on the Drawings.

Technical SpecificationsSection 096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories


096513-3VERSION: 171117

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALSA. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement

based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L.2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of resilient products.B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where

they are to be installed.1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be

installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately

before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,

and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with

tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

Technical SpecificationsSection 096513 – Resilient Base and AccessoriesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

096513-4VERSION: 171117

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient

products.B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product

installation:1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


Technical SpecificationsSection 096519 – Resilient Athletic Tile Flooring


096519-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Rubber athletic floor tile.


1. For adhesives, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Qualification Data: For Installer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Floor Tile: Furnish at least 1%, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile

installed.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who

are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

Technical SpecificationsSection 096519 – Resilient Athletic FlooringProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

096519-2VERSION: 171117

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not

less than 65 deg F or more than 85deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.C. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures

within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 85deg F.

D. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.E. Close spaces to traffic for 24 hours after floor tile installation.F. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.G. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 RUBBER ATHLETIC FLOOR TILE (RF-1)A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the


B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I-B, homogeneous rubber tile, through mottled.Two-ply vulcanized construction incorporating a rubber wear layer and an elastic cushioned performance layer.

C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type Adurometer per ASTM D 2240.

D. Wear Layer Thickness: .090 inch

Technical SpecificationsSection 096519 – Resilient Athletic Tile Flooring


096519-3VERSION: 171117

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALSA. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based

or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATIONA. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

adhesion of resilient products.B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 80 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and

installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

Technical SpecificationsSection 096519 – Resilient Athletic FlooringProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

096519-4VERSION: 171117

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


Technical SpecificationsSection 099100 – Painting


099100-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 099100 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are

in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

C. Paint exposed surfaces except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and

ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Architectural woodwork and casework.b. Acoustical ceiling panels.c. Elevator entrance doors and frames.d. Elevator equipment.e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.f. Light fixtures.g. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:a. Foundation spaces.b. Furred areas.c. Ceiling plenums.d. Pipe spaces.e. Duct shafts.f. Elevator shaft.

Technical SpecificationsSection 099100 – PaintingProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

099100-2VERSION: 171117

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:a. Anodized aluminum.b. Stainless steel.c. Chromium plate.d. Copper.e. Brass and bronze.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:a. Valve and damper operators.b. Linkages.c. Sensing devices.d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual Global (FMG), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Related Requirements:1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.3. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming

steel doors and frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Identi-fy each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer’s Information: Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

Sustainable Design Submittals:Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance

with requirements for low-emitting materials.C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range

of colors available for each type of finish coat material indicated.1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to

be coated.D. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to

simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block

fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.



099100-3VERSION: 171117

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application.

E. Qualification Data: For applicator.F. Coating Maintenance Manual: upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or

paint manufacture/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-upprocedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed

painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened

packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label, and the following information:1. Product name or title of material.2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.5. Thinning instructions.6. Application instructions.7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily

rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Apply water-based paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted

and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F.C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or


099100-4VERSION: 171117

wet surfaces.1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to

be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on

the Drawings, at the locations indicated on the drawings, or comparable products by one of the following manufacturers:1. ICI Dulux Paint Centers.2. PPG Industries, Inc.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERALA. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be

listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."B. VOC Content: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall comply with

VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:1. Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint: 50 g/L.2. Interior Nonflat Latex Wall Paint: 150 g/L.

C. VOC Emissions: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit or 33 mcg/cu. m and thatof acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

D. Material Compatibility: Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

E. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to

designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products names are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

F. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.



099100-5VERSION: 171117

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under

which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of

surfaces and conditions within a particular area.B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to

ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials

specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined

surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size of weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items

removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates

of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to

manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.2. Wood: clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with

scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin

coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.2. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not

been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other


099100-6VERSION: 171117

foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) recommendations.a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system

manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10.b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal

treatment wash coat before priming.c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have

been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop primer.

3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufactur-er's written instructions.1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean

condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density.

Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATIONA. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use

applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the

schedules.2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or

conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.4. The term “exposed surfaces” includes areas visible when permanent or

built-in fixtures, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat



099100-7VERSION: 171117

only.6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where

visible through registers or grilles.7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to

match exposed surfaces.8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as

exterior faces.B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,

pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same

regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer’s written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. Use brush of

appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheep's wool as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as

recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner that the manufacturer’s

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.2. Ductwork.3. Insulation.


099100-8VERSION: 171117

4. Motors and mechanical equipment.5. Accessory items.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Conduit and fittings.2. Switchgear.3. Panelboards.

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed substrates where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat ap-pears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANINGA. Clean-Up: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and

other discarded paint materials from the site.1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces.

Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTIONA. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by

painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and

restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULEA. Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco), Low-Luster Acrylic Finish (2) Finish Coats

over Primer.1. Primer: S-W Loxon Concrete & Masonry

Primer/Sealer Int./Ext. Latex, A24W8300 (5.3-8.0mils wet; 2.2-3.2 mils dry)



099100-9VERSION: 171117

2. (2) Finish Coats: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82-100 (4 mils wet; 1.5 mils dry)

B. Ferrous Metal (Shop Primed Doors, Frames, etc.), Semi-Gloss Finish: Acrylic.1. Primer: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl

Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet; 2-4 mils dry)

2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 (6-12 mils wet; 2.5-4.0mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650(6-12 mils wet; 2.5-4.0 mil dry)

C. Non-Ferrous Metal (Aluminum and Galvanized), Semi-Gloss Finish: Latex.1. Primer: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl



3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650(6-12 mils wet; 2.5-4.0 mil dry)

3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULEA. Gypsum Board, Satin Finish: Acrylic Latex.

1. Primer: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W02600 (4 mils wet; 1.4 mil dry)

2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.7 mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.7 mil dry)

B. Gypsum Board, Flat Finish: Acrylic Latex.1. Primer: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior

Latex Primer, B28W02600 (4 mils wet; 1.4 mil dry)2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC

Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

C. Gypsum Board, Semigloss Finish: Acrylic Epoxy.1. Primer: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior

Latex Primer, B28W02600 (4 mils wet; 1.4 mil dry)


099100-10VERSION: 171117

2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss, B60V25 (6.5-8.0 mils wet; 2.5-3.0 mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Semi-Gloss, B60V25 (6.5-8.0 mils wet; 2.5-3.0 mil dry)

D. Ferrous Metal (Shop Primed Doors, Frames, Etc.), Semi-Gloss Finish: Latex.1. Primer: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl



3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 (6-12 mils wet; 2.5-4.0mil dry)

E. Non-Ferrous Metal - Galvanized (Ducts, Etc.), Flat Finish: Latex.1. Primer: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl


2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

F. Wood, Semi-Gloss Finish: Acrylic Latex.1. Primer: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior

Latex Primer, B28W02600 (4 mils wet; 1.4 mil dry)2. 1st Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC

Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

3. 2nd Finish Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 (4 mils wet; 1.6 mil dry)

G. Concrete, Clear Sealer: Water-based clear amorphous silica concrete sealer.1. 1 Coat: S-W H&C Clear Liquid Hardener & Densifier

3.8 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING FOR EXTERIOR FERROUS METAL SUBSTRATESA. Ferrous Metal (Exposed Structural Steel Columns, Beams, Joists, Decks, etc.).

1. 1st Coat: S-W Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy, B58-600 Series (5-10 mils dry per coat).



099100-11VERSION: 171117

2. 2nd Coat: S-W Hi-Solids Polyurethane Gloss, B65-600 Series.

3. 3rd Coat: S-W Hi-Solids Polyurethane Gloss, B65-600Series.



099100-12VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 101400 – Signage


101400-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. This Section includes the following types of signs:

1. Room identification panel signs.2. Exterior dimensional character signage.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For adhesives, indicating VOC content.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.C. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to

materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and

large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording

and lettering layout.2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections.

E. Shop Drawings: For exterior dimensional character signage.1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided

by others, and accessories.3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at

least size.4. Show locations of electrical service connections.5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

F. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:

Technical SpecificationsSection 101400 – SignageProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

101400-2VERSION: 171117

a. 1/8-inch-thick Matte Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required.

1.4 DEFINITIONSA. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those

indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Field Measurements: Take field measurements fabrication to ensure proper fitting and

verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers prior to preparation of shop drawings. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:

a. Best Manufacturing Company.b Mohawk Sign Systems.c. Southwell Companyd. GC Graphic Communications

2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNSA. Materials

1. For Permanent Room Signage: 1/8-inch-thick, clear non-glare acrylic with eased edges.

2. Letters and Numbers – Machine cut copy from opaque acrylic sheet and chemically welded onto sign face, raised 1/32-inch, upper case Sans Serif font. Grade II Braille manufactured under Raster insertion process. Raised letters and Braille shall be formed as integral part of sign face.3. Mounting: Attach sign to vertical surfaces using methods as directed by themanufacturer including mechanical fasteners, double sided foam tape and silicone adhesive. Use non-ferrous metal hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.



101400-3VERSION: 171117

4. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use non-fading colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by the manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV stable.

B. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.

C. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements:1. Edge Condition: Eased.2. Corner Condition: Rounded corners.

D. Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate 1/8-inch acrylic face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturer's standard process.

E. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. All signs are to comply with American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. Lettering to be Helvetica Medium Caps.

F. For Permanent Room Signs: Chemically weld letters onto sign face, raised 1/32-inch, upper case Sans Serif font.

G. See Article 3.4, Room Identification Panel Signage Schedule, for room identification signage locations and copy.

2.3 EXTERIOR DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERSA. Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines

and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.

B. Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth edges; precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:1. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.2. Character Height: Se Article 3.4.3. Thickness:1/4-inch.4. Finishes:

a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.5. Mounting: Concealed studs.6. Typeface: Arial Bold.

C. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability and for securing fasteners; and as follows.1. Illuminated Characters: Backlighted character construction with LED lighting

including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly.


101400-4VERSION: 171117

a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings.2. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior characters.[

Equip weeps with permanent baffles to block light leakage without inhibiting drainage.]

3. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.4. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.5. Translucent Sheet: 3/16-inch-thick clear polycarbonate back.6. Character Height: See schedule for character heights.7. Character Depth: 3 inches.8. Finishes:

b. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.9. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.

a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface.10. Typeface: Arial Bold.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. See Article 3.5, Exterior Pin-mounted Dimensional Character Signage, for dimensional character signage locations and copy.

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 – EXECUTION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods

of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from

distortion or other defects in appearance.B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Attach signs to wall surfaces by mechanical means using exposed

fasteners into wall or into inserts as required by construction of wall.



101400-5VERSION: 171117

C. Dimensional Character Mounting Methods:1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on

back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole

for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

D. Dimensional Characters (LED) Illumination Controls:1. Locate control switch in Room 101, Office.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.

3.4 ROOM IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE SCHEDULEA. The following schedule is subject to revision per Owner requirements.

DOOR/ RM NO.

SIGNAGE COPY REMARKS

100 Vestibule ADA type, one line tactile letters and one line Braille - typical for all room Identification signs - 3" x 9" approximately

depending on extent of signage copy 105 ADA Tollet Unisex Pictogram & ISA Symbol (International Symbol of

Accessibility)101 Study ADA Type102 Office ADA Type120 Dormitory 1 ADA type, one line tactile letters and one line Braille - typical

for all room Identification signs - 3" x 9" approximately depending on extent of signage copy

119 Toilet ADA Type118 Dormitory 2 ADA Type112 Dormitory 7 ADA Type113 Dormitory 6 ADA Type114 Dormitory 5 ADA Type115 Dormitory 4 ADA Type116 Dormitory 3 ADA Type111 Data ADA Type110 Janitor ADA Type109 Toilet ADA Type128 Fitness ADA Type117 Toilet ADA Type


101400-6VERSION: 171117

132 Mechanical ADA Type106 Pantry 1 ADA Type107 Pantry 2 ADA Type108 Pantry 3 ADA Type

104 Kitchen ADA Type103 Apparatus Bay ADA Type

126 Bunker Gear ADA Type

123 EMS ADA Type122 Laundry ADA Type124 Storage ADA Type127 Mechanical ADA Type125 Antique Bay ADA Type

3.5 EXTERIOR PIN-MOUNTED DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER SIGNAGE SCHEDULEA. The following schedule is subject to revision per Owner requirements.

TYPE SIGNAGE COPY REMARKS

Building Name

FIRE STATION 12-inch-high flat-cut aluminum characters. See drawings for location.

Fire StationNumber

3 48-inch-high reverse-illuminated Red (LED) fabricated channel aluminum characters. See drawings for location.

Building Address

1702 6-inch-high flat-cut aluminum characters. See drawings for location.


Technical SpecificationsSection 102800 – Toilet Accessories


102800-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 102800 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Toilet accessories.2. Underlavatory Guards.

B. All accessories shall be designed and installed to be in compliance with the authority having jurisdiction, or the Florida Accessibility Guidelines for Building Construction,whichever is more severe.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each product indicated.B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by

room of each accessory required. Use room and product designations indicated on Drawings.

1.3 WARRANTYA. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET AND SHOWER ACCESSORIESA. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

products indicated on the drawings, or comparable products by one of the following manufacturers:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.2. American Specialties, Inc.3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.4. Bradley Corporation5. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALSA. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch minimum

nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with

silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Technical SpecificationsSection 102800 – Toilet AccessoriesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

102800-2VERSION: 171117

D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDSA. Insulating Piping Coverings: White, antimicrobial, molded-vinyl covering for supply and

drain piping assemblies intended for use at accessible lavatories to prevent direct contact with and burns from piping. Provide components as required for applications indicated with flip tops at valves that allow service access without removing coverings.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:1. Brocar Products, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULEA. Each toilet lavatory sink to receive:

1. One Mirror.2. One soap dispenser.3. One under lavatory guard where piping is visible.

B. Each Unisex toilet room to receive:1. One paper towel dispenser.2. One toilet tissue dispenser.3. One robe hook.4. Two grab bars: 42” long & 36” long.

C. Each toilet stall to receive:1. One toilet tissue dispenser.2. One robe hook.3. One sanitary napkin disposal at each Women’s toilet.

D. Each Accessible Toilet Stall (84” wide x 60” deep without swinging door) to receive:1. One toilet tissue dispenser.2. One Mirror.3. One soap dispenser.4. One paper towel dispenser.5. One robe hook.6. Two grab bars: 42” long & 36” long.7. One sanitary napkin disposal at each Women’s Toilet.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and

recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

Technical SpecificationsSection 102800 – Toilet Accessories


102800-3VERSION: 171117

B. Install all components in strict accordance with the Florida Accessibility Guidelines for Building Construction or the authority having jurisdiction whichever is more severe.1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested

according to method in ASTM F 446.C. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms

function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.


Technical SpecificationsSection 102800 – Toilet AccessoriesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

102800-4VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 104400 – Fire Protection Specialties


104400-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Portable fire extinguishers.2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating, classification, material

descriptions, dimensions of components and profiles for portable fire extinguishers.Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction for fire-protection cabinets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

D. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

E. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.F. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed,

semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,

"Portable Fire Extinguishers".B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an

independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

Technical SpecificationsSection 104400 – Fire Protection SpecialtiesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

104400-2VERSION: 171117

1.5 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with the fire extinguisher cabinets,

specified in a separate section, to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTYA. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire

extinguishers indicated are accommodated.B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.9 SEQUENCINGA. Apply decals on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERSA. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. Amerex Corporation.b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.i. Moon-American.j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.k. Potter Roemer LLC.l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.



104400-3VERSION: 171117

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A: 60-B:C, 10-lbnominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETA. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide “Cosmopolitan Series” recessed fire extinguisher cabinets with #6 satin-finish stainless steel trim and doors, door style;“V” (Vertical Duo), door glazing; clear tempered glass as manufactured by JL Industries (a division of the Activar Construction Products Group) or provide acomparable product by one of the following:a. American Specialties, Inc.b. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

F. Accessories:1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

G. Materials:1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

a. Finish: No. 6 satin finish.2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,

3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.3 FABRICATIONA. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,

door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.1. Weld joints and grind smooth.2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.4. Install door locks at factory.


104400-4VERSION: 171117

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,

minimum 1/2 inch thick.2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from

damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed

cabinets will be installed.C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Prepare recesses for recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of

cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. General: Install fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets in locations and at

mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall

thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.



104400-5VERSION: 171117

3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANINGA. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection

cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



104400-6VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical SpecificationsSection 107516 – Ground-Set Flagpoles


107516-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum.B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags.


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpoles.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other

protective container.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories,

bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design flagpole assemblies.B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports,

shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. See Drawings for basic

wind speed for Project location.2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for

use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.

Technical SpecificationsSection 107516 – Ground-Set FlagpolesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

107516-2VERSION: 171117

2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES

A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Entasis-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:a. Acme/Lingo Flagpoles, LLC.b. American Flagpole.c. Baartol Company.d. Concord Industries, Inc.e. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc.f. Ewing Flagpoles.g. Morgan-Francis Flagpoles and Accessories.h. Pole-Tech Company Inc.i. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP.

B. Exposed Height: 30 feet.C. Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary,

comply with the following:1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead

calking.2. Provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves.

D. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch-diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole.1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole.

E. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass or PVC pipe foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation.1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole.

F. Cast-Metal Shoe Base: Made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpole for anchor-bolt mounting; furnish with anchor bolts.1. Furnish ground spike.

G. Hinged Baseplate: Cast-metal tilting hinged base and anchor plate joined by permanently secured pivot rod. Furnish with stainless-steel screws for securing tilting base to anchor plate when not tilted; furnish with anchor bolts.1. Finish: Same as flagpole.2. Furnish aluminum base or aluminum flashing collar finished to match flagpole.3. Furnish ground spike.

2.4 FITTINGSA. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-

butt diameter.

Technical SpecificationsSection 107516 – Ground-Set Flagpoles


107516-3VERSION: 171117

B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Furnish flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless-steel swivel snap hooks with neoprene or vinyl

covers. Furnish two per halyard.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALSA. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.B. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.C. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane joint sealant complying

with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Natural Satin Finish: AA-M32, fine, directional, medium satin polish; buff complying

with AA-M20; seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-

grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose

soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.

C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.

D. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure.

E. Sleeves: Locate and secure sleeves in forms by bracing to reinforcement and forms.F. Anchor Bolts: Locate and secure anchor bolts in forms with templates and by tying to

reinforcement.G. Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact

concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound.

Technical SpecificationsSection 107516 – Ground-Set FlagpolesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

107516-4VERSION: 171117

H. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.

3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATIONA. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to manufacturer's written

instructions.B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel

centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch (50-mm) layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.

C. Baseplate: Cast anchor bolts in concrete foundation. Install baseplate on washers placed over leveling nuts on anchor bolts and adjust until flagpole is plumb. After flagpole is plumb, tighten retaining nuts and fill space under baseplate solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Finish exposed grout surfaces smooth and slope 45 degrees away from edges of baseplate.


Technical SpecificationsSection 122413 – Roller Window Shades


122413-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 122413 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollersB. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material

descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building structure.2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,

speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.

3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment.4. Size and location of access to shade operator, and adjustable components.5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.

D. Samples for Verification:1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each

type of roller shade indicated.2. For the following products:

a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- square section of fabric, from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.

b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long.E. Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on

Drawings.

Technical SpecificationsSection 122413 – Roller Window ShadesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

122413-2VERSION: 171117

F. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.G. Qualification Data: For Installer.H. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade.I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of roller shade.

J. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to

fabrics, finishes, and performance.3. Operating hardware.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single

manufacturer.C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-

test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.

D. Product Standard: Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-

test-response characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and

dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



122413-3VERSION: 171117

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Rollers Shades: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and

pattern indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not fewer than 2 units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS (RWS3)A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the


B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel

in tube.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.


122413-4VERSION: 171117

G. Installation Accessories:1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.a. Shape: L-shaped.

H. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH DOUBLE ROLLERS (RWS1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.c. Chain-Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as

recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.1. Double-Roller Mounting Configuration: Offset, outside roller over and inside roller

under.2. Inside Roller:

a. Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.

3. Outside Roller:a. Drive-End Location: Left side of interior face of shade.b. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.

4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel in tube.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and installation locations and conditions indicated.

E. Inside Shadebands:1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.


F. Outside Shadebands:



122413-5VERSION: 171117

1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric.2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.


G. Installation Accessories:1. Exposed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded-aluminum enclosure including front

fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.a. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to enclose roller and

shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

2. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.

3. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.

4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES (RWS2)

A. Motorized Operating System: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator system of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in roller.

a. Electrical Characteristics: 110-V ac.b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades

indicated.c. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated.d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated.

3. Remote Control: Hand held. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades:a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, momentary-contact, three-position, switch-

operated remote control with open, close, and off functions. Provide two remotes per station.

4. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or motor failure.

5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to stop shades automatically at fully raised, intermediate and fully lowered positions.

6. Operating Features:a. All shades on the same switch circuit or with the same network group

address with the same opening height shall align at each limit or preset


122413-6VERSION: 171117

(intermediate stopping position) when traveling from any position, up or down.

b. Shades of differing heights shall have capability for custom, aligned intermediate stop positions when traveling from any position, up or down.Override switch.

B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel

in tube.

C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers that are operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

E. Shadebands:1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material

F. Installation Accessories:1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.a. Shape: L-shaped.b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and

shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATIONA. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the

roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.1. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4

inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed.



122413-7VERSION: 171117

2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting headbox, roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: Match Architect's samples, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATIONA. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to

manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

3.3 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from

binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.


122413-8VERSION: 171117

3.5 DEMONSTRATIONA. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 1 Section Demonstration and Training."


Technical SpecificationsSection 124813 – Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

Plant City Fire Station No. 3

124813-1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Roll-up rail mats.2. Recessed frames.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 124816 "Entrance Floor Grilles" for rigid floor grilles and frames.

1.3 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.2. Divisions between mat sections.3. Perimeter floor frame.

C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat.2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color.3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.


protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount

installed, but no fewer than 10 units.

Technical SpecificationsSection 124813 – Entrance Floor Mats and FramesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

124813-2VERSION: 171117

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERALA. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft..2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.

B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design”.

2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATSA. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated in the Finish Legend on the

Drawings, or comparable products by another manufacturer as approved by the Architect, at the locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Roll-up, Vinyl-Rail Hinged Mats: Vinyl-acrylic tread rails 1-1/16 inches wide minimumby 3/8 inch thick minimum, with slotted or perforated hinges.1. Tread Inserts: 5/32-inch- high, 35-oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, polyamidenylon-

pile, fusion-bonded carpet.2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As indicated on the drawings.3. Rail Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.4. Hinges: Vinyl.5. Mat Size: As indicated on the drawings.

2.3 FRAMESA. Recessed Frames: Manufacturer's standard extrusion.

1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.a. Color: Clear.

2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALSA. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for

recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness.

2.5 FABRICATIONA. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.

B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions

exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible,

Technical SpecificationsSection 124813 – Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

Plant City Fire Station No. 3

124813-3VERSION: 171117

with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins.

C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location,

sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.


3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install recessed mat frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's written

instructions so that tops of mats will be flush with adjoining finished flooring. Set mats with tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat.1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure

attachment of frames.2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper

elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.3. Delay setting mats until construction traffic has ended.

3.3 PROTECTIONA. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of

plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.


Technical SpecificationsSection 124813 – Entrance Floor Mats and FramesProject No. 1622Plant City Fire Station No. 3

124813-4VERSION: 171117

NO TEXT THIS PAGE

Technical Specifications Section 210000 – Fire Sprinkler Systems

Project No. 1501 Tarpon Springs Fire Rescue Fire Station #71

210000-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 210000 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Provide complete automatic wet pipe type sprinkler system for the areas and

occupancies shown on the drawings. System shall be designed and installed in accordance with:1. 2010 Edition of NFPA 13 Standard for the "Installation of Sprinkler Systems", 2. Building and Fire Codes of local and state authorities having jurisdiction,

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". Calculation

for hydraulic design shall be submitted with working plans and results of recent flow test (to determine the adequacy of the water supply before construction begins) showing approval by the "Authority Having Jurisdiction".

B. Within thirty (30) days after the award of contract and prior to fabrication, complete shop drawings of the sprinkler systems, including manufacturer's equipment data and catalog sheets, shall be submitted to the following:

C. Insurance association having jurisdiction. Local authorities having jurisdiction. When approved shop drawings are obtained from the above jurisdictions, they shall be immediately submitted to the architect for his review.

D. Drawings shall be based on the latest floor plans, which are available at that time.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDSA. Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or

indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings. Equipment shall, where applicable, be Underwriters Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual approved.

1.4 DESIGN PARAMETERS A. General: Pipe sizes shall be hydraulically calculated and designed in accordance with

NFPA 13, based on the occupancy classification of the protected area as scheduled on the drawings or as otherwise defined. Where a system is scheduled to include more than one occupancy classification, the hydraulic calculations shall be based on the higher demand or duplicate calculations may be submitted to show that each demand is met in its particular area.

B. Light Hazard Occupancies: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.10 GPM per square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet of system coverage and 100 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 225 square feet per sprinkler. Design area reduction per NFPA 13 for ceiling height is acceptable.



210000-2VERSION: 180118

C. Ordinary Hazard Occupancies: 1. Group I: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.15 GPM per

square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet of system coverage and 250 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 130 square feet per sprinkler. Design area reduction per NFPA 13 for ceiling height is acceptable.

2. Group II: Shall be designed to provide a minimum density of 0.20 GPM per square foot for the most hydraulically remote 1,500 square feet of system coverage and 250 GPM for inside and outside hose streams. Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 130 square feet per sprinkler. Design area reduction per NFPA 13 for ceiling height is acceptable.

1.5 WATER SUPPLY A. Shall be connected to a reliable and adequate water supply as described in NFPA 13

and indicated on the drawings.

1.6 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTIONA. Shall be as indicated on the drawings or as defined by NFPA 13.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, VALVES, AND SPECIALTIES A. Piping and Valves:

1. Fire protection piping above grade, inside buildings, shall be as shown on drawings. Fittings generally shall be UL approved, Victaulic piping fittings and Victaulic Style 77 couplings on 3" and larger sizes. All fittings and couplings shall be screwed for pipe 2-1/2" or smaller. All Victaulic Style 77 couplings shall have housing fabricated in two or more parts malleable iron castings; coupling gasket shall be Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber; coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type. Victaulic fittings shall be fabricated of malleable iron casting in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-666c, Grade II.

2. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with grease or graphite paste.

3. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in latest published literature.

4. Fire Protection System gate valves shall be UL/Fm approved, class 200, solid wedge disc, O.S. & Y. or butterfly type.

5. Fire Protection System check valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Crane No. 41, made of best grade brass and screwed pattern. Check valves 3" and larger shall be UL/FM approved, swing check, bolted cap, high strength cast iron body and cap, bronze trim, flanged, Crane No. 375 or Jenkins.



210000-3VERSION: 180118

6. All valves where shown on the drawings shall be electrically supervised with tamper switch wired to alarm bell at central panel. Coordinate wiring with valve and controls.

7. Check valves for Siamese fittings shall be provided with Potter-Roemer, Inc., No. 5980 automatic ball drip, piped to drip over a floor drain.

8. Where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, or other building construction, sleeves (UL Classified assembly) must be used. Where exposed piping passes through finished work, escutcheons shall be chrome plated or other finishes acceptable to the Architect. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snuggly around piping. Where finish is not a problem, suitable plates shall be provided at each hole to assure effectiveness of construction as a fire stop.

9. Piping in areas having ceilings shall be concealed. Branchline piping in areas with exposed metal roof deck ceiling system shall be installed concealed in the grooves with UL listed hangers designed for that application. Include cover panels for pipe access. Piping in other areas may be exposed, but kept at a minimum distance from structural systems. All piping shall be free of rust, clean and have a minimum of one shop coat of rust inhibiting paint.

B. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: 1. Shall consist of riser check valve trimmed for vertical or horizontal installation

with complete trim piping, valve and fittings including flow switch. Piping arrangements and system boundaries shall be as indicated on the construction drawings.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Refer to the Section entitled "Hangers and Supports: Piping System".

2.3 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. General 1. Shall be types as shown on drawings. Sprinklers shall be designed for a 175-PSI

w.w.p. All sprinklers shall be UL listed and/or FM approved. All heads located in any area subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with approved guards. A reserve supply of sprinklers, quantity in accordance with NFPA 13-2002, shall be provided in a metal cabinet with at least one sprinkler wrench for each type of sprinkler used. Cabinet shall, as a minimum, contain at least two of each type and temperature-rating sprinkler used in the system. Model numbers indicated are to set standard of quality and design. Comparable sprinklers by other firstline manufacturers may be submitted for use subject to approval.

B. Escutcheon Plates 1. Shall be used in finished areas having suspended ceilings with pendant and

sidewall sprinklers. Escutcheons shall have bright chrome, be constructed of brass, and shall not exceed 5/8" in height except sprinklers in areas with ceilings shall be recessed type.



210000-4VERSION: 180118

C. Temperature Rating 1. Shall be based on the anticipated maximum ceiling temperatures in the area

being protected in accordance with the following table:

Max. Ceiling Temp. Rating Temperature Temp. (degree F) (degree F) Class 100 135 – 170 Ordinary 150 175 – 225 Intermediate

225 250 – 300 High Proximity of heat producing devices or special conditions as described in NFPA 13 also will be considered.

2.4 WATER FLOW INDICATORS AND ALARMS

A. Provide in the fire protection system Potter-Roemer, Inc. #6200 Series flow switch; Fig. 6230 alarm bell, Fig. 6235 bell guard, Fig. 6220 tamper switch on stop valves and Fig. 6240 pressure gauge. The wiring of alarms and connection to the fire alarm system shall be by the electrical contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install systems in areas indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, etc.; however, these deviations shall be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. The system shall be installed in accordance with applicable portions of the National Fire Protection Association Code.

3.2 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTIONA. Each sprinkler system shall be equipped with an inspector's test connection.

Inspector's test valves to be located not more than 7'-0" above finished floor. . Inspector's test valve, sight glass, union with orifice giving flow equal to one sprinkler shall be as per required by NFPA 13..

3.3 SPRINKLER DRAINS AND FLUSHING CONNECTIONS:A. All sprinkler drains and flushing fittings, which are required by NFPA 13, shall be

installed.

3.4 SLEEVINGA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". All openings

in walls or floor slabs through which piping passes shall be UL classified mineral and details. Openings in exterior walls or floor slabs below grade shall be made permanently air, gas, and watertight with approved devices.



210000-5VERSION: 180118

3.5 SPECIAL AREASA. Suspended Ceilings: Sprinklers located in areas having suspended ceilings shall be

located so as to create an aesthetic appearance with other ceiling fixtures as indicated on the Architect's consolidated reflected ceiling plans. Any deviations to meet code requirements or for other reasons shall be approved by the Architect prior to incorporation. Sprinklers shall be located in an aesthetic pattern, which complies with code coverage and shall not penetrate ceiling T-bars. Sprinkler contractor shall provide all modifications to grid required to accommodate sprinklers.


Technical Specifications Section 220503 – Plumbing


220503-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 220503 - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Section 230500 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." B. Section 230700 entitled “Thermal Insulation.“

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The extent of plumbing is indicated on the drawings and specifications. B. In general, the work consists of, but is not limited to the following:

1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of soil, storm, waste and vent piping. 3. Natural gas piping and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 4. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 5. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof or as specified on

drawings.6. Connections of equipment furnished by others.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Refer to individual technical sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 The plumbing materials, fixtures and installation shall comply with all requirements of the latest edition of the Florida Building Code and all applicable state and local codes.


Technical Specifications Section 220510 – Instructions and Maintenance Manuals for Plumbing Work


220510-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 220510 – INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR PLUMBING WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems.

PART 2 - DOCUMENTATION

2.1 Provide two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows A. Hardback three ring loose-leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractors control subcontractor and

related contractor's or material supplier’s names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized

representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt.

E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment

including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems.

5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for

each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up.

G. Any as-built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems.

H. Contractor's Site Test and Balance report. I. Copies of certificates of inspection. J. Guarantees.

Technical Specifications Section 220510 – Instructions and Maintenance Manuals for Plumbing Work


220510-2VERSION: 180118

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel.


Technical Specifications Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports – Piping Systems


220529-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS – PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers,

nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment and all piping systems.

1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORKA. Contractor shall coordinate: shop drawings; placement; structural framing and overall

building construction; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to other Sections for special requirements relating to specific equipment and systems.

1.3 MANUFACTURERA. Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Division ITT, F&S

Manufacturing Corp.; Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or an approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERSA. Hangers in contact with copper piping: Shall be copper plated or Teflon coated.

Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C. B. Hangers (other than in contact with copper piping): Shall have manufacturer's

standard finish. Pipe 3" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. Pipe 2-1/2" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104.

2.2 PIPE ROLLER STANDS A. Grinnell Fig. 274.

2.3 PIPE ROLLER HANGERS A. Grinnell Fig. 171.

2.4 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDE A. Grinnell Fig. 256.

2.5 PIPE RISER CLAMPS A. Grinnell Fig. 261.

Technical Specifications Section 220529 – Hangers and Supports – Piping Systems


220529-2VERSION: 180118

2.6 INSULATION SHIELDS A. Grinnell Fig. 292 with links.

2.7 BEAM CLAMPS A. Grinnell Fig. 292 with links.

2.8 RODA. Sized with safety factor of five (5). Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." All inserts,

fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 PIPEA. Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall

be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulating, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger and support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings.


Technical Specifications Section 221100 – Domestic Water System


221100-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 221100 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the specifications and

drawings. Drawings scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner (No change in Contract price).

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to Section 230500 entitled “Common Requirements for Mechanical Work.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR WATER PIPEA. Cold water supply piping below grade up to a point five feet outside the building line

shall be type K hard drawn seamless copper water tube in a vinyl sleeve conforming to ASTM B88-89. Hot and cold water supply piping above grade shall be type L hard drawn seamless copper water tube conforming to ASTM B88.

2.2 FITTINGSA. Wrought copper, pressure type conforming to ASTM B16.22-1989.

2.3 SOLDERA. Lead free, 95-5 non-corrosive flux.

2.4 PIPE PROTECTIVE COATING (INTERIOR)A. Protect hot and cold water piping below floor or in contact with concrete by wrapping

with 20 mil thickness vinyl tape equal to Permacel No. 307.

2.5 DIELECTRIC ISOLATORS:A. Unions: For pipe sizes two inches (2”) and smaller, EPCO or Rockford-Eclipse

insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. B. Flanges: For pipe sizes two and one-half inches (2-1/2”) and over; Plico Products

flange insulation sets with: phenolic retainer, nitrile rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer sets. Spring lock type with set screw.

2.6 RELIEF VALVESA. ASME rated; size and setting as recommended by equipment manufacturer and/or

indicated on drawings.



221100-2VERSION: 180118

2.7 VALVES:A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed

working pressure cast or stamped on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines.

B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the gate pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure.

C. All gate valves shall be packed and left perfectly tight at the completion of work. D. Gate Valves: Gate valves two inches (2”) and smaller shall be made of the best brass

of screwed pattern of the solid wedge type, double seat, non-rising stem, with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T-133, Stockham B-128 or Jenkins 370C. Gate valves two and one-half inches (2-1/2”) or larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanges ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves, NIBCO F617-0, Stockham 9-623 or Jenkins 651C.

E. Globe Valves: Globe valves 2: and smaller shall be the best grade brass, screwed pattern, removable disc suitable for the fluid to be controlled with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T235-Y, Jenkins 106B or Stockham B-22-T. Globe valves two and one-half inches (2-1/2”) and larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanged ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves. NIBCO F178-B, Jenkins 613C or Stockham 9-512.

F. Check Valves: check valves two inches (2”) and smaller shall be made of the best grade brass, screwed pattern, swing check, one disc for hot and cold water; NIBCO T4-413-BY, Jenkins 996 or Stockham B-319. Check valves two and one-half inches (2-1/2”) and larger shall be iron body.

G. Ball valves two inches (2”) and smaller shall be all bronze, lead free of compact pattern with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2” Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves in sizes two inches (2”) and smaller. NIBCO S-585-80-LF, Milwaukee BA 100/150 Apollo 70-100/200.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONSA. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas and watertight. B. Equipment Connections: Final connections to services and connections to equipment

shall be made with unions for pipe sizes two inches (2”) and under and with companion flanges for pipe two and one-half inches (2-1/2”) and larger. Where incompatible piping material comes in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate the two materials using dielectric isolators as specified herein before.

C. Piping drops to points of use shall each be valved for individual shut-offs.



221100-3VERSION: 180118

3.2 VALVESA. All valves, stops, pressure regulators and similar items shall be installed in an easily

accessible location. Provide access panel (refer to Section 15000 entitled “Common Requirements for Mechanical Work”) for all concealed valves.

3.3 STERILIZATIONA. Sterilization solution shall be 400 PPM to 1000 PPM chlorine made from a sanitation

grade chlorine or sodium hypochlorite. Solution shall remain in system for twenty-four (24) hours during which time valves and faucets are to be opened and closed several times. Outlets shall be tested to insure an adequate amount of chlorine is present. At conclusion of sterilization entire system shall be flushed with clean water until chlorine content is at a level approved by the County Health Department.

3.4 TESTSA. Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested and proved tight under a

water pressure no less than 25 PSI above the working pressure under which it is to be operated and retained for not less than 24 hours shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect/Engineer before it is removed.

3.5 END OF SECTION 221100

Technical Specifications Section 221313 – Sanitary Drainage System


221313-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 221313 - SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Provide soil, waste and vent piping systems complete as indicated on specifications and drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC solvent welded fittings.

B. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5'-0") beyond the building walls shall be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665-88).

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains shall be as manufactured by Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or Zurn. Provide flashing clamp devices where required by floor construction. Refer to schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall promptly install all sewer and drain piping after excavating, chasing, or cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the openings for such piping open as short a time as possible. No piping shall, however, be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before the examination of it by the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 SCOPE

A. All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipe shall have a grade of one-quarter inch (1/4") per foot wherever possible and not less, in any case, than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or less.

Technical Specifications Section 221313 – Sanitary Drainage System


221313-2VERSION: 180118

3.3 INSULATION

A. Refer to Section 230700 entitled "Thermal Insulation."

3.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Refer to Section 224200 entitled "Plumbing Fixtures, Trim, and Specialties.

3.5 VENTS

A. Vent branches shall be kept above the fixtures in such a manner as to preclude the use of the vents as waste pipes should the latter become obstructed. All branches shall be so graded as to prevent accumulation of water or scale therein. All vent pipes shall be properly graded without drops or sags and so connected as to drip back to waste pipes by gravity. Wherever practicable, two or more vents shall be connected together and extended as one vent through the roof.

3.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome-plated brass (iron pipe size) and have chrome-plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings.

3.7 FLASHING

A. At all points where the vents pass through the roof, the openings shall be flashed with sheet lead flashing weighing not less than four (4) pounds per square foot. The flashing shall be made absolutely watertight at the roofline and shall be extended up, over and down at least two inches (2") into the pipe. Each flange shield shall extend not less than fourteen inches (14") in all directions from the respective vent, underneath the roofing material.

3.8 TESTS

A. After all soil, waste and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water to the highest point of the system, but with no less than 10 ft head of water, and allowed to remain filled for twenty-four (24) hours and proved tight under such conditions. This test may be conducted in segments as required by the sequence of construction. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect/Engineer before tests are removed.


Technical Specifications Section 221316 – Pipe, Valves, and Fittings – Storm, Soil, Waste, Vent, and Drain


221316-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 221316 - PIPE, VALVES, AND FITTINGS – STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT, AND DRAIN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide storm, soil, waste, vent, and drain piping systems complete as indicated on

drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price).

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPEA. Schedule 40 PVC.

2.2 FITTINGSA. PVC solvent welded fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work", paragraph

entitled "Drawings."

3.2 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONSA. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Connections: Provide fixture and equipment connections in compliance with

requirements of local codes.

3.3 FLASHINGS:A. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Showers, Etc.: Provide proper flashings for plumbing

specialties installed in floors and roofs. Flashings shall be as per detail shown on architectural drawings.

B. Roof Penetrations: Provide flashing for all pipe passing through the roof. Minimum height of vents shall be one foot (1') above finished roof. Refer to architectural drawings for detail.

Technical Specifications Section 221316 – Pipe, Valves, and Fittings – Storm, Soil, Waste, Vent, and Drain


221316-2VERSION: 180118

3.4 CLEANOUTSA. Provide as indicated and as required by local code. Provide access covers as specified

for concealed locations.


Technical Specifications Section 221319 – Grease Interceptors


221319-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 221319 – GREASE INTERCEPTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Provide underground reinforced concrete grease interceptor in accordance with all

applicable requirements of Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-G101, EPA Manual, Florida Administrative Code 10D-6 and local plumbing codes.

1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORKA. Refer to Section 230510 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to Section 230510 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

Include complete data on: dimensions; working pressure; code compliance; protective finish; acceptance by local authority; manhole; and all accessories.

1.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONSA. Refer to Section 220510 entitled "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals."

1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDSA. Where compliance with an industry, society, or association standard is specified or

indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERCEPTORA. Shall be of capacity as indicated on Drawings, precast or poured in place reinforced

concrete with manhole access to inlet and discharge fittings. Inlet fitting shall be four inch PVC short pattern combination with twelve inch long tailpiece. Outlet fitting shall be four inch PVC short pattern combination with tailpiece extended to twelve inches above floor of interceptor. Precast grease traps shall be as manufactured by Robinson Concrete Specialties, Incorporated or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INTERCEPTORA. Shall be installed plumb and level in all respects, on stable compacted earth. If earth is

determined to be unstable, lime rock or concrete base shall be provided to obtain adequate stability.


Technical Specifications Section 221413 – Storm Water System


221413-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 221413 - STORM WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Provide storm water piping system complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales

prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price).

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to Section 230500 entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC

solvent welded fittings. B. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5'-0") beyond the building walls shall

be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665-88).

2.2 ROOF DRAINSA. All roof drains will be furnished and installed with sheet lead flashing of dimensions and

configurations as shown on A-series drawing. Provide all accessories required for the particular construction in which they are to be mounted. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade or Zurn are approved manufacturers. Refer to schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALA. All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipes shall have a grade of

one-quarter inch (1/4") per foot wherever possible, and not less in any case than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or less.

3.2 INSULATIONA. Refer to Section 230700 entitled "Thermal Insulation."

3.3 TESTSA. All storm drains shall be tested by filling leader with water to 10 feet head minimum and

allowing to stand twenty-four (24) hours with no loss of head. Any tests shall be observed by a representative of the Architect before tests are removed.


Technical Specifications Section 224200 – Plumbing Fixtures, Trim, and Specialties


224200-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM, AND SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

1.2 ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTSA. Showers: Shower heads used shall be equipped with flow control devices to limit total

flow to a maximum of two and a half (2.5) gallons per minute for ADA showers and a maximum of one and three quarts (1.75) gallons per minute for non-ADA showers.

B. Lavatories: Lavatories which are provided in public areas shall have the following feature: Outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a maximum of 0.5 GPM.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIMA. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices necessary for rigidly

mounting fixtures in place. Unless noted otherwise, each wall hung plumbing fixture shall be supported on appropriate type of chair carriers.

B. Use chrome-plated brass piping where exposed to view between fixture and finished wall face and jacketed where fixture is designated for handicapped use. Provide tight fitting escutcheons of chrome plated brass wherever piping passes through walls. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement.

C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Fixtures: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Elkay, Just, Fiat or Kohler. 2. Flush Valves: Delaney, Sloan or Zurn. 3. Toilet Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite or Centoco. 4. Trim: American Standard, Chicago, Crane, Eljer, Kohler, T&S Brass, Zurn or

Symmons.5. Electric Water Coolers: Elkay, Halsey Taylor or Oasis.

D. General:1. Acid resisting enamel for enameled cast iron and steel fixtures. 2. Cast brass P-trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink unless otherwise

indicated.3. Renewable seats and disks for supply valves. 4. Stops for fixture hot and cold water supplies.



224200-2VERSION: 180118

2.2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIESA. Cleanouts:

1. Exterior type: Heavy-duty cast iron body with round, scoriated, non-tilt top. 2. Interior floor type: Cast iron with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze top. 3. Interior wall type: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and square,

smooth nickel bronze access cover and frame. 4. Plugs: Heavy cast iron ferrule with screw plug. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn, Sioux Chief or approved equal. Refer to

schedule on drawings. B. Traps:

1. Deep seal type on all floor drains. 2. Exposed and/or in cabinets: Chrome plated cast brass with cleanouts.

C. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Shall be in accord with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH-201. 2. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn or Sioux Chief are approved equals.

D. Floor Drains: 1. Adjustable height, cast iron body, double drainage flanges, flashing clamp, nickel

bronze strainer, no integral trap, inside caulk bottom outlet with adapter for ring.2. 6" strainer. 3. Polished brass strainer in equipment rooms. 4. Automatic trap primer connection except on shower drains. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn or Sioux Chief are approved equals. Refer to

schedule on the drawings.

PART 3 - 3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALA. Protect chrome-plated items from damage by wrenches and other hazards.B. Install fixtures having flush valves so that supplies to valves for all identical fixtures in

each room are at same height for that fixture type. Seat valve in place so that valve discharge centerline is directly above fixture spud centerline; do not connect by bending nipple between valve spud.

C. Install cold water on right (facing applicable fixtures).D. Verify, coordinate, adjust, align and secure rough-in piping to provide neat

appearances and serviceable operation. Correlate with fixture manufacturer's data and recommendations and with required dimensions.



224200-3VERSION: 180118

3.2 CLEANOUTSA. Install at or near foot of each soil or waste stack and at each change in direction of

building drain greater than 45 degrees. B. Shall be accessible; install flush with finished wall, floor or finished grade.

3.3 TRAPSA. Trap each fixture (except those with integral traps) with water sealed trap located as

close as possible to fixture and never greater than 24" from fixture. B. Provide all floor drains and hub drain traps and indirect waste traps with automatic

primer system for each trap.

3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERSA. Size and locate in accord with PDI Standard PDI-WH-201.

3.5 FINAL INSTALLATIONA. Final installation of all drains (floor, roof, hub, shower and other similar types) must

yield absolutely permanently water tight floor and/or roof system.


Technical Specifications Section 230500 – Common Requirements for Mechanical

Work Project No. 1622 Plant City Fire Station #03

230500-1 VERSION: 180118

SECTION 230500 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF DIVISION A. Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and

properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of thelatest Florida Mechanical Code and to other pertinent codes made a part of such codeby reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Workshall be understood to include all work specified in Divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 DRAWINGSA. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with

reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic andindicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicatemore exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures,equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items whichremain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements ofmaterials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, aswork progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings andwith the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices orfixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring todimensions on Architectural (A-series) drawings and not by scaling drawings.

1.3 COORDINATION OF WORKA. Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural

and structural features to preclude interferences between the work of different tradesand to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiringnecessarily fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, anddiffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence over work not requiring such fixed locationsand shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Shouldwork be performed without adequate coordination so that interferences occur betweenwork of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference’s by requiringnecessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval ofthe Architect and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to "General Conditions." Submit to Architect for approval, before commencing

work, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. Inaddition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale,requested by Architect to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship toadjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in jobprogress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shopdrawings shall clearly show the following:



230500-2 VERSION: 180118

1. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given inthe item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications andfeatures. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawingsor specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is bothquantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so thatcomparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than thatgiven in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds,velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves,temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names,model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full loadamperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set-points, chemicalcompositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses,gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item.

2. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineerapprove any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought toArchitect's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsiblefor correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations arediscovered.

1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain one extra set of black-line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings.

Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevantinformation shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be givento the Architect.

B. As-built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in thelegend. As a minimum, show the following:1. Location of stub-outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines.2. Location and depth of under-slab and in-slab piping.3. All routing of piping system.4. Correct all equipment schedules.5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules.6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data.

1.6 FEES AND PERMIT: A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having

jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may beused. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractorwithout additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on thePlans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Whereapplicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met.

B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by allauthorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what-so-ever incidental



230500-3 VERSION: 180118

to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams-SteigerOccupational Safety and Health Act.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect.B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the

agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the productsexamined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory,the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified.

C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist betweenthese "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Divisions 22 and 23.1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved,

must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannotmeet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at theContractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result ofsubstitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense.

2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted inaccordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure thatthe Architect, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensionalaccuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or theability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance ofthe equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans andspecifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted bythe Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect.

3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules ordesignated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if theitem is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of themanufacturer.

4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and/or manufacturer's equipment in lieuof those specified, he shall submit written request to the Architect for approval nolater than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids.

5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Architect's consultants and/orverbal requests will not be evaluated.

6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into theContract Documents by form of addendum.



230500-4 VERSION: 180118

7. All substitutions proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt ofbids shall not be considered. Any substitution not accepted and any substitutionrequest proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shallnot be used as either the basis for bidding or submittal after award of thecontract.

D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows:1. No overloading.2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits

recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer.3. Compatible with all systems.

E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows:1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application.2. Installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application

except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise.

2.2 SLEEVES A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be

minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during constructionperiod shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire ratedbarriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters'Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated.Method submitted must show proof of UL label.

B. Pipe sleeves:1. Walls and partitions:

a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above grade): Sleeves shall be 18gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sizedto pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimumbetween covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have18 gauge steel sleeves.

b. Floors (above grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe orplastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leavinga clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend1/2 inch above finished floor.

c. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts andcovering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions.

d. Sealing of sleeves:1) Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing

through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin-proof by packingsolidly with mineral wool or fiberglass.

2) Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended bymanufacturer, other sealing materials may be acceptable as optionsto above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior toprocurement.



230500-5 VERSION: 180118

2.3 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS, IN EXPOSED AREAS A. Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or

exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shallbe chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome platedbrass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricatedof 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatlyfitted around duct or pipe.

2.4 MOTORSA. Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or

the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following:1. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type

designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambientat 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shallbe insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof,horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall beprovided as scheduled and shall be two winding type.

2. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronousspeed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constantspeed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class Binsulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steelenclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings.

3. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are thosenominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating atspecified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers arenon-overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impellerchanges. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from thatspecified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility toinsure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no changein contract price.

2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS INVOLVING ELECTRICAL CHANGES A. If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and/or control

characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified andprovided for and/or which otherwise change the electrical and/or control system(s),then (even if the Architect approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes,voltages, amperages and wiring for applicable items so that applicable electrical and/orcontrol changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs.Other coordination is as specified elsewhere.



230500-6 VERSION: 180118

2.6 BELT DRIVES A. Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V-belt drive. Belts shall

be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefullymatched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly onshafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be asrecommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplaterating of motor.1. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided.2. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary

to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be firstfitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizesof fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide alldrives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary airquantity.

2.7 BEARINGS A. All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated.

2.8 BELT AND COUPLING GUARDSA. Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be

constructed of #12 U.S. Standard gauges ¾-inch diamond mesh wire screen, orequivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts andsheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not lessthan #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound andvibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement ofmotor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance andtesting operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have couplingguards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safetyregulations and OSHA.

2.9 PAINTING AND MARKINGA. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified

under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall beperformed under Division furnishing equipment.

B. Marking: Refer to Section entitled "Identification of Mechanical Systems."

2.10 ACCESS DOORSA. Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers,

coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified.Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson, or anacceptable equal, type as follows:



230500-7 VERSION: 180118

Door Location Door Type

Drywall Style "DW"

Masonry or tile Style "M-Stainless"

Acoustical tile Style "AT"

Plaster Style "K"

Fire-rated walls Style "Fire Rated"

Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems.

2.11 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL: A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and

outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumpingand protection for safety of persons and property.

B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth. Completedbackfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compactionrequirements of Division Two of these Specifications:1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other

locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum)concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements.

2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12)inches each side of footings or foundations.

C. Remove non-usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplusmaterial on site where directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Do not removeusable material from site.

D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sidesof excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using theexcavation are responsible for safety in excavations.

E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations freeof water.

F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walksand other work in the area where excavations are made.

G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buriedlines.

H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades.I. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface.J. Hold trench width to a minimum.



230500-8 VERSION: 180118

K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feetfrom the footings except by approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. When paralleltrenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance fromthe footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the verticaldistance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less thanfour (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer.

L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade of the bottomof trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fullysupported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Pipingmust be suspended from above.

M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by thebells or joints.

N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the soil is unsuitable forsupporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be madeat no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the SpecificationsBook.

O. The drawings for this project show the anticipated underground utilities. Locations ofutilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a knownfactor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error.

P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without suchbeing shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities bedamaged, repair such to Project Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at no additional costto the Owner.

Q. Special care shall be taken with excavation in limited distance from existing trees.Manual excavation shall be required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL WORK COORDINATION: A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power

coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "Furnish" and"Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by thisparagraph 3.01, and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outsideof the context of this paragraph 3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope ofthis paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified.1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation.



230500-9 VERSION: 180118

2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) theappropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place.

3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install.4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the

power circuit is connected.5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance

of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC,Section 430-71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dualcontrol and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which bothactivates and powers a small fan motor).

6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in somepredetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which thecontroller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to startand stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section430-81(a).)

7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure,temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electricalcontrol signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operationof pressure switches, etc.

B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electricrelay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (butdoes not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device.

C. Work of Divisions 22 and 23: includes (but is not necessarily limited to):1. Provide:

a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral withDivisions 22 and 23 equipment (for example, such as starters packagedwith packaged equipment, etc.).

b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (suchas electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which arespecified in Divisions 22 and 23.

c. All controls specified in Divisions 22 and 23.d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 26

panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Divisions 22 and 23 andincluding the necessary circuit breakers.

e. All control connections to equipment provided by Divisions 22 and 23.f. All control circuits, including conduit and boxes.g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other

mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such aselectric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.).

h. Auxiliary control devices.



230500-10 VERSION: 180118

i. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches,humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto.

j. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumaticconnections thereto.

k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment.l. Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment.

2. Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements ofapplicable sections of Division 26.

D. Work of Division 26 includes (but is not necessarily limited to):1. Provide:

a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes.b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other

mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such aselectric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.).

c. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at alllocations required by NEC and connections thereto except thosedisconnects which are specified in Division 15 to be provided as part of theequipment itself.

2. Install: All controllers furnished by Divisions 22 and 23.E. Other Requirements:

1. Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consumingequipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control andsequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the controlsystem specified in Divisions 22 and 23 and shall provide equipment wiringdiagrams for final coordination for actual installation.

3.2 TESTS: A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to

Architect's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation.B. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accord with standard plumbing code

and as otherwise specified.C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications,

piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressurefor a continuous 24-hour period without leaking.

D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system.E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Architect in writing at least two weeks prior

to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Architect time to schedule hisobservation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s).



230500-11 VERSION: 180118

3.3 INSTRUCTION A. Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Sections.

3.4 ACCEPTANCEA. Prior to requesting final inspection:

1. Complete all work required by drawings and specifications.2. Acceptance will be made by the Architect on the basis of tests and inspection of

project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnishtest instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments andassist with final inspection.

3.5 PROTECTION OF WORK UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt

and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Anymaterials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new"condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect. Where factory finishes occur anddamage is minor, finishes may be touched-up. If, in the opinion of the Architect, thedamage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition.


Technical Specifications Section 230510 – Instructions and Maintenance Manuals for Mechanical Work


230510-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 230510 – INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems.

PART 2 - DOCUMENTATION

2.1 Provide two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows A. Hardback three ring loose-leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractors control subcontractor and

related contractor's or material supplier’s names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized

representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt.

E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment

including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems.

5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for

each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up.

G. Any as-built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems.

H. Contractor's Site Test and Balance report. I. Copies of certificates of inspection. J. Guarantees

Technical Specifications Section 230510 – Instructions and Maintenance Manuals for Mechanical Work


230510-2VERSION: 180118

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel.


Technical Specifications Section 230531 – Roof Curbs


230531-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 230531 - ROOF CURBS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide a roof curb for each kitchen fan and ERV exhaust vent and outside air intake.

1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORKA. Coordinate roof openings, curb dimensions and electrical connections including stub

up through roof deck with fans actually furnished.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical

Work."

1.4 MANUFACTURERA. Curbs shall be matched to, and be a companion item for the equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY PREFABRICATEDA. Minimum height of 12 inches (unless otherwise indicated). B. Completely insulated internally with 2 inch minimum thickness fiberglass insulation

complying with NFPA 90A. C. Approved by Architect prior to provision of roof openings. D. Heavy gauge steel with welded joints and hot dip galvanized after fabrication, or heavy

gauge aluminum with welded joints. E. Foam rubber gasket on top of curb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF ROOF CURB PLACEMENT AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTINGA. Mount equipment, curb and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Correlate size(s) of roof opening(s) and roof curb(s) with actual equipment to be mounted thereon. Properly flash and seal curb opening.


Technical Specifications Section 230593 – Test and Balance – Final


230593-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 230593 - TEST AND BALANCE – FINAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. HVAC Contractor shall provide the services of an independent test and balance

agency to test, balance and certify the performance of the complete heating and air conditioning system, including supply and makeup air systems and all exhaust systems.

1.2 JOB REQUIREMENTSA. The Contractor shall provide to the approved test and balance agency a complete set

of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the test and balance agency.

1.3 AGENCY QUALIFICATIONSA. The test and balance agency shall be an approved member of AABC or NEBB that

specializes in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.

1.4 GUARANTEEA. The test and balance agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after

completion and acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect may request a re-check or re-setting of any outlet, supply fan, exhaust fan, or pump. The test and balance agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition to the A.A.M.C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall be forwarded with shop drawing data specified hereinbefore.

1.5 PERFORMA. Perform all testing and balancing, adjusting and data recording necessary to establish

and confirm capacity, quality and completed status of work.



230593-2VERSION: 180118

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Instruments used for test and balance shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to the testing and balancing of this project. Letter of certification listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration shall be furnished to Architect with test report.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NATIONAL STANDARDS Testing and balancing shall be performed in accordance with A.A.B.C. National Standards.

3.2 LOGSA. Shall clearly indicate the following:

1. All inlet and outlet areas. 2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. 3. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. 4. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations

(e.g., fluid pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.)

5. All fan speeds. 6. All motor ampere ranges. 7. Descriptions of each test method used. 8. Use Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms.

3.3 PERFORMANCEA. Adjust and calibrate all applicable items (e.g., controls, dampers, registers, diffusers,

balancing cocks, valves, thermometers, gauges, etc.). B. Set all distribution devices to properly distribute conditioned air. C. Check all safety devices for proper operation. D. Verify adequacy, acceptable quietness and proper continuous operation of at least 24

hours duration of all motors, compressors, fans, etc. E. Perform spot check tests or complete tests to fully reconfirm prior test results if

required by the Architect as dependent upon extent, completeness and accuracy of prior tests and logs. Do in Architect's presence if called for.

F. After air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air quantities and if temperature in any area (where such area does not have the particular zone temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees plus or minus of the zone area which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then notify the Architect in writing of such conditions and obtain Architect's approval to rebalance devices to obtain air quantities other than



230593-3VERSION: 180118

those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of calculated design air quantities. After obtaining Architect's written approval to rebalance, perform such necessary rebalancing.

G. When the mechanical work is in a state of readiness for test and balance work to proceed, the test and balance contractor shall proceed with his work. If, upon this proceeding, the test and balance contractor determines that there are other items of the work (control items, sheet metal items and/or other similar specialties and proper completion of which affects the ability of the test and balance contractor to properly perform his work) which have not been completed to an extent which will allow him to complete test and balance work, then he shall make a detailed written report of these items and shall send written notification to the Contractor of such incomplete work. The Contractor shall then send a copy of this report to the Architect. The test and balance work shall not proceed until these items are corrected; such correction shall be subject to approval of Architect.

H. All mechanical systems shall be balanced to optimum performance capabilities of the equipment and the design. This shall be done in accordance with the standards published by the Associated Air Balance Council unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 REPORTA. Upon completion of all testing and balancing and prior to requesting final inspection

and acceptance of the project, submit three (3) complete copies of the Test and Balance Report to the Architect/Engineer for approval. No final inspection will be conducted until the final Test and Balance Report has been accepted by the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken by methods recommended in the AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) National Standards. All reports submitted for review shall contain all of the information required in the reports shown in the related chapters of the AABC National Standards.


Technical Specifications Section 230700 – Thermal Insulation

Project No. 1501 Tarpon Springs Fire Rescue Station #71

230700-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 230700 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide plant, labor, and materials to insulate equipment, piping and miscellaneous

items in the piping and duct systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORKA. Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work." No insulation

adhesives, materials or finishes shall be applied until the item to be insulated has been completely installed, tested, and proved tight.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work."

1.4 NFPA 90AA. All materials and adhesives shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame

spread and smoke developed ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL INSULATION MATERIALSA. Insulation materials shall include products from, but not limited to, the following

approved manufacturers; 1. Armstrong 2. Calsilite 3. Childers 4. Compac 5. Fasson 6. Fosters 7. Great Lakes 8. Johns Manville 9. Knauf 10. Marathon 11. Owens Corning 12. Pittsburgh Corning 13. Premier 14. Proto 15. Rubetex 16. Truebro



230700-2VERSION: 180118

17. Venture 18. Vimasco 19. Zeston

2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALSA. Insulation, Fiber Glass Blanket Wrap (Type DI-1):

1. Knauf Fiber Glass Duct Insulation, two and three sixteenths (2-3/16") thick, three quarter (3/4#) pound per cubic foot density; (R=6.0).

B. Insulation, Ceramic Fiber Blanket (Type DI-4): 1. Great Lakes Fire Stop Blanket.

2.3 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALSA. Insulation, Fiber Glass Pipe (Type PC-1):

1. Knauf Fiber Glass Pipe Insulation, white all service jacket with self-sealing laps (asj/ssl).

B. Insulation, Flexible Unicellular (Type PC-3): 1. Armstrong AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation.

C. Insulation, Flexible Fiber Glass (Type PC-4): 1. Knauf Fiber Glass Wrap Insulation, one and one half (1 ½") thick, three quarter

(3/4#) pound per cubic foot density. D. Insulation, Molded Vinyl (Type PC-5):

1. Truebro Handi Lav-Guard Kits, snap tight fasteners.

2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATIONA. Insulation, Flexible Unicellular Sheets (Type EQ-3):

1. Armstrong Armaflex AP Sheet & Roll Insulation.

2.5 ADHESIVES, MASTICS AND SEALANTSA. Flexible Unicellular Insulation Adhesive (Type FU-1):

1. Armstrong # 520 Armaflex Adhesive. B. Vapor Barrier Mastic (Type VB-1):

1. Vimasco # 749 VAPOR-BLOK, water based.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS INSULATION ACCESSORIESA. Vapor Barrier Tape (Type T-1):

1. 3" wide dead soft aluminum foil pressure sensitive, acrylic based, Compac # 120. B. Mechanical Fasteners (Type F-1):

1. Mild steel cup head capacitor discharge or glued stick pins, lengths as required to prevent over compression of insulation (25% maximum allowed).

C. Staples (Type ST-1): 1. Outward clinching type, mild steel.



230700-3VERSION: 180118

D. Fitting Covers (Type FTG-1): 1. Proto 25/50 rated PVC fitting covers, factory supplied fiber glass inserts.



230700-4VERSION: 180118

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING A. Domestic Hot Water Piping:

1. Insulate with fiber glass pipe covering (PC-1), all jacket laps and butt strips sealed tight, and fitting covers (FTG-1). Domestic hot water & hot water return piping to be one inch (1") thick minimum.

B. Horizontal Rain Water Leaders Including The Vertical Portion Up To The Roof Sump: 1. Insulate with flexible fiber glass insulation (PC-4), one and one half inches (1 ½")

thick, secured with staples (ST-1), all seams sealed with tape (T-1). C. Interior Condensate Drain (Cold) Piping:

1. Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC-3) three quarters of one inch (3/4") thick secured with adhesive (FU-1).

D. Refrigerant Suction Piping: 1. Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC-3) three quarters of one inch (3/4")

thick secured with adhesive (FU-1). Exterior insulation to be finished with two coats of finish (FU-2).

E. Handicapped Lavatories: 1. Insulate water supplies and waste piping with molded vinyl covers (PC-5).

3.2 DUCTWORK A. General:

1. Internal insulation. See section entitled "Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork." This section describes all of the ductwork used on this project and defines whether the ductwork should be insulated internally as work of the section "Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork" or externally insulted as work of the section "Thermal Insulation." Internally lined ductwork does not require any additional external insulation.

B. Low Pressure Ductwork, Interior Concealed: 1. All supply (including ceiling outlets), return and outside air that is not internally

insulated shall be externally insulated with fiber glass blanket (DI-1). Overlap internal insulation a minimum six inches (6") beyond any such internal insulation and vapor seal raw edges as specified herein for joints. The insulation is to be wrapped around the ductwork and have its laps secured with staples (ST-1). Where duct width exceeds eighteen inches (18"), the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottoms of the ductwork using mechanical fasteners (F-1) spaced eighteen inches (18") on centers. Insulation shall be applied with all edges tightly butted and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed tight using tape (T-1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Rectangular Medium and Low Pressure Ductwork, Interior Exposed: 1. All supply, return and outside air that is not internally insulated shall be externally

insulated with fiber glass board (DI-2). The insulation shall be secured to the



230700-5VERSION: 180118

ductwork using mechanical fasteners (F-1) spaced eighteen inches (18") on centers. Insulation shall be applied with all edges tightly butted and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed tight using tape (T-1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When duct is round or flat oval, insulate with (DI-1) as noted above.

D. Smoke Damper External Surfaces: 1. Externally Insulated Duct: Extend duct insulation up face of fire damper onto wall.

Seal to wall with tape (T-1) coated with vapor barrier mastic (VB-1). E. Flexible Duct Connections:

1. Insulate with flexible unicellular sheet insulation (EQ-3), one inch (1") thick, adhered with adhesive (FU-1).

F. Kitchen Grease Exhaust Ductwork: 1. Insulate with ceramic fiber blanket (DI-4), installed in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions to obtain a 2 hour internal fire rating.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION A. Insulation Fit:

1. Where insulation is applied to piping or equipment, it shall be installed with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall not be filled with joint sealant but shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing the insulation.

B. Items Not Requiring Insulation: 1. In general, the following items do not require insulation: Domestic cold water

piping; Vertical storm water piping; and exposed piping located under sinks except for ADA compliance.


Technical Specifications Section 232115 – Copper Condensate Drain


232115-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 232115 - COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide condensate drain piping from cooling coil drain pans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPEA. Type M, DWV copper conforming to ASTM Spec. B88.

2.2 FITTINGSA. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22.

2.3 SOLDERA. Composition Sb5 (95/5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERALA. Piping shall be sloped uniformly toward drain, and provided with trap seal having a

depth, in inches, equivalent to the total static pressure of the respective fan system. Traps shall be assembled using elbows and tees with threaded brass plugs to permit cleaning of trap and drain line. Piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall not be smaller than full size of the equipment drain connection or three-quarters inch (3/4"), whichever is larger.

3.2 ROUTINGA. Route pipe discharge to nearest drain or as otherwise indicated on drawings.

3.3 INSULATIONA. Insulate as specified in Section 230700 entitled "Thermal Insulation."


Technical Specifications Section 233113 – Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork


233113-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 233113 - LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited

to, the following: Outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price.

B. This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items: 1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork. 2. Low pressure flexible ducts. 3. Duct system accessories.

a. Flexible duct connections. b. Low pressure metal turning vanes. c. Manual volume dampers. d. Low pressure access doors.

1.2 RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Coordinate shop drawings ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the

duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: Air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." Include

complete data on: All prefabricated duct and fittings; access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; and all other items.

1.4 AIR HANDLING UNIT AND DUCTWORK CONFIGURATION SHOP DRAWINGS A. Air handling unit manufacturer and model or series, which has been used as the design

basis for this project, is indicated. If Contractor elects to submit for approval any unit which is made by any other manufacturer which is listed as acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for each air handling unit for which he proposes to use a unit which is different than the design basis. Such shop drawings shall meet the following requirements: 1. Be drawn at the same scale as the unit is shown on the Drawings. Contractor

may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = 1'-0", 1/2" = 1'-0" may be used).



233113-2VERSION: 180118

2. Clearly show all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings. Extent of shop drawings shall show all ductwork to and from each unit beginning with and terminating at those points where ductwork is intended to remain unchanged as shown on Drawings.

3. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, housekeeping pads, piping, equipment, electrical work or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes.

4. Proposed changes shall be at no additional change in contract price. 5. Where Drawings show units in plan only, shop drawings shall show proposed

units in plan and also in elevation. 6. Shop drawings shall also show exact locations of related work (such as bar

joists, columns, beams, sound attenuators, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration.

7. Each section of each air handling unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.).

B. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air handling unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air handling units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered.

C. These shop drawings shall be prepared as work of this section in coordination with the work of section describing the air conditioning unit(s).

1.5 OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.B. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimensions,

which do not include insulation thickness.

1.6 DEFINITIONS A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National

Association, Inc." B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities

less than 2000 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches w.g. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork." SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified; construct duct in accord therewith.

C. Pressure and Velocity Classifications: Pressure and velocity classifications, (hereinafter called "P/VC") for ducts are defined as follows:



233113-3VERSION: 180118

Positive SMACNA Static or SMACNA

P/VC Pressure Pressure Negative Seal Velocity Designation Class Rating Pressure Class (fpm)

2 Low 2" + or - B 2500 dn 1 Low 1" + or - C 2500 dn

1/2 Low 1/2" + or - D 2000 dn

Note: All seams, joints, fastener penetrations and connections to be sealed with hard cast.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Systems operating at two inches of water static pressure or less, shall, unless

specifically specified otherwise, conform to the requirements listed below.B. Material: Prime quality forty-eight inch wide resquare tight coat galvanized steel

conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-526. C. Reinforcing, Cross Breaking, Seams, Joints: Be in accordance with latest SMACNA

construction standard for low-pressure sheet metal duct.

2.2 GLASS FIBER LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK: None allowed on this project.

2.3 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK A. Conduit: Shall be "zinc grip" steel of spiral lock-seam construction. Duct shall be

made using galvanized steel as per ASTM A-527 G-90. Gauge shall be as follows:

Round Duct:

Fitting Size Duct Gauge Gauge

Up through 8"diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 9" through 14" diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 15" through 26" diameter 24 gauge 22 gauge 27" through 36" diameter 22 gauge 20 gauge 37" through 50" diameter 20 gauge 20 gauge 51" through 60" diameter 18 gauge 18 gauge 61" through 84" diameter 16 gauge 16 gauge

2.4 LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Flexible duct shall consist of spiral wound Helix Coil with Trilaminate Inner Fabric.

Core shall be covered with factory applied one inch, one pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation of 0.23 thermal conductance sheathed in a seamless exterior



233113-4VERSION: 180118

Class 1 vapor barrier jacket reinforced aluminum foil metalized jacket. Connections shall be made using quadrant dampered twist-in type fittings with extractor scoops and volume damper. Duct shall be NFPA 90A, Class 1 (UL 181), flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 50. Provide in factory finished lengths not in excess of 6'-0' to make suitable connections with minimum pressure drop. Acceptable: Flexmaster, Genflex, Clevaflex or equal with "SPIN-IN" fitting with integral damper and air scoop at connection to main duct branch.

2.5 DUCT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. General:

1. Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply, return, and exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated.

2. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Flexible Duct Connections:

1. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect their ductwork. 2. At least 4 inches long. 3. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus,

or heavy gauge steel sleeves). 4. For use in low-pressure duct systems. 5. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge."

C. Low Pressure Metal Turning Vanes: Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be complete flutterproof; properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and mitered tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber-Colman, "Airturns", Tuttle & Bailey "Ducturns", or Dura-Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes.

D. Manual Volume Dampers: (Other than those specified as being integral with each register, diffuser and other air outlet or inlet): 1. Provide where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including

ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s).

2. Opposed blade type. 3. 8" Maximum blade width. 4. Made of galvanized steel, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust

resistant finish; flutterproof. 5. Provided so that all damper adjustments can be made from outside the

completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier.

6. Fully adjustable and with locking device. 7. Manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, or other approved manufacturer.



233113-5VERSION: 180118

8. Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse affects on the distribution characteristics (throw, drop, patter, etc.) of the air distribution device.

9. Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types: a. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay-in" or

"accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 896. b. Dampers in ducts concealed above plaster ceilings or behind dry wall

construction: Young Regulator Company Model 896. E. Low Pressure Duct Access Doors:

1. Provided for: Each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary.

2. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in, which installed whichever is greater).

3. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size, but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operating):

Maximum Duct Dimensions Access Door Size 11" or less 10" X 12" 12" through 16" 12" X 16" 17" and over 16" X 24"

4. Doors shall be provided with hand operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlock "Access Doors". Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using Ventlock #360 sealant.

F. Test Openings: Furnish and install gasketed applied test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling units and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlock #699-2.



233113-6VERSION: 180118

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL A. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions

of applicable Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association construction standards.

B. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities.

C. Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect's final acceptance of project.

D. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interference’s with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions, which are minor at no additional cost.

E. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop.

F. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5, unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes.

G. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.).

H. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained.

I. If necessary, where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free-clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged.

J. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical rectangular duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length.

K. Install all flexible round duct without kinks or similar obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Cut and remove excess lengths as necessary.

L. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements.

3.2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. The following duct system installation requirements shall be done to maximize

flexibility of relocation of lighting systems, duct systems and fire sprinkler systems in the event of partition relocation and in order to facilitate ease of servicing components of the systems contained within the ceiling plenum. These requirements are:



233113-7VERSION: 180118

1. Install all horizontal rigid ductwork against the underside of the steel structure. Coordinate ductwork reinforcing such that standing seams angles and similar space-consuming reinforcement does not occur on the top surface of ducts where such ducts pass below steel beams.

2. Make minor field adjustments as necessary to the locations of terminal units as shown on the drawings such that: a. Each terminal unit is essentially in the center of a ceiling module and is not

obstructed from access from below by the main runners or cross tees of the ceiling system.

b. Each terminal unit is not installed over a light fixture or such that a light fixture does not obstruct service access to the unit.

c. Each terminal unit is supported at an elevation such that the bottom of the terminal unit is at least 10-inches above the bottom of the ceiling. To accomplish this, each terminal unit may be recessed upward into the main structural bay cavity and provided at its outlet with a downwardly-sloped supply air duct which contains two angular offsets (each of which is not greater than 15 angular degrees) to allow the supply duct to drop to the same horizontal plane as the remainder of the low pressure ductwork.

d. No terminal unit is located so that access to it is obstructed by fire sprinkler system piping.

e. No rigid duct is located to obstruct access to an electrical lighting system junction box.

3.3 FIELD MEASUREMENT A. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for

Mechanical Work."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standards. Where

sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application.

B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion.

C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps to drop through connections from metal or concrete deck. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work".

3.5 INSULATED DUCT A. Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper

operating quadrants, splitter adjustment clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct.



233113-8VERSION: 180118

3.6 PARTITION AND FLOOR OPENINGS A. All openings in floor slabs or partitions through which ducts pass shall be filled tightly

with mineral or glass wool batting.

3.7 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Install smoke dampers where indicated on drawings. Install adjustable linkage stops

on linkage so that the open position of damper may be adjusted and set. B. Where smoke dampers and smoke detectors are located together, install smoke

damper on downstream side of smoke detector. C. Refer to Section 2303315.

3.8 CHANGE IN SHAPE OR DIMENSION A. Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall

apply:1. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area

over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches.

2. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches if preferable, space permitting.

3. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow in the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect.

4. At contractor's option, connection from low pressure rectangular ductwork to air distribution devices via flexible ductwork may be made from bottom of rectangular ductwork in lieu of side connection providing contractor makes appropriate size transitions (if necessary) to maintain same free clear internal area at connection and also allows dimensional clearance for spin-in fitting with integral damper.

5. At contractor's option, he may eliminate a low pressure duct transition and hold the upstream duct size to the next downstream transition and make the necessary size transition at that point.

3.9 CHANGES IN DIRECTION A. Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following

shall apply: 1. Supply ducts turns of ninety degrees in low-pressure duct shall be made with

mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow.

2. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made mitered elbows, as specified herein before, for supply ducts, unless radius



233113-9VERSION: 180118

3. elbows are indicated, in which case they shall be vaned and constructed with a throat radius three-quarters the duct width and a full radius heel.

4. Tees in low-pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified herein before for elbows.

5. Branch take-offs in low-pressure duct shall be made with extractors, splitter dampers, or 45 take-off with volume dampers, as indicated on drawings.

3.10 OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. If ductwork materials are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor

shall remove such ductwork materials and replace them with the specified materials. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Properly install all control related devices, which are part of the duct system. See Section(s) describing HVAC control systems.


Technical Specifications Section 233315 – Smoke Dampers


233315-1VERSION: 150118

SECTION 233315 - SMOKE DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDEDA. Smoke dampers. B. Access doors.

1.2 RELATED WORKA. Section 230500 “Common Requirements for Mechanical Work” and Section 233113

“Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork.”

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Submit drawings, specifications and schedules in accordance with Section 230500.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERSA. National Controlled Air. B. Ruskin. C. Greenheck.

2.2 CONSTRUCTIONA. Smoke damper: steel frame with galvanized roll formed interlocking blades 1-1/2 hour

rating, with sleeve. The actuator shall permit operation by standard electric or pneumatic damper operators. Furnish with electric motor factory-mounted, 120-volt. The motor will keep the damper open with voltage applied to the motor. The damper shall close upon tripping by the smoke detector and return the damper to open position when the detection system has been cleared.

B. Fire/Seal Access Doors: Frame, 24-gauge galvanized steel with 5/8" notched knock over edges for sheet metal or flanged frame for fiberglass duct. Door, insulated, one-inch thick double cam access, galvanized steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATIONS A. Provide smoke dampers at all location shown on plans, and if not shown on plans,

where ducts and outlets pass through or penetrate smoke-rated components.

Technical Specifications Section 233315 – Smoke Dampers


233315-2VERSION: 150118

3.2 SIZE A. Provide largest size access doors up to 16 inches by 24 inches that can be installed in

the ductwork without obstruction. Provide an access door for each damper.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


Technical Specifications Section 233423 – Power Roof Ventilators


233423-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 233423 - POWER ROOF VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all power roof ventilators of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics

indicated on the drawings or as otherwise indicated.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

1.3 MANUFACTURERA. Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp.; Loren Cook Company; or approved equal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FAN HOOD, HOUSING AND BASEA. Weatherproof and constructed of heavy gauge steel. Motor and drive shall be

supported by a structural frame independent of hood, housing and curb base. 1. Upblast roof exhaust ventilators shall be of the belt driven axial type. The fan

shall have as standard a stamped steel propeller with blades securely riveted to a heavy gauge steel spider. All propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced for vibration free operation.

2. Exhaust ventilators shall have a heavy gauge painted steel base, windband and power assembly.

3. Exhaust ventilators shall be equipped with a set of steel butterfly dampers that shall be forced open by the exhaust air and closed by means of gravity. The butterfly dampers shall allow unrestricted airflow when the fan is running, yet provide a positive weather seal when the fan is not in operation. Bird screens are not required.

4. Steel and sheet metal parts shall be cleaned, conditioned and painted with enamel primer finish prior to final assembly. A final coat of gray enamel shall be applied to all exterior surfaces after assembly.

5. Upblast exhaust fans shall be provided with prefabricated roof curb and steel basket guard.

6. Basket guard shall be 16-gauge minimum steel expanded metal wire mesh. 7. Roof curb shall be 12” minimum in height and of 18 gauge galvanized steel

construction with continuous welding; provide with pressure treated nailer. Coordinate roof curb with roof construction prior to bid and/or purchase.

Technical Specifications Section 233423 – Power Roof Ventilators


233423-2VERSION: 180118

2.2 FAN WHEELA. Backward curved, non-overloading, steel, airfoil blade type.

2.3 DRIVE ASSEMBLYA. Direct or belt drive type as indicated. Conform with Section entitled "Common

Requirements for Mechanical Work:”

1. Shafts shall be steel and accurately turned and polished. Clowse tolerance shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearings.

2. Bearings shall be grease lubricated ball bearing pillow block type. All motor drives shall be variable pitch through 5 horsepower. Five horsepower two-speed motor drives shall be fixed. Contact factory for variable pitch 5 horsepower two-speed motor drives. Oil resistant non-static belts shall be provided.

2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHA. Factory mounted disconnect switches wired to the motor.

2.5 STARTERA. Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work."

1. The electrical contractor is to provide and install the motor starter and disconnect switch for these ventilators.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOF CURB PLACEMENT AND FAN MOUNTINGA. Fan location shall be essentially as shown on the drawings; however, actual placement

of roof curb shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. Mount fan and backdraft damper in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All upblast exhaust roof ventilators shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for air and sound performance.


Technical Specification Section 237213 – Energy Recovery Ventilators


237213-1VERSION: 180118

SECTION 237213 - ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPEA. Energy Recovery Ventilator shall be as manufactured by "Greenheck" or approved

equal, provided all specifications are met. Greenheck Model ERV equipment is used as the basis of design. Units shall be listed per ANSI/UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment. Energy transfer ratings of the energy recovery wheel shall be ARI Certified. Ventilators shall bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seals for Air Performance. Performance shall be as scheduled on plans. Outdoor air shall not mix with exhaust air in a common plenum. Exhaust discharge and outside air intake shall not be closer than 10 feet from each other.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT CASING AND FRAMES A. Unit shall be of internal frame type construction of galvanized steel. Frame and panels

shall be G90 galvanized steel. Where top panels are joined there shall be a standing seam to insure positive weather protection. All metal-to-metal seams shall be sealed, requiring no caulking at job site.

2.2 INSULATION A. Unit casing to be insulated with 1 inch fiberglass with Foil-Scrim-Kraft facing. Insulation

shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A and tested to meet UL 181 erosion requirements. Insulation shall be secured to unit with waterproof adhesive and permanent mechanical fasteners.

2.3 ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL A. Wheel shall be of the enthalpy type for both sensible and latent heat recovery and be

designed to insure laminar flow. Energy transfer ratings must be ARI Certified to Standard 1060 and bear the ARI certification symbol for ARI Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Program based on ARI 1060. Ratings "in accordance with 1060" without certification are not acceptable. Desiccant shall be silica gel for maximum latent energy transfer. Wheel shall be constructed of lightweight polymer media to minimize shaft and bearing loads. Polymer media shall be mounted in a stainless steel rotor for corrosion resistance.

B. Wheel design shall consist of removable segments (for wheels greater than 26 inches in diameter) for ease of service and/or cleaning. Silica gel desiccant shall be permanently bonded to wheel media to retain latent heat recovery after cleaning. Wheels with sprayed on desiccant coatings are not acceptable. Wheels with desiccant applied after wheel formation are not acceptable. Energy recovery device shall transfer moisture entirely in the vapor phase.



237213-2VERSION: 180118

C. Energy recovery drive belt material shall be high strength urethane and shall be factory installed in a pre-stretched state, eliminating the need for field belt tension adjustment. Link style belts are not acceptable.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. All components shall be easily accessible through removable doors for exhaust,

supply, filter, and damper compartments. Energy recovery wheels (smaller than 54 inches) shall be mounted in a slide-out track for ease of inspection, removal, and cleaning.

2.5 FAN SECTIONS A. Centrifugal fans to be double width, double inlet, single fan forward curved type. All

blower wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Ground and polished steel fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. Separate motors for exhaust and supply blowers shall be provided. Adjustable sheaves on belt-driven fans with motors less than 10 hp shall allow independent balancing of exhaust and supply airflows. Optional speed controllers on direct-drive fans shall allow independent balancing of exhaust and supply airflows. Fan and motor assemblies are mounted to unit base with neoprene isolators as standard. Fans shall be located in draw-through position in reference to the energy recovery wheel.

2.6 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Motors shall be energy efficient, complying with EPACT standards, for single speed

ODP and TE enclosures. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy-duty type, matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure. Belt-drive motors shall be factory mounted to an adjustable motor plate having two heavy-duty adjusting bolts for alignment and belt tension. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast type, keyed and securely attached to the fan wheel and motor shafts; 10 horsepower and less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Energy wheel motors and direct-drive motors shall have integral overload protection.

2.7 FILTERS A. Supply and exhaust air filters shall be 2-inch thick pleated fiberglass, 30% efficient and

tested to meet UL Class 2. Filter racks shall be die-formed galvanized steel.

2.8 ELECTRICAL A. All internal electrical components shall be factory wired for single point power

connection. All electrical components shall be UL Listed, Approved or Classified where applicable and wired in compliance with the National Electrical Code.

B. For Model ERV-251, integral door interlocking disconnect switch and terminal strip shall be supplied as standard components in the control center. Optional features include motor contactors, 24 VAC control circuit, and fusing.



237213-3VERSION: 180118

2.9 WARRANTY A. The energy recovery ventilator shall be warranted to be free from defects in material

and workmanship for a period of one year from the purchase date. The energy recovery wheel shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from the purchase date. Motors shall be warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year from the purchase date.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOF PLACEMENT A. Fan location shall be essentially as shown on the drawings; however, actual placement

of roof curb shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. Mount fan and backdraft damper in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


Technical Specifications Section 238129 – Variable Refrigerant Flow – Heat

Pump Project No. 1622 Plant City Fire Station #03

238129-1 VERSION: 180118

SECTION 238129 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW - HEAT PUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 EQUIPMENT A. The HVAC Equipment Base Bid is Daikin. Alternate Bidders must be pre-approved

based upon the full intent of this project. All bidders shall furnish the minimum systemstandards.

B. Base and Alternate Bid Equipment Suppliers shall furnish to the Mechanical Contractora complete engineering equipment manual in printed or electronic form (PDF). TheManual shall cover in detail all requirements for electrical, equipment installation,refrigerant piping, equipment capacities and controls installation.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install all control devices to interface theHVAC equipment shown on the plans and specifications.

D. The Mechanical Contractor must include in their bid all costs, which may be required toadjust related systems for adaptation to the HVAC equipment being supplied (i.e.electrical feeds, voltage, structural supports, space requirements, controls, etc.).

E. Equipment supplier shall provide integral system control package as specified.F. Equipment supplier to provide one-year full warranty on parts and an additional five-

year warranty on compressor.G. Equipment supplier shall coordinate equipment delivery schedule with Mechanical

Contractor.H. The Mechanical Contractor’s installation price shall be based on his selected

equipment supplier’s system installation requirements. The Mechanical Contractor bidswith complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements.

1.2 HVAC EQUIPMENT ALTERNATE (GENERAL INFORMATION)

A. The Alternate Equipment Supplier shall provide to the Bidding Mechanical Contractor acomplete Equipment Data Package. This package shall include, but is not limited to,equipment capacities, power requirements, indoor units CFM/static pressures,EER/COP, installation requirements, and physical dimensions.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall request and receive Equipment Data Package ten(10) days prior to bid date.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall list equipment supplier and submit required DataPackage with his Bid.

D. Equipment supplier shall submit, as part of the Equipment Data Package, Outdoor UnitData Sheets. Data Sheets to include the following:1. Capacities: Cooling

a. Cooling (Btu/h)b. System kW



238129-2 VERSION: 180118

c. EER - (Btu/kW)2. Capacities: Heating

a. Heating (Btu/h)3. Operating Temperature Range:

a. Coolingb. Heating

4. Power Supplya. Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA)b. Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA)c. Maximum Starting Current (MSC)d. Total Over current Amps (TOCA)e. Outdoor Fan Motor

5. Refrigeranta. Refrigerant Type/Chargeb. Control

6. Unit Data:a. Max. Number of Indoor Unitsb. Sound Pressure Level at 3ft. (dBA)c. Weight (lbs)d. Dimensions

The Alternate Equipment Supplier shall include a separate sheet attached to the Outdoor Unit Data Sheet which shows method of EER/COP Calculations. EER/COP shall be calculated using NOMINAL CAPACITY of the Outdoor Unit.

E. The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee the performance of their system and allpublished data submitted. Performance shall be based on the design criteria below.1. Room Temperature 71.6°FWB ± 0.5°F (range between 60.8°F to 89.6°F)2. Ambient Temperature (Summer) 95°F (max109.4°F to 23°F in Cooling mode)3. Ambient Temperature (Winter) 23°F (max64F db/60F wb to OF db/-5F wb

Heating mode)F. The Alternate Equipment Supplier shall submit with bid, Indoors Unit Data Sheets.

Data Sheets to include the following:1. Capacities

a. Cooling (Btu/h)b. Heating (Btu/h)c. Air Flow (CFM)

2. External Static Pressure (ESP)3. Electrical Data (MCA, MFA, FLA)4. Weight (lbs)5. Dimensions



238129-3 VERSION: 180118

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRV) AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATION – THREE PIPE HEAT RECOVERY

A. Performance Objectives1. The VRV System is installed to maintain environmental conditions within the

areas allocated to be Air Conditioned to the design parameters listed below:a. Room Temperature 71.6°FWB ± 0.5°F (range between 60.8°F to 89.6°F)b. Ambient Temperature (Summer) 95°F (max109.4°F to 23°F in cooling

mode)c. Ambient Temperature (Winter) 23°F (max64 deg. F db / 60F wb to O

deg.F db/-5 deg. F wb in Hearing mode)d. Room Noise Level NR38e. External Noise Level 50dBA at 10m (REYQ96M 60 dBA at 3ftm)

B. Outdoor Units1. 2-Pipe System - Variable Capacity, Heat Pump, Variable Refrigerant Volume

Series (Heat/Cool Model).2. System Description

a. The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a DaikinVariable Refrigerant Volume Series (heat/cool model) split system. Thesystem shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control, and DaikinVRV .

b. The system shall be direct expansion (DX), air-cooled heat pump air-conditioning system, variable speed driven compressor multi zone splitsystem, using R410A refrigerant. The outdoor unit may connect up to 10tons or 10 indoor evaporator units each capable of operating separatelywith individual temperature control.

c. The Daikin outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor unit models,which shall range in capacity from 7,000 Btu/h to 48,000 Btu/h inaccordance with Daikin’s engineering data book detailing each availableindoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor utilizingDaikin’s REFNET specified piping joints and headers.

3. Quality Assurancea. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL

label.b. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code NEC.c. The system will bear the Energy Star label.d. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which

are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). Thesystem shall be factory tested for safety and function.

e. The outdoor unit will be factory charged with R410A.4. Delivery, Storage, and Handling



238129-4 VERSION: 180118

a. Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer’srecommendations.

5. Warrantya. The units shall have a manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year

from date of installation. The units shall have a limited labor warranty for aperiod of one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall havea warranty of six (6) years from date of installation.

b. During the stated period, should any part fail due to defects in material andworkmanship, it shall be repaired or replaced at the discretion of Daikin USCorporation according to Daikin’s Terms and Conditions.

6. Installation Requirementsa. The system must be installed by a Daikin factory trained contractor/dealer.

7. Ratingsa. The Daikin Variable Refrigerant Volume System shall perform in

accordance with the ratings shown in the tables reflected in the DaikinEngineering Data book, and consistent with the equipment schedulesdeveloped specifically for this project as are reflected on the plans.

b. The operating range in cooling will be 23°F DB ~ 110°F DB. The operatingrange in heating will be 0°F DB ~ 60°F DB.

8. Refrigerant Pipinga. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 490 equivalent feet,

a total combined length of 1000 feet of piping between the condensing andfan coil units with 165 feet maximum vertical difference, without any oiltraps or additional equipment. In case where the outdoor unit is locatedbelow the indoor unit, the vertical difference is a maximum of 90 feet.

9. Outdoor Unita. General: The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with VRV series

components.1) The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all

necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuitof the condensing unit shall consist of a Daikin scroll compressor,motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valve, solenoidvalves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut offvalves, oil separators, service ports, liquid receivers andaccumulators.

2) Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated betweenthe outdoor and indoor units.

3) The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit accessfrom left, right, rear or bottom.

4) The connection ratio of indoor units to outdoor unit will be 50% to125%.

5) The sound pressure dB(A) shall be a value of 58 decibels at 3 feet.The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at further reducednoise during night time.

6) The system will automatically restart operation after a power failureand will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the needfor re-programming.



238129-5 VERSION: 180118

7) The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow forside-by-side installation with minimum spacing. It should possible forno more than 3 separate condensing units to be connected to onepiping system.

8) The following safety devices shall be part of the condensing unit;high pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusibleplug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overloadprotector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, overcurrent protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. Toensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to thevarious fan coil units, the circuit shall come with a sub-coolingfeature. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 1 hour afterstart of operation and then every 6 hours of operation.

9) In the case of a system comprising of plural condensing units, it isrequired that the condenser unit with the lowest inverter compressorrunning time be the first to operate at each start up. This duty cyclingfeature shall be factory supplied.

10) The outdoor unit shall be capable of operation at 0°F Dry bulbambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.

b. Unit Cabinet1) The outdoor unit shall be completely weather proof and corrosion

resistant. The unit shall be constructed from rust-proofed mild steelpanels coated with a baked enamel finish.

c. Fan1) The condensing unit shall consist of two propeller type, direct-drive

fan 750 W motors that have multiple speed operation of the DCinverter type.

2) The condensing unit fan motor shall have multiple speed operation ofthe DC inverter type, and be of high external static pressure and shallbe factory set as standard at 0.12 in. WG with available by fieldsetting switch to a maximum 0.25 in. WG pressure.

3) The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration with an air flow of7,400 cfm.

4) The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanentlylubricated bearings and be mounted.

5) The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contactwith moving parts.

d. Condenser Coil1) The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes

expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.2) The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchanger, rifled

bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.3) The coils shall be complete with corrosion treatment of an acrylic

resin type. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0microns.

e. Compressor1) The Daikin scroll compressor shall be variable speed (PAM inverter)

controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the



238129-6 VERSION: 180118

variations in total cooling load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit.

2) The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be ofhighly efficient reluctance DC, hermetically sealed scroll type with amax speed of 6,480 rpm.

3) Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction toyield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of thenormal ferrite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, theneodynium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum positionfor a low torque start.

4) The capacity control range shall be 14% to 100%. Each non-invertercompressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.

5) Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, highpressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.

6) Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with anoil balancing circuit.

7) The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission ofvibration.

f. Electrical1) The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 208/230 volts, 3 phase,

60 hertz with a voltage range from 187 volts to 253 volts.2) The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be

16VDC non-shielded 2 conductor cable.3) The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system,

making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unitwith one 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation.

4) The control wiring lengths are:

Outdoor to Indoor Unit

Outdoor to Central Controller

Outdoor Unit to Remote Control

Control Wiring Length 6,665 3,330 1,665

Wire Type 2 wire, non-polarity, non-shielded

10. Microprocessor Controla. Automatic system-oriented setting controls, for example identification of

connected indoor units. Very fast “wiring check” for field cabling (approx.10-20 mins). Modification of programmed factory settings for evaporation,condensation and defrost temperature and also sequence start-up, noisereduction for reduced nighttime operation. Selection of master or slavefunctions when outdoor units are connected in groups. Interface for serviceand diagnosis computers, allowing full system visualization and datalogging in 1.44-megabyte data format.

b. CE compliance certificates comprising LVD73/23/EEC, EMV89/336/EECand MSD89/392/EEC supplied with the unit.



238129-7 VERSION: 180118

c. Operating range in cooling mode from 23F to 109F, heating mode from 5 Fto 59 F.

d. VRV Installation guidelines for test site units working on R410A.C. Outdoor Units - Mini VRV

1. The system shall be air-cooled, split type multi system air conditioners asmanufactured by DAIKIN Industries Limited in Japan. The equipment shallconsist of singular condensing units connecting to multiple fan coil units, eachhaving capability to condition independently for the requirements of the room.

2. The condensing unit shall be able to connect multiple different type and capacityfan coil units to be controlled individually. The Condensing Unit shall be equippedwith Inverter Controller, allowing the system to operate at a minimum connectedcooling load of 2.2kW The COP of the system at 50% partial load shall be 3.5 orbetter.

3. Compressora. The compressor shall be of the high-efficiency Hermetically Sealed

Reluctance DC (Digital Commutator brushless motor) Scroll typeemploying neodymium magnets with gas fed directly to the compressionprocess. The motor is cooled by pressurized gas and has no accumulator.

b. The outdoor unit shall have one inverter driven compressor electronicallycontrolled and capable of changing the speed linearly to follow thevariations in cooling or heating load. In the cases of two or morecompressors there shall be duty balancing. This shall be by the use ofHIDECS circuit (Hi Inverter Drive and Electronics Control System) togetherwith independent multi-variable PI (Proportional Integral) control for theprecise monitoring of status of the system.

c. Capacity control of the outdoor unit shall be inverter controlled with a min of20 steps, then with by-pass for minimum capacity control of 8%. Thefrequency of inverter control shall be determined electronically by sensingambient temperatures, operational pressures and monitoring the exactrequirement of all of the connected indoor units.

4. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 330 ft. between thecondensing and fan coil units with 165ft. level difference, without any oil traps oradditional equipment. In case where the outdoor unit is located under the indoorunit, the level difference is a maximum of 133ft.

5. Both the fan coil units and condensing unit shall be factory assembled and testedat the factory. Additionally, the condensing unit will be charged with refrigerant atthe factory.

D. Indoor Units1. The basic components of the indoor units are a fan, a heat exchanger and an

electronic proportional expansion valve which shall be controlled viacomputerized PID control which constantly, every 20 seconds measures andassesses the status of the return air temperature, refrigerant inlet and outlettemperature.

2. The indoor units shall be selected from the following types of Daikin units usingR410A:a. Slim Concealed Mounted Built-Type FXDQ-M



238129-8 VERSION: 180118

b. Wall Mounted Type FXAQ-M3. See plans for details of equipment selected.4. During the cooling operation the electronic expansion valve shall control the

degree of refrigerant superheat at the evaporator outlet. During the heatingoperation it shall control the degree of refrigerant sub cooling at the condenseroutlet.

5. The indoor unit printed circuit board shall be complete with power input fusing,address switches for a variety of operation controls, emergency operation switchand fault/operation indication LED's. Fan motors shall be thermally protected.

6. The indoor unit casing of ceiling concealed and cassette types, shall be fullyinsulated and sealed to prevent condensation. The insulation shall conform tolocal regulations.

E. Local System Controls1. The controls system shall include all necessary Daikin remote controllers and

interface PCB's.2. One simplified remote controller (BRC2A71) shall be provided per room or fan

coil as specified and be capable of controlling an individual fan coil or group offan coils, up to 16 indoor units. Functions available to the students / teachers canbe blocked.

3. The controller shall have a liquid crystal display and provide the followingfacilities:a. Temperature settingb. Fan speed settingc. Mode setting fan/coolingd. On/Off controle. Diagnostics Feedback ( 55 alarm codes)

4. Remote air sensors KRCS01-1 shall be provided for local room sensing wherefresh air is introduced to the fan coil unit. To be positioned within the room orclose to the return air grill in the ceiling.

F. Factory Start Up1. The Equipment Supplies representative shall carry out/or witness the

commissioning of the VRV system and final inspection and record data as listedbelow:a. Record Pressure Test (Holding Pressure)b. Confirmation of Record Drawingsc. Record Pipe Lengthsd. Record Pipe Diameterse. Additional and Total refrigerate Volumesf. Addressing of Fan Coilsg. Cooling Start Up Checkh. Heating Start Up Checki. Complete and issue Documents and Certificates to Consultant/Client.

2. Should it deemed necessary full access should be afforded to the site during theinstallation of the VRV System to allow the Equipment Supplier’srepresentative/engineer to verify that the installation methods being used complyand are fully in accordance with the VRV System Installation Instructions,requirement in order that the equipment warranties will not be invalidated.



238129-9 VERSION: 180118

2.2 COPPER PIPING FOR R410A A. General

1. The refrigerant pipe shall be of de-oxidized phosphorous seamless copper pipeconforming to JIS H300-C1220T. Both suction gas and liquid lines should besufficiently insulated to prevent formation of condensation in all circumstances.These pipes will be brazed with hard `Silver ` solder. Copper Piping for R410ASoldering work should avoid any upward direction in order to avoid leakage. Therecommendable oil for pipe processing must be a synthetic oil (ether oil, ester oil,alkyl benzene oil or a mixture of these).

2. Tools used for R410A like gauges, gas leak detector, vacuum pump should bededicated for R410A and cannot be used for R22 to avoid mineral oilcontamination.

3. Piping size selection and only R410A refnets will be used and selected accordingto DAIKIN specifications.The 3 rules of refrigerant piping: Dry, Clean and Airtight must be strictly observedduring the piping work. At all times pipes should be covered or even pinched toavoid moisture.

4. Flushing both gas and liquid pipes with Nitrogen will be used as a standardworking practice.

B. Thermal Insulation1. The thermal insulation materials used must be well able to withstand the heat

from the pipes and the local fire protection codes. The insulation of jointed pipessuch as soldered, flared or flanged sections should only be carried out after thesuccessful completion of the airtight test.

2. Attention should be paid to the unit model and the operating conditions.Liquid and suction pipe runs have to be insulated. Thickness of insulationmaterial for pipe sections up to 1” insulation thickness should be minimum ½”, forlarger pipe sections >1” the thickness should be increased to 5/8” or larger.

3. When the VRV system will operate at external temperatures below 50F the liquidpipe runs have to be insulated.

C. Flare Connection1. A pipe cutter will be used to cut the pipe, burrs should be removed carefully.

Flare sizes, as determined in SI 622. Appropriate amount of torque will be used to tighten the flare nut, ref SI62. Two

Spanners should be used to grip the pipe.D. Flange connection on Outdoor unit

1. The flange must be clean and undamaged; the flange surface should be coatedwith non-mineral refrigeration oil before the bolts are tightened.

E. Refnets1. The selected refnet joints shall be installed horizontally or within an angle of 30

degrees.2. The thermal insulation delivered with the joints must be used.3. If selected pipe differs from the branch pipe in size, the correct pipe section must

be cut on the refnet.



238129-10 VERSION: 180118

4. The selected refnet headers can only be installed horizontally and they must becorrectly insulated after the airtight test.

F. Refrigerant charge1. The Daikin calculation method, based on `as-built` piping lengths, will be used

before charging. After the airtight test, where a pressure of 3.2 M PA cannotdecrease for 24hrs a double step vacuum drying will be executed. Small minorleaks cannot be detected if the pressure test is not executed for at least 24hrs.Ifthere is no drop in pressure the test is OK.

2. In case of pressure drop the possible leak has to be detected by pressurizingwith N2.

3. After the leak test the vacuum drying method in 2 steps will be executed. Firstvacuum drying will be done for 2 hours, vacuum will be broken with N2 only, asecond vacuum test will be executed until the vacuum grade is –755 mmHg orlower is reached, the vacuum will be broken the charging process can be started.

4. R410A will be charged in liquid phase using a weighing scale + dedicated gaugemanifold and charging hose. The added amount of refrigerant will be recorded onthe outdoor unit.Local codes with reference to possible refrigerant leakage must be respected.

2.3 FAN COIL UNITS A. Each type of indoor unit requires level installation and easy access to filters for

replacement and to electronics/drain pump for maintenance.B. Special caution for short circuit has been taken into account. When fan coil units will be

integrated into a false ceiling, enough ceiling height must be available.C. Local codes apply for installing ductwork to a ducted indoor unit.

2.4 DRAIN PIPINGA. All indoor units equipped with a drain pump require the installation of the flexible drain

hose and clamp delivered with the fan coil unit. This drain hose will be connected to thedrainpipes that will have a downward slope of 1/100. The working of the drain pumpcan be tested by using the test mode of the fan coil unit and adding water in the drainpan .The drain pipe should be at least equal in size to that of the fan coil unit andthermally insulated to prevent any condensation.

B. All fan coil units whose drain connection is subjected to negative pressure should befitted with an individual drain trap; this trap must allow future cleaning.

C. Ducted units shall be provided with an external condensate pump when gravity fall isnot sufficient. Pump shall interlock with indoor unit.

2.5 CONTROL WIRINGA. All field wiring and components must be provided by a licensed electrician.B. The units shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.C. The control system shall be connected by using non-polarity, 2-wire multiplex

transmission system links from the single outdoor unit to multiple indoor units. Inaddition, the control system must come equipped with automatic address setting



238129-11 VERSION: 180118

function (No manual setting of addressing is allowed). An automatic checking function for connection error of wiring and piping must come standard with the system.

D. The fan coil units shall functionally incorporate an on/off switching, fan speed selector,thermostat setting and liquid crystal display which indicates temperature setting,operational mode, malfunction code and filter cleaning timing. The controller shallretain the latest malfunction code for maintenance, capable of field setting and servicefunctions.

E. This shall be accomplished by the use of individual controllers for each room locatedon a wall in appropriate room temperature sensing location.

F. Multi core cables can destabilize the transmitted wave of the multiplex signal. Highvoltage wiring (power supply indoor units) should not be mixed with low voltage wiring(F1F2 communication line) .The separation of power and control lines is specified andthese distances should be respected in order to avoid interference.

G. Refrigerant circuit and indoor/outdoor communication lines must correspond exactly.

2.6 POWER SUPPLYA. Condensing units: 208 V / 3phase / 60 Hz

1. Condensing Unit: a separate breaker of 70 A must be fitted for each outdoor unit.The thickness of the cables in the circuits providing the main power supply mustsatisfy the current tolerances specified by local code and by Daikin (SI 62).

B. Fan Coil units: 208 V / 1 phase / 60 Hz1. Fan Coil Units: a separate breaker 15 A per indoor unit according to local code. If

several indoor units are connected to one breaker, the total rated capacity of thefan motors set up in a 15A branch should not be more than 2.2 kW.

2.7 CONTROLS SPECIFICATION A. General

1. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to provide devices needed tobring all HVAC equipment, exhaust fans, etc. shown on the plans andspecifications under EMS control.

2. The Equipment Supplier Shall provide to the Mechanical Contractor interfacecontrol adaptors (DTA103A51) to allow control of all Fresh Air units (ERV), andexhaust fans. The adaptor shall provide the following functions: unified ON/OFFcontrol, timer operation, remote controller rejection/acceptance and operatingstatus and adjustment.

B. Controller1. Provide multi-zone controller DCS302C71.

C. Quality Assurance1. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes,

except when more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by theContract Documents, including requirements of this Section.a. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.b. National Electrical Code -- NFPA 70.c. Federal Communications Commission -- Part J.



238129-12 VERSION: 180118

2. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture,and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of [2] years. Thisinstallation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitlyapproved by the Owner's representative in writing prior to bid date. Spare partsshall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.

D. Submittals1. Equipment Supplier shall provide screen shots of unit graphics and floor plans,

shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on allhardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment ofthis project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformitywith the plan and specifications. Eight (8) copies are required. All shop drawingsshall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.

2. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner.Such review shall not relieve the Equipment Supplier from furnishing quantitiesrequired for complete installation.

3. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data that isdeemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which isdeemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed.

4. Submit the following:a. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity,

manufacturer and model number.b. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number

(including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.c. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size,

pressure drop, manufacturer and model number.d. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When

manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specificproduct, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlightedor clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature anddrawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that thesubmittal is being submitted to cover. Include:1) Building Controllers2) Custom Application Controllers3) Application Specific Controllers4) Operator Interface Computer5) Portable Operator Workstation6) Auxiliary Control Devices



238129-13 VERSION: 180118

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY START UP A. The Equipment Supplies representative shall carry out/or witness the commissioning of

the VRV system and final inspection and record data as listed below:1. Record Pressure Test (Holding Pressure)2. Confirmation of Record Drawings3. Record Pipe Lengths4. Record Pipe Diameters5. Additional and Total refrigerate Volumes6. Addressing of Fan Coils7. Cooling Start Up Check8. Heating Start Up Check9. Complete and issue Documents and Certificates to Consultant/Client.

B. Should it deemed necessary full access should be afforded to the site during theinstallation of the VRV System to allow the Equipment Supplier’srepresentative/engineer to verify that the installation methods being used comply andare fully in accordance with the VRV System Installation Instructions, requirement inorder that the equipment warranties will not be invalidated.


Technical Specifications Section 260511 – Requirements for Electrical Installation


260511-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260511 - REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section applies to all sections of Division 26. B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the

specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, generators, automatic transfer switches, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.

C. Electrical service entrance equipment and arrangements for temporary and permanent

connections to the utility’s system shall conform to the utility's requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the utility’s system, and obtain utility approval for sizes and settings of these devices.

D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the

conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are permitted.

1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. References to the Florida Building Code (FBC), National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement standards.

B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements

are greater than those specified in the above standards.

1.3 TEST STANDARDS

A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.

B. Definitions:

1. Listed; Equipment, materials, or services included in a list published by an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with evaluation of products or services, that maintains periodic inspection of production or listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of services, and whose listing states that the equipment, material, or services either meets appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose.

2. Labeled; Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified manner.



260511-2

VERSION: 171018

3. Certified; equipment or product which: a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet

nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner. b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally

recognized testing laboratory. c. Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.

4. Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance with OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.

B. Product Qualification:

1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by

the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.

1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

Applicable publications listed in all Sections of Division are the latest issue, unless otherwise noted.

1.6 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.

B. When more than one unit of the same class or type of equipment is required, such units shall be

the product of a single manufacturer. C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:

1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer. 2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall

assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended

service. 4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.

1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, vermin, dirt, corrosive substances, fumes, moisture, cold and rain. 1. Store equipment indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Equipment shall include but not be limited to switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor controllers, uninterruptible power systems, enclosures,



260511-3

VERSION: 171018

controllers, circuit protective devices, cables, wire, light fixtures, electronic equipment, and accessories.

2. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum-cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating. Compressed air shall not be used to clean equipment. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside equipment.

3. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.

4. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.

5. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.

1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE

A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E, and OSHA in addition to other references required by contract.

B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor. C. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.

1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings. B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.

1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as switchboards and switchgear, panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), fused and unfused safety switches, automatic transfer switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant equipment.

B. Nameplates for Normal Power System equipment shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a

white core with engraved lettering. Nameplates for Emergency (Generator) Power System shall be laminated red phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch [12mm] high. Nameplates shall indicate equipment designation, rated bus amperage, voltage, number of phases, and number of wires. Secure nameplates with screws.

C. Install adhesive arc flash warning labels on all equipment as required by NFPA 70E. Label shall

indicate the arc hazard boundary (inches), working distance (inches), arc flash incident energy at the working distance (calories/cm2), required PPE category and description including the glove rating, voltage rating of the equipment, limited approach distance (inches), restricted approach distance (inches), prohibited approach distance (inches), equipment/bus name, date prepared, and manufacturer name and address.



260511-4

VERSION: 171018

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals/shop drawings and/or manufacturer’s data sheet requirements are noted in the individual specification section. Quantity of submittals shall be six (6) unless otherwise noted in Division 1 of the specifications.

B. Submit shop drawings and any other drawings specifically called for in other sections. Shop

drawings shall consist of plans sections, elevations, and details to scale (Not smaller than ¼” per foot) with dimensions clearly showing the installation. Direct copies of small scale project drawings issued to the contractor are not acceptable. The contractor will not be furnished electronic files of the Electrical Drawings. The contractor shall coordinate obtaining architectural backgrounds in electronic form with the Architect.

C. Submittals/shop drawings shall bear a stamp by the electrical subcontractor and the general

contractor indicating they have been reviewed and that the equipment proposed is compatible without exception with the contract documents. Submittals/shop drawings without such stamp shall be returned without review by the engineer.

D. The Contractor is specifically advised that one (1) set of re-submittal/shop drawings shall be

allowed. Additional re-submittals shall be accompanied by a check payable to the Engineer in the amount of $300.00 for each re-submittal. Documents will be returned without review if submitted without funds.

E. Catalog numbers and model numbers indicated in the Drawings and Specifications are used as a

guide in the selection of the equipment and are only listed for the Contractor’s convenience. The Contractor shall determine the actual model numbers for ordering equipment, accessories and other materials in accordance with the written description of each item and with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.12 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for field tests.

1.13 TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.

B. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the

Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training. END OF SECTION 260511

Technical Specifications Section 260521 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductor and Cables


260521-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260521 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and lighting wiring.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

1.3 FACTORY TESTS

Low voltage cables shall be thoroughly tested at the factory per NEMA WC-70 to ensure that there are no electrical defects. Factory tests shall be certified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating. 2. Prior to energizing, submit certification by the contractor that the materials have been

properly installed, connected, and tested. Conductor lengths to also be submitted for arc flash evaluation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conductors and cables shall be in accordance with applicable NEMA standards and as specified herein.

B. Single Conductor: 1. Shall be annealed copper. 2. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and

smaller. Exception: Stranded conductors allowed for controls. 3. Shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG, except where smaller sizes are allowed herein.

C. Insulation: 1. XHHW-2 for service entrance. 2. THHN/THWN for all other applications.

D. Color Code: 1. Secondary service feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color-coded as follows:

208/120 volt Phase 480/277 volt

Black A Brown

Red B Orange

Blue C Yellow



260521-2

VERSION: 171018

White Neutral Gray *

* or white with colored (other than green) tracer.

a. Lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color

coding that is unique and distinct (e.g., pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC.

2. Use solid color insulation or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG branch circuit phase, neutral, and ground conductors.

3. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the following methods: a. Solid color insulation or solid color coating. b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above. c. Color as specified using 0.75 in [19 mm] wide tape. Apply tape in half-

overlapping turns for a minimum of 3 in [75 mm] for terminal points, and in junction boxes, pull-boxes, troughs, and manholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable, stating size and insulation type.

4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.

2.2 SPLICES AND JOINTS

A. In accordance with UL 486A, C, D, E, and NEC. B. Aboveground Circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):

1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, rated 600 V, 220˚ F [105˚ C], with integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.

2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires. 3. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturer's

packaging, shall be strictly followed.

C. Aboveground Circuits (No. 8 AWG and larger): 1. Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and

corrosion-resistant material, listed for use with copper and aluminum conductors. 2. Field-installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall have

not fewer than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire. 3. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location,

voltage, and temperature. Splice and joint insulation level shall be not less than the insulation level of the conductors being joined.

4. Plastic electrical insulating tape: Scotch Super 33+ or equivalent.

D. Underground Branch Circuits and Feeders: 1. Submersible connectors in accordance with UL 486D, rated 600 V, 190˚ F [90˚ C], with

integral insulation.

2.3 CONTROL WIRING

A. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in these specifications, control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring, except that the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14 AWG.

B. Control wiring shall be large enough such that the voltage drop under in-rush conditions does not

adversely affect operation of the controls.



260521-3

VERSION: 171018

2.4 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND

A. Lubricating compound shall be suitable for the wire insulation and conduit, and shall not harden or become adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified. B. Install all wiring in raceway systems. C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull-boxes, manholes, or handholes. D. Wires of different systems (e.g., 120 V, 277 V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or

junction box system. E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge

type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight. F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train,

and tie the cables in individual circuits. G. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground between the wire and conduit where

the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound. H. Wire Pulling:

1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables. Use lubricants approved for the cable.

2. Use nonmetallic ropes for pulling feeders. 3. All cables in a single conduit shall be pulled simultaneously. 4. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall

pressure values.

3.2 SPLICE INSTALLATION

A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque values.

3.3 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to perform the required functions as shown and specified.

B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that

malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems. C. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest

panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or space for installation.



260521-4

VERSION: 171018

3.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL SYSTEM WIRING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination. B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring

diagrams used for installing the systems. C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.


A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before connection to utilization devices, such as fixtures, motors, or appliances. Test each conductor with respect to adjacent conductors and to ground. Existing conductors to be reused shall also be tested.

B. Applied voltage shall be 500VDC for 300-volt rated cable, and 1000VDC for 600-volt rated cable.

Apply test for one minute or until reading is constant for 15 seconds, whichever is longer. Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than 25 megohms for 300-volt rated cable and 100 megohms for 600-volt rated cable.

C. Perform phase rotation test on all three-phase circuits. D. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for all tests. E. Submit test reports with close out documents.


Technical Specifications Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems


260526-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the general grounding and bonding requirements for electrical equipment and operations to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.

B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as made,

supplementary, and lightning protection system grounding electrodes. C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same

meaning.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Clearly present enough information to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG [6 mm²] and smaller shall be solid copper. (Stranded conductors permitted for controls wiring.) Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG [25 mm²] and larger shall be identified per NEC.

B. Conductor sizes shall not be less than shown on the drawings, or not less than required by the

NEC, whichever is greater.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Copper, 0.75 in [19 mm] diameter by 10 ft [30 M] long, conforming to UL 467. B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance, as shown on the

drawings.

2.3 CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE

Concrete encased electrode shall be No. 3/0 bare copper wire, installed per NEC.



260526-2

VERSION: 171018

2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

B. Above Grade: 1. Bonding Jumpers: Compression-type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and

external tooth lockwashers. 2. Connection to Building Steel: Exothermic-welded type connectors. 3. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs, using tin-plated copper or copper

alloy bolts and nuts. 4. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: One-hole compression-type lugs, using zinc-plated or

copper alloy fasteners.

2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS

Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 0.375 in [4 mm] thick x 0.75 in [19 mm] wide.

2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS

At any equipment mounting location (e.g., backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.

2.7 GROUNDING BUS

Pre-drilled rectangular copper bar with stand-off insulators, minimum 0.25 in [6.3 mm] thick x 4 in [100 mm] high in cross-section, length as shown on drawings, with 0.281 in [7.1 mm] holes spaced 1.125 in [28 mm] apart.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as specified herein. B. System Grounding:

1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures, including ductwork and building steel, enclosures,

raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits, shall be bonded and grounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

Make grounding connections, which are normally buried or otherwise inaccessible (except connections for which access for periodic testing is required), by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment.



260526-3

VERSION: 171018

B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s): 1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment

ground bus and all metallic water pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Provide jumper at insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system. C. Service Disconnect (Separate Individual Enclosure): Provide a ground bar bolted to the enclosure

with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors . D. Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations, Panelboards, Motor Control Centers and

Panelboards, Engine-Generators, and Automatic Transfer Switches: 1. Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus in the

enclosure with suitable pressure connectors. 2. For service entrance equipment, connect the grounding electrode conductor to the

ground bus. 3. Provide ground bars, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the

equipment grounding conductors. 4. Connect metallic conduits that terminate without mechanical connection to the housing,

by grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

E. Transformers: 1. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service equipment): Ground

the secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide a grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to the nearest component of the grounding electrode system.

3.4 RACEWAY

A. Conduit Systems: 1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an

equipment grounding conductor. 2. Non-metallic conduit systems, except non-metallic feeder conduits that carry a grounded

conductor from utility transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment, shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Metallic conduit that only contains a grounding conductor, and is provided for its mechanical protection, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

4. Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power

and lighting branch circuits. C. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes.

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.

D. Wireway Systems:



260526-4

VERSION: 171018

1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100% electrical continuity throughout the wireway system, by connecting a No. 6 AWG [16 mm²] bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

2. Install insulated No. 6 AWG [16 mm²] bonding jumpers between the wireway system, bonded as required above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 50 ft [16 M].

3. Use insulated No. 6 AWG [16 mm²] bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end for all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

4. Use insulated No. 6 AWG [16 mm²] bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 49 ft [15 M].

E. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground receptacles with a

jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and a jumper to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

F. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system when the

green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.

G. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of

the equipment grounding conductor.

3.5 CORROSION INHIBITORS

When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.6 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

3.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical grounding electrode system.

3.8 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING

Building Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar and mounting hardware at each electrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring.

3.9 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 ohms. Make any modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system necessary for compliance without additional cost to the Owner. Final tests shall ensure that this requirement is met.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a three point fall-of-

potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not fewer than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the



260526-5

VERSION: 171018

specified number of electrodes must still be provided. Submit ground test report to Engineer prior to energizing equipment.

C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground

resistance requirements.

3.10 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION

A. For outdoor installations, drive each rod vertically in the earth, until top of rod is 4 in [100 mm] below final grade.

B. For indoor installations, leave 4 in [100 mm] of rod exposed. C. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the

exothermic process, to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure-type ground connectors.

D. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding

electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.


Technical Specifications Section 260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems


260533-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes, to form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway

types specified.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type, box type, and applications

intended. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Size and location of main feeders. 2. Size and location of panels and pull-boxes. 3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 0.5 in [13 mm] unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 0.5 in [13 mm] flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.

B. Conduit:

1. Rigid steel: Shall conform to UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall conform to UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. Maximum

size not to exceed 4 in [105 mm] and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 V or less.

3. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall conform to UL 1. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall conform to UL 360. 5. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or

high density polyethylene (PE). 6. Surface metal raceway: Shall conform to UL 5.

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid steel conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.



260533-2

VERSION: 171018

b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, conduit bodies, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert, molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.

e. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.

2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings: a. Fittings and conduit bodies shall meet the requirements of UL 514B, ANSI

C80.3, and NEMA FB1. b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

c. Compression couplings and connectors (damp and wet areas): Concrete-tight and rain-tight, with connectors having insulated throats.

d. Setscrew couplings and connectors (indoor, dry areas only): Use setscrews of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point, to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.

3. Flexible steel conduit fittings: a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. b. Clamp-type, with insulated throat.

4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings: a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic

compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

5. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings: Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.

6. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer. Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, conduit entry fittings, accessories, and other fittings as required for complete system.

7. Expansion and deflection couplings: a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B. b. Accommodate a 0.75 in [19 mm] deflection, expansion, or contraction in any

direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.

D. Conduit Supports: 1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection. 2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure

bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod. 3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 1.5 x 1.5 in [38 mm x 38 mm], 12-

gauge steel, cold-formed, lipped channels; with not less than 0.375 in [9 mm] diameter steel hanger rods.

4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.



260533-3

VERSION: 171018

E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes: 1. UL-50 and UL-514A. 2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes. 3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown. 4. Flush-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with tile rings so that the front face

of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface-mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface-style flat or raised covers.

F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown. Include

couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Holes: 1. Cut holes in advance where they should be placed in the structural elements, such as

ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the Structural Engineer prior to drilling through structural elements.

2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammers, impact electric, hand, or manual hammer-type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Structural Engineer as required by limited working space.

B. Firestop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions,

fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases dictated by architectural specifications.

C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances

around the conduit and make watertight.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as specified herein. B. Install conduit as follows:

1. In complete mechanically and electrically continuous runs before pulling in cables or wires.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, installation of all conduits hall be concealed within finished walls, floors, and ceilings.

3. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

4. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.

5. Cut square, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight. 6. Independently support conduit at 8 ft [2.4 M] on centers. Do not use other supports, i.e.,

suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts.

7. Support within 12 in [300 mm] of changes of direction, and within 12 in [300 mm] of each enclosure to which connected.



260533-4

VERSION: 171018

8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage until wires are pulled in, to prevent entry of debris.

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited. 10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull-boxes, and outlet boxes with bonding

type locknuts. For rigid conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.

11. Conduit bodies shall only be used for changes in direction, and shall not contain splices.

C. Conduit Bends: 1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines. 2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets and for straightening stubbed out conduits. 3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

D. Layout and Homeruns: 1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown on drawings. 2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings

showing the proposed deviations have been prepared by the Engineer.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete: 1. Conduit: Rigid steel or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with

soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. 2. Align and run conduit in direct lines. 3. Install conduit through concrete beams only:

a. Where shown on the structural drawings. b. As approved by the Structural Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal

of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration. 4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 3 in [75 mm] thick is prohibited.

a. Conduit outside diameter larger than one-third of the slab thickness is prohibited. b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart,

and one conduit diameter at conduit crossings. c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a

minimum of 0.75 in [19 mm] of concrete around the conduits. 5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL

approved conductive type to ensure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening setscrews with pliers is prohibited.

B. Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:

1. Conduit for conductors 600 V and below: Rigid steel or EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

2. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. 3. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 6 ft [1.8 M] of flexible

metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture. 4. Tightening setscrews with pliers is prohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.



260533-5

VERSION: 171018

B. Conduit for Conductors 600 V and Below: Rigid steel, or EMT. Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

C. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines. D. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps. Do not install

conduit in horizontal fashion below 15’ AFF. E. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 8 ft [2.4 M] intervals.

F. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.

3.5 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A. Unless otherwise shown, use conduits of rigid steel, EMT, or PVC. B. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor where conduits pass from warm to

cold locations, i.e., refrigerated spaces, constant-temperature rooms, air-conditioned spaces, building exterior walls, roofs, or similar spaces.

C. Unless otherwise shown, use rigid steel conduit within 5 ft [1.5 M] of the exterior and below

concrete building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Conduit shall be half-lapped with 10 mil PVC tape before installation. After installation, completely recoat or retape any damaged areas of coating.

3.6 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A. Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission.

B. Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity

laden atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, water or spray wash-down operations, inside airstream of HVAC units, and locations subject to seepage or dripping of oil, grease, or water.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Conduits 3 in [75 mm] and larger that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide conduits smaller than 3 in [75 mm] with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion

joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5 in [125 mm] vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for conduits 15 in [375 mm] and larger are acceptable.

3.8 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed proof test load of fastening devices. B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits.



260533-6

VERSION: 171018

C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 200 lbs [90 kg]. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull-boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars,

angle supports, and similar items. E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. Existing Construction: a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] bolt size and not less than

1.125 in [28 mm] embedment. b. Power set fasteners not less than 0.25 in [6 mm] diameter with depth of

penetration not less than 3 in [75 mm]. c. Use vibration and shock-resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to

concrete ceilings.



260533-7

VERSION: 171018

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts. G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and

approved for the application.

I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.

J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit. K. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with

the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.

3.9 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits: 1. Flush-mounted. 2. Provide tile rings for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction, and finish.

B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling-in operations.

C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast

metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes. D. Outlet boxes mounted back-to-back in the same wall are prohibited. A minimum 24 in [600 mm]

center-to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes. E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 in [100 mm]

square x 2.125 in [55 mm] deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved. F. On all branch circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.


Technical Specifications Section 260800 – Commissioning for Electrical Systems


260800-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 26.

B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the electrical systems, subsystems and equipment.

1.3 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS

A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner’s Operation and Maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation the Commissioning Agent.

B. The following Electrical systems will be commissioned:

1. Utility Service Entrance Switchgear (Fuses and circuit breaker settings, metering, mimic diagram, gages, and controls).

2. Standby Generator Systems (Automatic transfer switches, fuel delivery pumps and motors, battery charging and instrumentation, muffler and exhaust system, and vibration isolation).

3. Automatic Transfer Switches (Test with associated generator). 4. Normal Power Distribution Systems (Grounding tests, coordination study review, major

circuit breaker settings, meters and gages, and controls). 5. Lighting Controls (Control system hardware and software, scene settings, zone settings,

occupancy sensor interface, and unoccupied cycle control).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The commissioning process requires review of selected Submittals. The Commissioning Agent will provide a list of submittals that will be reviewed by the Commissioning Agent. This list will be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to forwarding to the Contractor.

B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

A. The Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to verify systems, subsystems, and equipment installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems Functional Performance Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists to be used to document equipment installation. The Contractor shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be submitted to the Engineer and to the Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample of completed checklists. If the Commissioning Agent or Engineer determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the

Technical Specifications Section 260800 – Commissioning for Electrical Systems


260800-2

VERSION: 171018

Commissioning Agent and/or Engineer will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. If the Commissioning Agent or Engineer determines that a significant number of completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent and/or Engineer will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent or Engineer determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all the checklists for the type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission.

3.2 CONTRACTORS TESTS

A. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 26 shall be scheduled and documented. The Commissioning Agent and/or Engineer will witness selected Contractor tests. Contractor tests shall be completed prior to scheduling Systems Functional Performance Testing.

3.3 SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING:

A. The Commissioning Process includes Systems Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance under steady state conditions, to test system reaction to changes in operating conditions, and system performance under emergency conditions. The Commissioning Agent will prepare detailed Systems Functional Performance Test procedures for review and approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall review and comment on the tests prior to approval. The Contractor shall provide the required labor, materials, and test equipment identified in the test procedure to perform the tests. The Commissioning Agent will witness and document the testing. The Contractor shall sign the test reports to verify tests were performed.

3.4 TRAINING OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Engineer after submission and approval of formal training plans.


Technical Specifications Section 260923 – Lighting Controls


260923-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the lighting controls.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the following:

B. Product Data: For each type of lighting control, submit the following information.

1. Manufacturer’s catalog data. 2. Wiring schematic and connection diagram. 3. Installation details.

C. Manuals: 1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete

maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.

D. Certifications:

1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Engineer:

a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRONIC TIME SWITCHES

A. Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: As shown on drawings. 2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. 3. Astronomical Clock: Capable of switching a load on at sunset and off at sunrise, and

automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Additionally, it shall be programmable to a fixed on/off weekly schedule.

4. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock, 24 hour minimum.

2.2 ELECTROMECHANICAL-DIAL TIME SWITCHES

A. Electromechanical-dial time switches; complying with UL 917. 1. Contact Configuration: As shown on drawings. 2. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac. 3. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, 24 hour

minimum.



260923-2

VERSION: 171018

2.3 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA tungsten or 1000 VA inductive, complying with UL 773A. 1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc [16.14 to 108 lx], with adjustable turn-on and

turn-off levels. 2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 4. Mounting: Twist lock, with base-and-stem mounting or stem-and-swivel mounting

accessories as required.

2.4 TIMER SWITCHES

A. Digital switches with backlit LCD display, 120/277 volt rated, fitting as a replacement for standard wall switches. 1. Compatibility: Compatible with all ballasts. 2. Warning: Audible warning to sound during the last minute of “on” operation. 3. Time-out: Adjustable from 5 minutes to 12 hours. 4. Faceplate: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as

specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.

2.5 CEILING-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit. 1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay. Sensor shall be

powered from the relay unit. 2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten

at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V. 3. Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc [108 to 2152 lx], with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-

off levels. 4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds, with deadband adjustment. 5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.6 SKYLIGHT PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS

A. Solid-state, light-level sensor; housed in a threaded, plastic fitting for mounting under skylight; with separate relay unit. 1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A.

Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten

at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V. 3. Monitoring Range: 1000 to 10,000 fc [10,800 to 108,000 lx], with an adjustment for turn-

on and turn-off levels. 4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds, with deadband adjustment. 5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.7 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a power supply and relay unit, suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and

off when unoccupied; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor shall be powered

from the relay unit.



260923-3

VERSION: 171018

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at 120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.

4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind

hinged door. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal

operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Manual/automatic selector switch. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc [21.5 to 2152 lx]; keep

lighting off when selected lighting level is present. 9. Faceplate for Wall-Switch Replacement Type: Refer to wall plate material and color

requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section 26 27 26, WIRING DEVICES.

B. Dual-technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection methods, field-selectable. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch [150mm] minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. [232 sq. cm], and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches [305 mm] in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s [305 mm/s].

3. Detection Coverage: as scheduled on drawings.

2.8 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL – RELAY TYPE

A. Controller: Comply with UL 508; programmable, solid-state, astronomic 365-day control unit with non-volatile memory, mounted in preassembled relay panel with low-voltage-controlled, latching-type, single-pole lighting circuit relays. Controller shall be capable of receiving inputs from sensors and other sources, and capable of timed overrides and/or blink-warning on a per-circuit basis. Controller communication protocol shall be compatible with the building automation system. Where indicated, a limited number of digital or analog, low-voltage control-circuit outputs shall be supported by control unit and circuit boards associated with relays.

B. Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage

components. C. Directory: Identifies each relay as to load controlled. D. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc output. E. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil, momentary-pulsed

type, rated 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten filaments and 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts, 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.



260923-4

VERSION: 171018

B. Aim outdoor photocell switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Set adjustable window slide for 1 footcandle photocell turn-on.

C. Aiming for wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted motion sensor switches shall be per

manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Set occupancy sensor "on" duration to 30 minutes. E. Locate light level sensors as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Adjust sensor for the scheduled light level at the typical work plane for that area.

F. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in

accordance with requirements of this section. C. Test for full range of dimming ballast and dimming controls capability. Observe for visually

detectable flicker over full dimming range. D. Test occupancy sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being

covered. E. Program lighting control panels per schedule on drawings. F. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer’s

factory-authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placements.

3.3 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATION

Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that the lighting control devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.


Technical Specifications Section 262416 – Panelboards


262416-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of panelboards.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, shall be clearly presented to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams, accessories, and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data, including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.

C. Manuals:

1. When submitting the shop drawings, submit companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and wiring diagrams.

2. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals that were originally submitted, then submit four copies of updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection.

D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the

Engineer: 1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials conform to the requirements of the

drawings and specifications. 2. Certification by the contractor that the materials have been properly installed, connected,

and tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the drawings. B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. C. All panelboards shall be hinged door type with hand-operated latch or latches, as required to

provide access only to circuit breaker operating handles, not to energized parts and lockable. D. All panelboards shall be completely factory-assembled with molded case circuit breakers and

integral accessories, and as scheduled on the drawings or specified herein. Include one-piece removable, inner dead front cover, independent of the panelboard cover.



262416-2

VERSION: 171018

E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings.

F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1, and UL 67 and have the following

features: 1. Non-reduced size copper or tin plated aluminum bus bars with current ratings as shown

on the panel schedules, rigidly supported on molded insulators. 2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or

“phase sequence” type. 3. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped, or machined metal

alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors to which they will be connected. 4. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports. 5. Grounding bus bar shall be equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding

wires. 6. Buses shall be braced for the available short-circuit current. Bracing shall not be less

than 10,000 A symmetrical for 120/208 V and 120/240 V panelboards. Refer to drawings for bracing requirements.

7. Branch circuit panelboards shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers. 8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can easily be replaced. 9. Where designated on panel schedule "spaces," include all necessary bussing, device

support, and connections. Provide blank cover for each space. 10. In two section panelboards, the main bus in each section shall be full size. The first

section shall be furnished with subfeed lugs on the line side of main lugs only, or through-feed lugs for main breaker type panelboards, and have cable connections to the second section. Panelboard sections with tapered bus or crossover bus are not acceptable.

2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS

Cabinets: 1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards. Cabinets for outdoor

panelboards shall be factory primed and suitably treated with a corrosion-resisting paint finish meeting UL 50 and UL 67.

2. Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings. 3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with

blank end and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required. Pre-punched knockouts are not acceptable.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Circuit breakers shall be per UL 489, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt-on type. C. Molded case circuit breakers shall have minimum interrupting rating as required to withstand the

available fault current, but not less than: 1. 120/208 V Panelboard: 10,000 A symmetrical. 2. 120/240 V Panelboard: 10,000 A symmetrical.

D. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and instantaneous magnetic trips for 100 A frame or lower. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3x to 10x for breakers with 600 A frames and higher.

E. Breaker features shall be as follows:



262416-3

VERSION: 171018

1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material. 2. Silver alloy contacts. 3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole. 4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms. 5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and

instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator. 6. Electrically and mechanically trip free. 7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions. 8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of

the breaker to open. 9. Ground fault current interrupting breakers, shunt trip breakers, lighting control breakers

(including accessories to switch line currents), or other accessory devices or functions shall be provided where indicated.

10. Manufacturer self certified for HID loads. 11. HACR rated for HVAC loads.

2.4 SURGE SUPPRESSION

Where shown on drawings, furnish panelboard with integral transient voltage surge suppression device.

2.5 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breakers are shown on the drawings, provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable requirements of those specified for panelboards.

B. Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the drawings. Where the types are not shown,

they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the environmental conditions where the circuit breakers are being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected. C. Install a printed schedule of circuits in each panelboard after installation. Schedules shall be

printed on the panelboard directory cards, installed in the appropriate panelboards, and incorporate all applicable contract changes. Information shall indicate outlets, lights, devices, or other equipment controlled by each circuit, and the final room numbers served by each circuit.

D. Mount the fully-aligned panelboard such that the maximum height of the top circuit breaker above

the finished floor shall not exceed 78 in [1980 mm]. E. For panelboards located in areas accessible to the public, paint the exposed surfaces of the

trims, doors, and boxes with finishes to match surrounding surfaces after the panelboards have been installed.


Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests (prior to energizing):



262416-4

VERSION: 171018

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop

drawings. b. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition. c. Verify appropriate anchorage and required area clearances. d. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop

drawings. e. To verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections, use the calibrated

torque-wrench method. Submit torque values achieved to Engineer. f. Vacuum clean panelboard. g. Inspect and ensure panelboard is free from shorts prior to energizing.


Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the contractor shall demonstrate that the panelboards are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. Measure and record voltage readings between phases, neutral and ground. Submit voltage measurements to Engineer.


Technical Specifications Section 262726 – Wiring Devices


262726-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring devices.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade and termination information.

C. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the

Engineer: Certification by the Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications, and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and conform to appropriate NEMA standards. 1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears and shall include a self-

grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal. 2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal clamp type

terminals (four min.) and side wiring from four captively held binding screws.

B. Duplex Receptacles: Commercial-grade, single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole, 3-wire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration. The duplex type shall have break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal. 1. Bodies shall be white in color. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral unit, commercial-

grade, white in color, and suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box. a. Ground fault interrupter shall be consist of a differential current transformer,

solid state sensing circuitry and a circuit interrupter switch. Device shall have nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1 milliamp) on the load side of the device.

C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete with appropriate cord grip

plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.



262726-2

VERSION: 171018

D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. Receptacle shall be weather resistant, WR, type.

2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Toggle Switches: Shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of phenolic compound. Toggle handles shall be white in color unless otherwise specified. The rocker type switch is not acceptable and will not be approved. 1. Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type in accordance with

the NEC and as shown on the drawings. 2. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty general-purpose use

with an integral self grounding mounting strap with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held binding screws.

3. Ratings: a. 120 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.

2.3 MANUAL DIMMING CONTROL

A. Slide dimmer with on/off control, single-pole or three-way as shown on plans. Faceplates shall be white in color unless otherwise specified.

B. Manual dimming controls shall be fully compatible with electronic dimming ballasts and

approved by the ballast manufacturer, shall operate over full specified dimming range, and shall not degrade the performance or rated life of the electronic dimming ballast and lamp.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel (kitchen areas) or smooth nylon. Oversize plates are not acceptable.

B. Color shall be white unless otherwise specified. C. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable. D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for

each group of receptacles or switches. E. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the

associated specification .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings. B. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green

bonding jumper, and also connected to the green equipment grounding conductor. C. Outlet boxes for light and dimmer switches shall be mounted on the strike side of doors.



262726-3

VERSION: 171018

D. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as

necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades to ensure that wiring device flush outlets are positioned with box openings aligned with the face of the surrounding finish material. Pay special attention to installations in cabinet work.

E. Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and equipment may vary from

locations shown on the drawings. Refer to architectural drawings for placement. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of conduit and equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact field location of the above items with other trades. In addition, check for exact direction of door swings so that local switches are properly located on the strike side.

F. Device elevations are to centerline unless noted otherwise. G. Install wall switches 46 inches [1168mm] above floor, OFF position down. H. Install wall dimmers 46 inches [1168mm] above floor; derate ganged dimmers as instructed by

manufacturer; do not use common neutral. I. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches [450mm] above floor, and 6 inches [152mm] above

counter backsplash or workbenches. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.

J. Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and circuit feeding the wiring

device. K. Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high circuit resistance, poor connections,

inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems using a portable receptacle tester. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above.

L. Test GFCI devices for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.


Technical Specifications Section 262921 – Disconnect Switches


262921-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 262921 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of low voltage disconnect switches.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Clearly present sufficient information to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, enclosure types, and fuse types and classes.

3. Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit.

C. Manuals: 1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect switches, including

technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts. 2. Terminals on wiring diagrams shall be identified to facilitate maintenance and operation. 3. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any interlocking.

D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Engineer: 1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials conform to the requirements of the

drawings and specifications. 2. Certification by the contractor that the materials have been properly installed, connected,

and tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

A. In accordance with UL 98, NEMA KS1, and NEC. B. Shall have NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD). C. Shall be HP rated. D. Shall have the following features:

1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type. 2. Copper blades, visible in the OFF position. 3. An arc chute for each pole.

Technical Specifications Section 262921 – Disconnect Switches


262921-2

VERSION: 171018

4. External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and have lock-open padlocking provisions.

5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF position, defeatable to permit inspection.

6. Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses specified. 7. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor. 8. Ground lugs for each ground conductor. 9. Enclosures:

a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the switches. b. Where the types of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be the NEMA types

most suitable for the ambient environmental conditions. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all outdoor switches shall be NEMA 3R.

c. Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel paint over pretreated steel (for the type of enclosure required).

2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, but without provisions for fuses.

2.3 LOW VOLTAGE CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. In accordance with NEMA FU1. B. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. C. Control Circuits: Class CC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.

B. Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuses. Arrange fuses such that rating information is readable without removing the fuse.

3.2 SPARE PARTS

Two weeks prior to the final inspection, furnish one complete set of spare fuses for each fusible disconnect switch installed on the project. Deliver the spare fuses to the Owner.


Technical Specifications Section 263213 – Engine Generators


263213-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of the low-voltage engine generators.


A. A factory-authorized representative shall be capable of providing emergency maintenance and repairs at the project site within 8 hours maximum of notification.

1.3 FACTORY TESTS

A. Furnish electronic copies of certified manufacturer's factory test reports to the Engineer prior to

shipment of the engine generators to ensure that the engine generator has been successfully tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard testing procedures.

B. The manufacturer shall furnish fuel, load banks, testing instruments, and all other equipment

necessary to perform these tests.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit electronic copy of the following in accordance with Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. 1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit sufficient information to demonstrate compliance with drawings and specifications.

b. Scaled drawings, showing plan views, side views, elevations, and cross-sections. 2. Diagrams:

a. Control system diagrams, control sequence diagrams or tables, wiring diagrams, interconnections diagrams (between engine generators, automatic transfer switches, remote annunciator panels, as applicable), and other like items.

3. Technical Data: a. Published ratings, catalog cuts, pictures, and manufacturer’s specifications for

engine generator, governor, voltage regulator, radiator, muffler, dampers, batteries and charger, jacket heaters, torsional vibration, and control and supervisory equipment.

b. Description of operation. c. Short-circuit current capacity and subtransient reactance. d. Sound power level data.

4. Calculations: a. Calculated performance derations appropriate to installed environment.

5. Manuals: a. When submitting the shop drawings, submit complete maintenance and operating

manuals, to include the following: 1) Technical data sheets. 2) Wiring diagrams. 3) Include information for testing, repair, troubleshooting, and factory recommended

periodic maintenance procedures and frequency. 4) Provide a replacement and spare parts list. Include a list of tools and

Instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.



263213-2

VERSION: 171018

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the final inspection.

6. Test Reports: a. Submit certified factory test reports for approval. b. Submit field test reports two weeks prior to the final inspection.

7. Certifications: a. Prior to fabrication of the engine generator, submit the following for approval:

1) A certification in writing that an engine generator of the same model and configuration, with the same bore, stroke, number of cylinders, and equal or higher kW/kVA ratings as the proposed engine generator, has been operating satisfactorily with connected loads of not less than 75% of the specified kW/kVA rating, for not fewer than 2,000 hours without any failure of a crankshaft, camshaft, piston, valve, injector, or governor system.

2) A certification in writing that devices and circuits will be incorporated to protect the voltage regulator and other components of the engine generator during operation at speeds other than the rated RPM while performing maintenance. Submit thorough descriptions of any precautions necessary to protect the voltage regulator and other components of the system during operation of the engine generator at speeds other than the rated RPM.

3) A certification from the engine manufacturer stating that the engine exhaust emissions meet the applicable federal, state, and local regulations and restrictions. At a minimum, this certification shall include emission factors for criteria pollutants including nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, non-methane hydrocarbon, and hazardous air pollutants (HPAs).

b. Prior to installation of the engine generator at the job site, submit certified factory test data.

c. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit the following. 1) Certification by the manufacturer that the engine generators conform to the

requirements of the drawings and specifications. 2) Certification by the Contractor that the engine generators have been properly

installed, adjusted, and tested.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Engine generators shall withstand shipping and handling stresses in addition to the electrical and mechanical stresses which occur during operation of the system. Protect radiator core with wood sheet.

B. Store the engine generators in a location approved by the general contractor and the owner.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Job conditions shall conform to the arrangements and details shown on the drawings. The dimensions, enclosures, and arrangements of the engine generator system shall permit the operating personnel to safely and conveniently operate and maintain the system in the space designated for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The engine generator system shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, NEMA and ANSI, and as specified herein.



263213-3

VERSION: 171018

B. Provide a factory-assembled, wired (except for field connections), complete, fully automatic engine generator system.

C. Engine Generator Parameter Schedule:

1. Power Rating: Standby 2. Voltage: 120/208V 3. Rated Power: 250 kW (continuous) 4. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging 5. Engine Generator Application: stand-alone 6. Fuel: Natural Gas 7. Voltage Regulation: + 2% (maximum) (No Load to Full Load) (standalone applications) 8. Phases: 3 Phase, Wye 9. Each component of the engine generator system shall be capable of operating at up to 500

feet above sea level which will have average ambient air temperature ranging from a minimum of 20°F in winter to maximum of 115°F in summer.

D. Assemble, connect, and wire the engine generator at the factory so that only the external

connections need to be made at the construction site.

E. Engine Generator Unit shall be factory-painted with manufacturer's primer and standard finishes.

F. Connections between components of the system shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer.

G. Couplings, shafts, and other moving parts shall be enclosed and guarded. Guards shall be metal,

ruggedly constructed, rigidly fastened, and readily removable for convenient servicing of the equipment without disassembling any pipes and fittings.

H. Engine generator shall have the following features:

1. Factory-mounted on a common, rigid, welded, structural steel base. 2. The isolators shall be constrained with restraints capable of withstanding static forces in

any direction equal to twice the weight of the supported equipment. 3. 72 Hr double wall, UL 142, skid base tank. 4. Shall be capable of operating satisfactorily as specified for not fewer than 10,000 hours

between major overhauls.

2.2 ENGINE

A. The engine shall be coupled directly to a generator. B. The engine shall be equipped with electric heater for maintaining the coolant temperature as

recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Install thermostatic controls, contactors, and circuit breaker-protected circuits for the

heaters. 2. The heaters shall operate continuously except while the engine is operating or the water

temperature is at the predetermined level.

2.3 GOVERNOR

A. Isochronous, electronic type. B. Steady-state speed band at 60 Hz shall not exceed plus or minus 0.33%.



263213-4

VERSION: 171018

2.4 COOLING SYSTEM

A. Liquid-cooled, closed loop, with fin-tube radiator mounted on the engine generator and integral engine driven circulating pump.

B. Cooling capacity shall not be less than the cooling requirements of the engine generator and its

lubricating oil while operating continuously at 100% of its specified rating. C. Coolant shall be extended-life antifreeze solution, 50% ethylene glycol and 50% soft water, with

corrosion inhibitor additive as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Self-contained thermostatic-control valve shall modulate coolant flow to maintain optimum

constant coolant temperature, as recommended by the engine manufacturer.

2.5 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

A. Air Intake: 1. Provide an engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry filter and dirty filter indicator.

B. Exhaust System: 1. Exhaust Muffler: Shall be critical grade type. 2. Connections at the engine exhaust outlet shall be made with a flexible exhaust pipe.

C. Condensate drain at muffler shall be made with schedule 40 black steel pipe through a petcock. D. Exhaust Piping and Supports: Black steel pipe, ASTM A-53 standard weight with welded fittings.

Provide spring type hangers for extension of exhaust piping to exterior of garage.

2.6 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

A. Batteries shall be lead-acid high discharge rate type. 1. Each battery cell shall have minimum and maximum electrolyte level indicators and a flip-

top flame arrestor vent cap. 2. Batteries shall have connector covers for protection against external short circuits. 3. With the charger disconnected, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity so that the

total system voltage does not fall below 85% of the nominal system voltage with the following demands: Five consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking at 10 second intervals for a total of 50 seconds of actual cranking (the fifth starting attempt will be manually initiated upon failure of a complete engine cranking cycle).

4. Battery racks shall be metal with an alkali-resistant finish and thermal insulation, and secured to the interior framework of the generator housing assembly.

B. Battery Charger:

1. A current-limiting battery charger, conforming to UL 1236, shall be provided and shall automatically recharge the batteries. The charger shall be capable of an equalize-charging rate for recharging fully depleted batteries within 24 hours and a floating charge rate for maintaining the batteries at fully charged condition.

2. An ammeter shall be provided to indicate charging rate. A voltmeter shall be provided to indicate charging voltage.

2.7 GENERATOR

A. Synchronous, amortisseur windings, bracket-bearing, self-venting, rotating-field type connected directly to the engine.



263213-5

VERSION: 171018

B. Lifting lugs designed for convenient connection to and removal from the engine. C. Designed for sustained short-circuit currents in conformance with NEMA Standards. D. Designed for sustained operation at 100% of the RPM specified for the engine generator without

damage. E. Nameplates attached to the generator shall show the manufacturer's name, equipment

identification, serial number, voltage ratings, field current ratings, kW/kVA output ratings, power factor rating, time rating, temperature rise ratings, RPM ratings, full load current rating, number of phases and frequency, and date of manufacture.

F. The grounded (neutral) conductor shall be electrically isolated from equipment ground and

terminated in the same junction box as the phase conductors.

2.8 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator circuit breaker shall be molded-case, electronic-trip type, and 100% rated, complying with UL 489. Tripping characteristics shall be adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. Provide shunt trip to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices.

B. Overcurrent protective device cubicle shall contain terminations for neutral and equipment

grounding conductors as necessary.

2.9 CONTROLS

A. Shall include Engine Generator Control Cubicle and Remote Annunciator Panel. B. General:

1. Control equipment shall be in accordance with UL 508, NEMA ICS-4, ICS-6, and ANSI C37.90.1.

2. Panels shall be in accordance with UL 50. 3. Cubicles shall be in accordance with UL 891. 4. Coordinate controls with the automatic transfer switches shown on the drawings so that

the systems will operate as specified. 5. Cubicles:

a. Code gauge steel: manufacturer's recommended heavy gauge steel with factory primer and light gray finish.

b. Doors shall be gasketed, attached with concealed or semi-concealed hinges, and shall have a permanent means of latching in closed position.

c. Panels shall be wall-mounted or incorporated in other equipment as indicated on the drawings or as specified.

d. Door locks for panels and cubicles shall be keyed identically to operate from a single key.

6. Wiring: Insulated, rated at 600 V. a. Install the wiring in vertical and horizontal runs, neatly harnessed. b. Terminate all external wiring at heavy duty, pressure-type, terminal blocks.

7. The equipment, wiring terminals, and wires shall be clearly and permanently labeled.

8. The appropriate wiring diagrams shall be laminated or mounted under plexiglass within the frame on the inside of the cubicles and panels.



263213-6

VERSION: 171018

9. All indicating lamps and switches shall be accessible and mounted on the cubicle doors. 10. The manufacturer shall coordinate the interconnection and programming of the generator

controls with all related equipment, including automatic transfer switches, specified in other sections.



263213-7

VERSION: 171018

C. Engine generator Control Cubicle: 1. Starting and Stopping Controls:

a. A three-position, maintained-contact type selector switch with positions marked "AUTOMATIC," "OFF," and "MANUAL." Provide flashing amber light for OFF and MANUAL positions.

b. A momentary contact push-button switch with positions marked "MANUAL START" and "MANUAL STOP."

c. Selector switch in AUTOMATIC position shall cause the engine to start automatically when a single pole contact in a remote device closes. When the generator's output voltage increases to not less than 90% of its rated voltage, and its frequency increases to not less than 58 Hz, the remote devices shall transfer the load to the generator. An adjustable time delay relay, in the 0 to 15 minute range, shall cause the engine generator to continue operating without any load after completion of the period of operation with load. Upon completion of the additional 0 to 15 minute (adjustable) period, the engine generator shall stop.

d. Selector switch in OFF position shall prevent the engine from starting either automatically or manually. Selector switch in MANUAL position shall also cause the engine to start when the manual start push-button is depressed momentarily.

e. With selector switch is in MANUAL position, depressing the MANUAL STOP push-button momentarily shall stop the engine after a cool-down period.

f. A maintained-contact, red mushroom-head push-button switch marked "EMERGENCY STOP" will cause the engine to stop without a cool-down period, independent of the position of the selector switch.

2. Engine Cranking Controls: a. The cranking cycles shall be controlled by a timer that will be independent of the

battery voltage fluctuations. b. The controls shall crank the engine through one complete cranking cycle,

consisting of four starting attempts of 10 seconds each with 10 seconds between each attempt.

c. Total actual cranking time for the complete cranking cycle shall be 40 seconds during a 70-second interval.

d. Cranking shall terminate when the engine starts so that the starting system will not be damaged. Termination of the cranking shall be controlled by self-contained, speed-sensitive switch. The switch shall prevent re-cranking of the engine until after the engine stops.

e. After the engine has stopped, the cranking control shall reset. 3. Supervisory Controls:

a. Overcrank: 1) When the cranking control system completes one cranking cycle (four

starting attempts), without starting the engine, the OVERCRANK signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) The cranking control system shall lock-out, and shall require a manual reset. b. Coolant Temperature:

1) When the temperature rises to the predetermined first stage level, the HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) When the temperature rises to the predetermined second stage level, which shall be low enough to prevent any damage to the engine and high enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns, the HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3) The difference between the first and second stage temperature settings shall be approximately -12 ˚C (10 ˚F).



263213-8

VERSION: 171018

4) Permanently indicate the temperature settings near the associated signal light.

5) When the coolant temperature drops to below 21 ˚C (70 ˚F), the "LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE" signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

c. Low Coolant Level: When the coolant level falls below the minimum level recommended by the manufacturer, the LOW COOLANT LEVEL signal light and audible alarm shall be energized.

d. Lubricating Oil Pressure: 1) When the pressure falls to the predetermined first stage level, the OIL

PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2) When the pressure falls to the predetermined second stage level, which shall be high enough to prevent damage to the engine and low enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns, the OIL PRESSURE - SECOND STAGE signal light and the audible alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3) The difference between the first and second stage pressure settings shall be approximately 15% of the oil pressure.

4) The pressure settings near the associated signal light shall be permanently displayed so that the running oil pressure can be compared to the target (setpoint) value.

e. Overspeed: 1) When the engine RPM exceeds the maximum RPM recommended by the

manufacturer of the engine, the engine shall stop. 2) Simultaneously, the OVERSPEED signal light and the audible alarm shall be

energized. f. Reset Alarms and Signals:

Overcrank, Coolant Temperature, Coolant Level, Oil Pressure, and Overspeed signal lights and the associated audible alarms shall require manual reset. A momentary-contact silencing switch and push-button shall silence the audible alarm by using relays or solid state devices to seal in the audible alarm in the de-energized condition. Elimination of the alarm condition shall automatically release the sealed-in circuit for the audible alarm so that it will be automatically energized again when the next alarm condition occurs. The signal lights shall require manual reset after elimination of the condition which caused them to be energized. Install the audible alarm just outside the engine generator in a location as directed by the owner. Alarm shall also be provided in the fire station (Location to be determined by Owner’s representative). The audible alarm shall be rated for 85 dB at 3 M (10 feet).

i. Generator Breaker Signal Light: 1) A flashing green light shall be energized when the engine generator circuit

breaker is in the open or tripped position. 2) Simultaneously, the audible alarm shall be energized.

4. Monitoring Devices: a. Electric type gauges for the cooling water temperatures and lubricating oil

pressures. These gauges may be engine mounted with proper vibration isolation.

b. A running time indicator, totalizing not fewer than 9,999 hours, and an electric type tachometer.

c. A voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, kilowatt meter, manual adjusting knob for the output voltage, and the other items shown on the drawings shall be mounted on the front of the generator control panels.



263213-9

VERSION: 171018

d. Install potential and current transformers as required. e. Visual Indications:

1) OVERCRANK 2) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE 3) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND STAGE 4) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE 5) OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE 6) OIL PRESSURE - SECOND STAGE 7) LOW COOLANT LEVEL 8) GENERATOR BREAKER 9) OVERSPEED

f. Lamp Test: The LAMP TEST momentary contact switch shall momentarily actuate the alarm buzzer and all the indicating lamps.

5. Automatic Voltage Regulator: a. Shall correct voltage fluctuations rapidly and restore the output voltage to the

predetermined level with a minimum amount of hunting. b. Shall include voltage level rheostat located inside the control cubicle. c. Provide a 3-phase automatic voltage regulator immune to waveform distortion.

2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A. A remote annunciator panel shall be installed at location to be determined by Owner’s representative.

B. The annunciator shall indicate alarm conditions as required by NFPA 110.

C. Include control wiring between the remote annunciator panel and the engine generator. Wiring

shall be as required by the manufacturer.

2.11 SOUND-ATTENUATED ENCLOSURE

A. The engine generator and related equipment shall be housed in an outdoor weatherproof

enclosure. B. The enclosure shall be provided with a factory-installed and factory-wired panelboard, 20A 120V

receptacles, and compact fluorescent light fixtures with guards and switches.

C. Enclosure shall be weatherproof and sound-attenuated. Manufacturer to provide certifications

indicating that sound levels at the property line will satisfy applicable Local Ordinance. Sound ratings shall be based on full load condition of engine generator in a single unit operation condition.

D. Airflow configuration shall be intake through rear of unit, and discharge air horizontally out. E. The enclosure shall meet the following requirements:

1. Radiator exhaust outlet shall be ducted through the end of the enclosure, and discharged vertically.

2. All exterior surfaces shall be factory-painted with industrial enamel. 3. Unit shall have sufficient guards to prevent entrance by small animals. 4. Batteries shall fit inside enclosure and alongside the engine generator. Batteries under

the generator are not acceptable. 5. The muffler shall be mounted and thermally-insulated inside the enclosure.



263213-10

VERSION: 171018

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of the engine generator shall comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Mounting:

1. Support the base of engine generator on vibration isolators, each isolator bolted to the floor (pad), and the generator base bolted to isolator. Coordinate location of bolts with structural engineer prior to drilling.

2. Install sufficient isolators so that the floor bearing pressure under each isolator is within the floor loading specification.

3. Install equal number of isolators on each side of the engine generator's base. 4. Locate isolators for approximately equal load distribution and deflection per isolator. The

base of the engine generator shall be drilled at the factory for the isolator bolts. 5. Isolators shall be shipped loose with the engine generator. 6. All connections between the engine generator and exterior systems, such as fuel lines,

electrical connections, and engine exhaust system and air exhaust shroud, shall be flexible.

C. Connect all components of the generator system so that they will continue to be energized during failure of the normal electrical power supply system.

D. Install piping between engine generator and remote components of cooling, fuel, and exhaust

systems. E. Exhaust System Insulation:

1. Adhesive and insulation materials shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces from which loose scale and construction debris has been removed by wire brushing.

2. Fill all cracks, voids, and joints of applied insulation material with high temperature 2000°F insulating cement before applying the outer covering.

3. The installation shall be clean and free of debris, thermally and structurally tight without sag, neatly finished at all hangers or other penetrations, and shall provide a smooth finished surface.

4. Insulation and jacket shall terminate hard and tight at all anchor points. 5. Insulate completely from engine exhaust flexible connection through roof or wall

construction, including muffler.


A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized, factory-trained representative of the engine generator manufacturer to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, and to supervise the field tests.

B. When the complete engine generator system has been installed and prior to the final inspection,

test all components of the system in the presence of the Engineer and owner for proper operation of the individual components and the complete system and to eliminate electrical and mechanical defects.

C. Furnish lubricating oil, anti-freeze liquid, water treatment, rust-inhibitor, and load bank for testing

of the engine generator.



263213-11

VERSION: 171018

D. Visual Inspection: Visually verify proper installation of engine generator and all components per manufacturer’s pre-functional installation checklist.

E. Field Tests: 1. Perform manufacturer’s after-starting checks and inspections. 2. Test the engine generator for six hours of continuous operation as follows:

a. Two hours while delivering 100% of the specified kW. b. Four hours while the engine generator is delivering 80% of its specified kW

rating.



263213-12

VERSION: 171018

c. If during the 6-hour continuous test, an engine generator failure occurs or the

engine generator cannot maintain specified power output, the test(s) are null and void. After repair and/or adjustments, the test(s) shall be repeated at no additional cost to the owner until satisfactory results are attained.

3. Record the following test data at 30-minute intervals: a. Time of day, as well as reading of running time indicator. b. kW. c. Voltage on each phase. d. Amperes on each phase. e. Engine RPM. f. Frequency. g. Coolant water temperature. h. Fuel pressure. i. Oil pressure. j. Outdoor temperature. k. Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the engine generator. l. Sound levels at points identified by the owner demonstrating compliance with the

specified maximum levels. 4. Demonstrate that the engine generator will attain proper voltage and frequency within the

specified time limit from a cold start after the closing of a single contact. 5. Furnish a resistance-type load for the testing of the engine generator. Test loads shall

always include adequate resistance to assure stability of the loads and equipment during all of the testing operations. The test load kW rating shall not be less than 100% of the specified kW rating of the engine generator.

F. Starting System Test:

1. Demonstrate that the batteries and cranking motor are capable of five starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking each at 10-second intervals with the battery charger turned off.

G. Remote Annunciator Panel Tests: Simulate conditions to verify proper operation of each visual or audible indication, interconnecting

hardware and software, and reset button. H. Automatic Operation Tests: Test the engine generator and associated automatic transfer switches to demonstrate automatic

starting, loading and unloading. The load for this test shall be the actual connected loads. Initiate loss of normal source and verify the specified sequence of operation. Restore the normal power source and verify the specified sequence of operation. Verify resetting of controls to normal.

I. When any defects are detected during the tests, correct all the deficiencies and repeat all or part

of the 6-hour continuous test as requested by the Engineer (or owner) at no additional cost. J. Provide test and inspection results in writing to the Engineer.


A. After completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the engine generator(s) and control and annunciation components are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.



263213-13

VERSION: 171018

3.4 INSTRUCTIONS AND FINAL INSPECTIONS

A. Laminate or mount under acrylic resin a set of operating instructions for the system and install instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the engine generator at a location per the owner.

B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained technician for one 4-hour period for instructions to owner and Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the date requested by the owner.


Technical Specifications Section 263623 – Automatic Transfer Switches


263623-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 263623 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection, and testing of open-transition automatic transfer switches with bypass isolation.


A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS. B. A factory-authorized representative shall maintain a service center capable of providing

emergency maintenance and repair services at the project site within a 8 hour maximum response time.

1.3 FACTORY TESTS

A. Automatic transfer switches shall be thoroughly tested at the factory to ensure that there are no electrical or mechanical defects. Tests shall be conducted per UL standards. Factory tests shall be certified. The following factory tests shall be performed: 1. Visual inspection to verify that each ATS is as specified. 2. Mechanical test to verify that ATS sections are free of mechanical hindrances. 3. Insulation resistance test to ensure integrity and continuity of entire system. 4. Main switch contact resistance test. 5. Electrical tests to verify complete system electrical operation and to set up time delays

and voltage sensing settings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:


2. Include electrical ratings (including withstand), dimensions, weights, mounting details, conduit entry provisions front view, side view, equipment and device arrangement, elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams, factory relay settings, and accessories.

3. Complete nameplate data, including manufacturer's name and catalog number. 4. A copy of the markings that are to appear on the transfer switches when installed.

C. Manuals: 1. When submitting the shop drawings, submit companion copies of complete maintenance

and operating and maintenance manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams and information, such as telephone number, fax number and web sites, for ordering replacement parts.

2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of a final updated maintenance and operating manual to the Engineer.

a. Include complete "As Installed" diagrams that indicate all pieces of equipment and their interconnecting wiring.



263623-2

VERSION: 171018

b. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each piece of equipment, including "As Installed" revisions of the diagrams.

c. The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate installation, maintenance, operation, and testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-TRANSITION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. General: 1. Comply with UL, NEMA, NEC, ANSI, IEEE, and NFPA. 2. Automatic transfer switches are to be three (3) pole construction, electrically operated,

mechanically held open contact type, without integral overcurrent protection. 3. Automatic transfer switches shall be completely factory-assembled and wired such that

only external circuit connections are required in the field. 4. Ratings:

a. Phases, voltage, ampere rating, poles, and withstand current rating shall be as shown on the drawings.

b. Transfer switches are to be rated for continuous duty at specified continuous current rating on 60Hz systems.

5. Markings: a. Markings shall be in accordance with UL 1008. b. Markings for the additional withstand test specified below shall be included in the

nameplate data. 6. Tests:

Automatic transfer switches shall be tested in accordance with UL 1008. The contacts of the transfer switch shall not weld during the performance of withstand and closing tests when used with the upstream overcurrent device and available fault current specified.

7. Surge Withstand Test: Transfer switches utilizing solid-state devices in sensing, relaying, operating. 8. Housing:

a. Enclose automatic transfer switches in wall- or floor-mounted steel cabinets, with metal gauge not less than No. 14, in accordance with UL 508.

b. Finish: Cabinets shall be given a phosphate treatment, painted with rust-inhibiting primer, and finish-painted with the manufacturer's standard enamel or lacquer finish.

B. Automatic transfer switches shall include the following features:

1. Operating Mechanism: a. Actuated by an electrical operator. b. Electrically and mechanically interlocked so that the main contact cannot be

closed simultaneously in either normal and emergency position. c. Normal and emergency main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position

by the operating linkage upon completion of transfer. Release of the locking mechanism shall be possible only by normal operating action.

d. Contact transfer time shall not exceed six cycles. e. Operating mechanism components and mechanical interlocks shall be insulated

or grounded. 2. Contacts:

a. Main contacts: Silver alloy. b. Neutral contacts: Silver alloy, with same current rating as phase contacts.

3. Manual Operator: Capable of operation by one person in either direction under no load.



263623-3

VERSION: 171018

4. Sensing Relays: a. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-

ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100% of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98% of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90% and dropout at 85%.

b. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for three (3) seconds.

c. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100% of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90%. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100% of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95%.

d. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 15 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

e. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. f. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. g. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer switch

normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits. h. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal

Source Available." i. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency

Source Available." j. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so that

automatic transfer switch shall remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

k. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

l. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to fifteen (15) minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source. Contractor to coordinate setting with generator manufacturer recommendations.

m. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Programmable exerciser starts engine-generator(s) and transfers load to them from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine-generator(s) after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings shall be for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser shall also be provided with no transfer option, field set.

5. Controls: a. Control module shall provide indication of switch status and be equipped with

alarm diagnostics. b. Control module shall control operation of the automatic transfer switches.

6. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label either by color-code or by numbered/lettered wire markers. Labels shall match those on the shop drawings.

7. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices for communicating with remote annunciators, shall have open-protocol communication capability matched with remote device.

8. Auxiliary Contacts: a. Provide contacts as necessary to accomplish the functions shown on the

drawings, as specified herein, and as designated in other sections of these



263623-4

VERSION: 171018

specifications, as well as one spare normally open contact and one normally closed contact.

2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. The specified voltage decrease in one or more phases of the normal power source shall initiate the transfer sequence. The automatic transfer switch shall start the engine-generator(s) after a specified time delay to permit override of momentary dips in the normal power source.

B. The automatic transfer switch shall transfer the load from normal to emergency source when the

frequency and voltage of the engine-generator(s) have attained the specified percent of rated value.

C. Engine Start: A voltage decrease, at any automatic transfer switch, in one or more phases of the

normal power source to less than the specified value of normal shall start the engine-generator(s) after a specified time delay.

D. Transfer to Emergency: Automatic transfer switches shall transfer their loads from normal to

emergency source when frequency and voltage of the engine-generator(s) have attained the specified percent of rated value. Only those switches with deficient normal source voltage shall transfer.

E. Retransfer to Normal: Automatic transfer switches shall retransfer the load from emergency to

normal source upon restoration of normal supply in all phases to the specified percent or more of normal voltage, and after a specified time delay. Should the emergency source fail during this time, the automatic transfer switches shall immediately transfer to the normal source whenever it becomes available. After restoring to normal source, the engine-generator(s) shall continue to run unloaded for a specified interval before shut-down.

2.3 SPARE PARTS

Provide six control fuses for each automatic transfer switch with a different rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install the automatic transfer switch in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Anchor control and annunciator panel to wall. C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser.


A factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing. 1. Following completion of automatic transfer switch installation and after making proper

adjustments and settings, site tests shall be performed by the manufacturer’s representative in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to demonstrate that each automatic transfer switch functions satisfactorily and as specified. Advise Engineer of the site testing within five days prior to its scheduled date, and provide certified field test reports within 14 days following successful completion of the site tests. Test reports shall describe



263623-5

VERSION: 171018

adjustments and settings made and site tests performed. Minimum operational tests shall include the following: a. Insulation resistance shall be tested, both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate the interlocking sequence and operational function for each automatic transfer switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, re-transfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shut-down.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

At the final inspection in the presence of Engineer and Owner demonstrate that the complete auxiliary electrical power system operates properly in every respect. Coordinate this demonstration with the demonstration of the engine-generator(s).

3.4 TRAINING

Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for one 4-hour period to instruct Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including review of the operation and maintenance manual, on a date requested by the Owner. Coordinate this training with that of the generator training.


Technical Specifications Section 265100 – Interior Lighting


265100-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the interior lighting systems.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture (luminaire) designated on the LIGHTING

FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of fixture designation, submit the following information. 1. Material and construction details include information on housing, optics system and

lens/diffuser. 2. Physical dimensions and description. 3. Wiring schematic and connection diagram. 4. Installation details. 5. Energy efficiency data. 6. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IESNA Lighting

Measurements, testing and calculation guides. 7. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated

life (hours) and color temperature (degrees Kelvin). 8. Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor,

sound rating, system watts and total harmonic distortion (THD).

C. Manuals: 1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete

maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.

2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Engineer.

D. Certifications:

1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the Engineer:

a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)

A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 1598, as shown on drawings, and as specified.

B. Sheet Metal: 1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be

true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed.



265100-2

VERSION: 171018

2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.

3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner.

4. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the fixture is in the installed position, latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools.

C. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be

mounted to removable reflectors or wireway covers unless so specified. D. Lamp Sockets:

1. Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 542. Lamp holders for bi-pin lamps shall be of the telescoping compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion.

2. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures.

E. Recessed fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings. F. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall

be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

G. Metal Finishes:

1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication.

2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing.

3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.

H. Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

I. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic. 2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 1/8 inch [3.2mm] of average thickness. The

average thickness shall be determined by adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated thickness and dividing the sum by 2.

3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking.

J. Lighting fixtures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for installation in Class and Group areas as

defined in NFPA 70, and shall comply with UL 844. K. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps

with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are



265100-3

VERSION: 171018

prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures (not the lamp). Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.

2.2 BALLASTS

A. Linear Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V) electronic programmed-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit (T5 lamps only). 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less. 5. Ballast Factor: 0.87 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 6. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFT 18, Ch.1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

8. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled.

9. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp.

10. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 10% of rated lamp lumens.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic-programmed rapid-

start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less. 5. Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 6. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

8. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 10% of rated lamp lumens.

C. Ballasts for high intensity discharge fixtures: Multi-tap voltage (120- 480v) electromagnetic

ballast for high intensity discharge lamps. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.



265100-4

VERSION: 171018

5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise.

D. Electronic ballast for high intensity discharge metal-halide lamps shall include the following

features unless otherwise indicated: 1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp

ballasts. 2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). 3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less. 6. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment. 8. Protection: Class P thermal cut.

2.3 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY BALLAST

A. Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously at an output of

1400 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 5. Integral Self-Test: Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required

intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.

2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT

A. Complete, self-contained unit with batteries, battery charger, one or more local or remote lamp heads with lamps, under-voltage relay, and test switch. Comply with UL 924. 1. Enclosure: Shall be impact-resistant thermoplastic, which will protect components from

dust, moisture, and oxidizing fumes from the battery. Enclosure shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which installed.

2. Lamp Heads: Horizontally and vertically adjustable, mounted on the face of the unit, except where otherwise indicated.

3. Lamps: Shall be sealed-beam MR-16 halogen, rated not less than 12 watts at the specified DC voltage.

4. Battery: Shall be maintenance-free nickel-cadmium. Minimum normal life shall be 10 years.

5. Battery Charger: Dry-type full-wave rectifier with charging rates to maintain the battery in fully-charged condition during normal operation, and to automatically recharge the battery within 12 hours following a 1-1/2 hour continuous discharge.

6. Integral Self-Test: Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.



265100-5

VERSION: 171018

2.5 LAMPS

A. Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; and instant-start lamps

shall comply with ANSI C78.3. 2. Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376. 3. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color

temperature between 3500° and 4100°K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of greater than 70, average rated life of 20,000 hours, and be suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL1.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:

1. T4, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Long Twin-Tube Fluorescent Lamps:

1. T5, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature between 3500° and 4100°K, 20,000 hours average rated life.

D. High Intensity Discharge Lamps:

1. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.

2. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 °K. 3. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), and color temperature

4000 °K.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.

B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly. C. Lighting Fixture Supports:

1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling.

2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping. 3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect. 4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures:

a. Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structural members, or plaster frame at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into the ceiling system.

b. Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall independently support the fixture from the building structure at four points.

5. Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended ceilings:



265100-6

VERSION: 171018

a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to a grid ceiling system at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. The bolts shall be not less than 1/4 inch [6mm] secured to channel members attached to and spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members. Non-turning studs may be attached to the ceiling structural grid members or spanning channels by special clips designed for the purpose, provided they lock into place and require simple tools for removal.

b. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures shall be bolted to ceiling structural members at four points spaced near the corners of each fixture. Pre-positioned 1/4 inch [6mm] studs or threaded plaster inserts secured to ceiling structural members shall be used to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In lieu of the above, 1/4 inch [6mm] toggle bolts may be used on new or existing ceiling provided the plaster and lath can safely support the fixtures without sagging or cracking.

D. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing lighting

fixtures reinstalled under this project. E. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures

are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames, flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.

F. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section 26

05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. G. Exercise electronic dimming ballasts over full range of dimming capability by operating the control

devices(s) in the presence of the Engineer. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range. H. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy. Burn-in period to

be 40 hours minimum, unless a lesser period is specifically recommended by lamp manufacturer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. Replace any lamps and ballasts which fail during burn-in.

I. At completion of project, relamp/reballast fixtures which have failed lamps/ballasts. Clean

fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt/fingerprints during construction. Replace damaged lenses, diffusers and louvers with new.


Technical Specifications Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting


265600-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaires, poles, and supports.



1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:


2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaires, lamps, and accessories.

C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of operating and maintenance

manuals to the Engineer. Include technical data sheets, wiring and connection diagrams, and information for ordering replacement lamps, ballasts, and parts.

D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the

Engineer: 1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials are in accordance with the drawings

and specifications. 2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly installed

and tested.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Provide manufacturer’s standard provisions for protecting pole finishes during transport, storage, and installation. Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least 12 in [305 mm] above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown on the drawings and specified.

2.2 POLES

A. General:



265600-2

VERSION: 171018

1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. Finish shall be as specified on the drawings.

2. The pole and arm assembly shall be designed for wind loading as shown on drawings, with an additional 30% gust factor, supporting luminaire(s) and accessories such as shields, banner arms, and banners that have the effective projected areas indicated.

3. Poles shall be direct burial type designed for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 x 5 in [65 x 125 mm]. Handhole covers shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.

4. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite handhole openings, designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper wire.

5. Hardware and Accessories: All necessary hardware and specified accessories shall be the product of the pole manufacturer.

6. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings.

B. Types: 1. Concrete: Provide square tapered concrete poles with hollow core suitable as a raceway.

2.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Per UL 1598 and NEMA C136.17. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat, and safe cleaning and relamping.

B. Light distribution pattern types shall be as shown on the drawings. C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the drawings. D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic refractors,

unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

E. Lamp sockets for high intensity discharge (H.I.D) fixture shall have locking-type porcelain

enclosures in conformance to the applicable requirements of ANSI C81.61 and UL 496. F. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory. G. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable slip-fitters

with locking screws. H. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal. I. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on

drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. J. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast information.

2.4 LAMPS

A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed. B. Lamps shall be general-service, outdoor lighting types. C. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381.



265600-3

VERSION: 171018

2.5 METAL HALIDE CORE AND COIL BALLASTS

A. Shall be pulse start, linear reactor type for 208 volt luminaires and constant-wattage autotransformer (CWA) type for other voltage luminaires (if not otherwise specified).

B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply conductor. C. Power factor shall be not less than 90%. D. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variations of ±5% for linear reactor type and ±10% for

CWA, with a maximum 20% lamp wattage regulation spread. E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of 0˚ F F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer

recommendations.

2.6 METAL HALIDE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

A. Ballast shall be low-frequency electronic type, and shall operate pulse start and ceramic metal halide lamps at a frequency of 90 to 200 Hz square wave.

B. Ballast shall be labeled Type ‘1’ outdoor, suitable for recessed use, Class ‘P’. C. Ballast shall have auto-resetting thermal protector to shut off ballast when operating temperatures

reach unacceptable levels. D. Ballast shall have an end of lamp life detection and shut-down circuit. E. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.5 or less. F. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards. G. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.0. H. Input current THD shall not exceed 20% for the primary lamp. I. Ballasts shall have ANSI C62.41, category ‘A’ transient protection. K. Ballasts shall have power factor greater than 90%. L. Ballast shall have a Class ‘A’ sound rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Install poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper

position for luminaire location.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.



265600-4

VERSION: 171018

D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.


Verify operation after installing luminaires and energizing circuits.


Technical Specifications Section 270511 – Requirements for Communication Installations


270511-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 270511 - REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section, Requirements for Communications Installations, applies to all sections of Division 27.

B. Furnish and install communications cabling, systems, equipment, and accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of transformers, cable, and other items and arrangements for the specified items are shown on drawings.

1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. References to industry and trade association standards and codes are minimum installation requirement standards.

B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.

B. Product Qualification:

1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.

2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations where the products have been in operation before approval.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within eight hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.

1.4 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.

B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:

1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service.

4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.

E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:



270511-2

VERSION: 171018

1. The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The contractor shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the factory tests.

2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.

3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of the Government.

1.5 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, the connecting work and related components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.

1.6 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:

1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.

2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.

3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal.

4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.

1.7 WORK PERFORMANCE

A. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.

B. For work on existing stations, arrange, phase and perform work to assure communications service for other buildings at all times. Refer to Article OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

C. New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and carefully. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired to its prior conditions, as required by Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

D. Coordinate location of equipment and pathways with other trades to minimize interferences. See the GENERAL CONDITIONS.

1.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.

B. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the Government determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Government.

2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.



270511-3

VERSION: 171018

1.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install an identification sign which clearly indicates information required for use and maintenance of equipment.

B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

B. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage, or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.

C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings, and other data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.

D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.

1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".

2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and paragraph numbers.

3. Submit each section separately.

E. The submittals shall include the following:

1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.

3. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagrams.

4. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.

F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders, (manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.

2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives for the system or equipment.



270511-4

VERSION: 171018

3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.

4. The manuals shall include:

a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment.

b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.

c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.

d. Installation and maintenance instructions.

e. Safety precautions.

f. Diagrams and illustrations.

g. Testing methods.

h. Performance data.

i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and name of servicing organization.

j. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications.

G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.

H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of the following:

1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.

2. Each type of conduit and pathway coupling, bushing and termination fitting.

3. Raceway and pathway hangers, clamps and supports.

4. Duct sealing compound.

1.11 SINGULAR NUMBER

Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.

1.12 TRAINING

A. Training shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated specification.

C. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.

- - - E N D - - -

Technical Specifications Section 270526 – Grounding and Bonding for Communication Systems


270526-1

VERSION: 171018

270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of telecommunication installations for equipment operations.

B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made, supplementary, telecommunications system grounding electrodes.

C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS: General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 27.

B. Section 27 10 00, STRUCTURED CABLING: Low Voltage power and lighting wiring.

C. Section 26 41 00, FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION: Requirements for a lightning protection system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.

C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.

D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer:

1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and tested.


Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B1-2001 .................................... Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

B8-2004 .................................... Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

81-1983 .................................... IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System



270526-2

VERSION: 171018

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-2005 .................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)

D. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)

J-STO-607-A-2002 .................... Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

44-2005 ................................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83-2003 ................................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467-2004 ................................. Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-486B-2003 ...................... Wire Connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be permitted to be identified per NEC.

B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.

C. Isolated Power System: Type XHHW-2 insulation with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less.

D. Telecom System Grounding Riser Conductor: Telecommunications Grounding Riser shall be in accordance with J STO-607A. Use a minimum 50mm² (1/0 AWG) insulated stranded copper grounding conductor unless indicated otherwise.

2.2 GROUND RODS

A. Copper clad steel, 19 mm (3/4-inch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 feet) long, conforming to UL 467.

B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM GROUND BUSBARS

A. Provide solid copper busbar, pre-drilled from two-hole lug connections with a minimum thickness of 6 mm (1/4 inch) for wall and backboard mounting using standard insulators sized as follows:

1. Room Signal Grounding: 300 mm x 100 mm (12 inches x 4 inch).

2. Master Signal Ground: 600 mm x 100 mm (24 inches x 4 inch).

2.5 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.

B. Above Grade:

1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external tooth lockwashers.

2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts and nuts.



270526-3

VERSION: 171018

3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

A. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.

2.6 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS

Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch).

2.7 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS

At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.

2.8 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES

Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.

B. System Grounding:

1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers.

2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground the secondary neutral.

3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded.

C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.

3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service equipment.

B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):

1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made electrodes. Jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.

2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system.

F. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.



270526-4

VERSION: 171018

2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits.

H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).

2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.

3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors.

J. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

M. Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components. //See details on the drawings. //

3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS

When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.

B. In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the gases and suction piping, at the outlets, directly to the room or patient ground bus.

3.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

A. Bond telecommunications system grounding equipment to the electrical grounding electrode system.

B. Furnish and install all wire and hardware required to properly ground, bond and connect communications raceway, cable tray, metallic cable shields, and equipment to a ground source.

C. Ground bonding jumpers shall be continuous with no splices. Use the shortest length of bonding jumper possible.

D. Provide ground paths that are permanent and continuous with a resistance of 1 ohm or less from raceway, cable tray, and equipment connections to the building grounding electrode. The resistance across individual bonding connections shall be 10 milli ohms or less.

E. Below-Grade Grounding Connections: When making exothermic welds, wire brush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly cleaned the joint area. Notify the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling any ground connections.



270526-5

VERSION: 171018

F. Above-Grade Grounding Connections: When making bolted or screwed connections to attach bonding jumpers, remove paint to expose the entire contact surface by grinding where necessary; thoroughly clean all connector, plate and other contact surfaces; and apply an appropriate corrosion inhibitor to all surfaces before joining.

G. Bonding Jumpers:

1. Use insulated ground wire of the size and type shown on the Drawings or use a minimum of 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire.

2. Assemble bonding jumpers using insulated ground wire terminated with compression connectors.

3. Use compression connectors of proper size for conductors specified. Use connector manufacturer’s compression tool.

H. Bonding Jumper Fasteners:

1. Conduit: Fasten bonding jumpers using screw lugs on grounding bushings or conduit strut clamps, or the clamp pads on push-type conduit fasteners. When screw lug connection to a conduit strut clamp is not possible, fasten the plain end of a bonding jumper wire by slipping the plain end under the conduit strut clamp pad; tighten the clamp screw firmly. Where appropriate, use zinc-plated external tooth lockwashers.

2. Wireway and Cable Tray: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts. Install protective cover, e.g., zinc-plated acorn nuts on any bolts extending into wireway or cable tray to prevent cable damage.

3. Ground Plates and Busbars: Fasten bonding jumpers using two-hole compression lugs. Use tin-plated copper or copper alloy bolts, external tooth lockwashers, and nuts.

4. Unistrut and Raised Floor Stringers: Fasten bonding jumpers using zinc-plated, self-drill screws and external tooth lockwashers.

3.7 COMMUNICATION ROOM GROUNDING

A. Telecommunications Ground Busbars:

1. Provide communications room telecommunications ground busbar hardware at 950 mm (18 inches) at locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Connect the telecommunications room ground busbars to other room grounding busbars as indicated on the Grounding Riser diagram.

B. Telephone-Type Cable Rack Systems: aluminum pan installed on telephone-type cable rack serves as the primary ground conductor within the communications room. Make ground connections by installing the following bonding jumpers:

1. Install a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding between the telecommunications ground busbar and the nearest access to the aluminum pan installed on the cable rack.

2. Use 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers across aluminum pan junctions.

C. Self-Supporting and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment Rack Ground Bars:

1. When ground bars are provided at the rear of lineup of bolted together equipment racks, bond the copper ground bars together using solid copper splice plates supplied by the ground bar manufacturer.

2. Bond together nonadjacent ground bars on equipment racks and cabinets with 16 mm² (6 AWG) insulated copper wire bonding jumpers attached at each end with compression-type connectors and mounting bolts.

3. Provide a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper between the rack and/or cabinet ground busbar and the aluminum pan of an overhead cable tray or the raised floor stringer as appropriate.



270526-6

VERSION: 171018

D. Backboards: Provide a screw lug-type terminal block or drilled and tapped copper strip near the top of backboards used for communications cross-connect systems. Connect backboard ground terminals to the aluminum pan in the telephone-type cable tray using an insulated 16 mm² (16 AWG) bonding jumper.

E. Other Communication Room Ground Systems: Ground all metallic conduit, wireways, and other metallic equipment located away from equipment racks or cabinets to the cable tray pan or the telecommunications ground busbar, whichever is closer, using insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) ground wire bonding jumpers.

3.8 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE GROUNDING

A. Bond all metallic cable sheaths in multipair communications cables together at each splicing and/or terminating location to provide 100 percent metallic sheath continuity throughout the communications distribution system.

1. At terminal points, install a cable shield bonding connector provide a screw stud connection for ground wire. Use a bonding jumper to connect the cable shield connector to an appropriate ground source like the rack or cabinet ground bar.

2. Bond all metallic cable shields together within splice closures using cable shield bonding connectors or the splice case grounding and bonding accessories provided by the splice case manufacturer. When an external ground connection is provided as part of splice closure, connect to an approved ground source and all other metallic components and equipment at that location.

3.9 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

A. Bond the metallic structures of one cable tray in each tray run following the same path to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout this cable tray systems as follows:

1. Splice plates provided by the cable tray manufacturer can be used for providing a ground bonding connection between cable tray sections when the resistance across a bolted connection is 10 milliohms or less. The Subcontractor shall verify this loss by testing across one slice plate connection in the presence of the Contractor.

2. Install a 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper across each cable tray splice or junction where splice plates cannot be used.

3. When cable tray terminations to cable rack, install 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumper between cable tray and cable rank pan.

3.10 COMMUNCIATIONS RACEWAY GROUNDING

A. Conduit: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground metallic conduit at each end and to bond at all intermediate metallic enclosures.

B. Wireway: use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.

C. Cable Tray Systems: Use insulated 16 mm² (6 AWG) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 16 meters (50 feet).

3.11 GROUND RESISTANCE

A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.

B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not



270526-7

VERSION: 171018

less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided.

C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground resistance requirements.

D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for inspection.

3.12 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION

A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.

B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with mechanical pressure type ground connectors.

C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.

- - - E N D - - -

Technical Specifications Section 270533 – Raceways and Boxes for Communication Systems


270533-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 270533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to form complete, coordinated, raceway systems. Raceways are required for all communications cabling unless shown or specified otherwise.

B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway types specified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Bedding of conduits: Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

B. Mounting board for communication closets: Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY.

C. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations: Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

E. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building: Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

F. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 27: Section 27 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATIONS.

H. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents: Section 27 05 26, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the following:

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Size and location of panels and pull boxes

2. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.

3. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.

B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the // Resident Engineer // COTR // four copies of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been properly installed.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-05 ........................................ National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):



270533-2

VERSION: 171018

1-03 .......................................... Flexible Metal Conduit

5-01 .......................................... Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings

6-03 .......................................... Rigid Metal Conduit

50-03 ........................................ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

360-03 ...................................... Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit

467-01 ...................................... Grounding and Bonding Equipment

514A-01 .................................... Metallic Outlet Boxes

514B-02 .................................... Fittings for Cable and Conduit

514C-05 .................................... Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers

651-02 ...................................... Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

651A-03 .................................... Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit

797-03 ...................................... Electrical Metallic Tubing

1242-00 .................................... Intermediate Metal Conduit

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

TC-3-04 .................................... PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

FB1-03 ...................................... Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

SPEC WRITER NOTE: Coordinate with Section 27 10 00, STRUCTURED CABLING to insure that type THW insulation is not specified for use in 13 mm (1/2 inch) conduit.

A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 13 mm (1/2 inch) unless otherwise shown. Where permitted by the NEC, 13 mm (1/2 inch) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed lighting fixtures.

B. Conduit:

1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.

2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.

3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.

4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 105 mm (4 inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.

5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.

6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.

7. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene (PE).

8. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.

C. Conduit Fittings:

1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:



270533-3

VERSION: 171018

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.

a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.

b. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.

c. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted.

d. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.

e. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room.

2. Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:

a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminum fittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.

b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.

c. Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.

3. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:


b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.

e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.

4. Flexible steel conduit fittings:

a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.

5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:


b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.

c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.



270533-4

VERSION: 171018

b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

7. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.

8. Expansion and deflection couplings:

a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.

b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.

c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.

d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.

D. Conduit Supports:

1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.

2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.

3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12 gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel hanger rods.

4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt expansion.

E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:

1. UL-50 and UL-514A.

2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.

3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.

4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with surface style flat or raised covers.

F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.

G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape detectable type, red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATIONS CABLE BELOW”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Holes:

1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or beams. Obtain the approval of the // Resident Engineer // COTR // prior to drilling through structural sections.

2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the // Resident Engineer // COTR // as required by limited working space.

B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other communications raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00,



270533-5

VERSION: 171018

FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stop material.

C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install conduit as follows:

1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.

2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or doorways.

4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.

5. Mechanically continuous.

6. Independently support conduit at 8’0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical piping, or mechanical ducts).

7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and within 300 mm (1 foot) of each enclosure to which connected.

8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of debris, until wires are pulled in.

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.

10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.

11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.

13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.

B. Conduit Bends:

1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.

2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.

3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

C. Layout and Homeruns:

2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the // Resident Engineer // COTR //.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.

2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.



270533-6

VERSION: 171018

3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:

a. Where shown on the structural drawings.

b. As approved by the // Resident Engineer // COTR // prior to construction, and after submittal of drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.

4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm (3 inches) thick is prohibited.

a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.

b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one conduit diameter at conduit crossings.

c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.

5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.

B. Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:

1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:

a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.

b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.

2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:

a. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 1800 mm (six feet) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.

5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.

B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:

1. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.

2. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.

C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:

1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.

F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.

G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.

H. Painting:

1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section09 91 00, PAINTING.



270533-7

VERSION: 171018

2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using 50 mm (two inch) high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 6000 mm (20 foot) intervals in between.

3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are acceptable.

C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.

3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.

B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.

C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself, and 90 kg (200 pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars, angle supports, and similar items.

E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1. New Construction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the concrete.

2. Existing Construction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) bolt size and not less than 28 mm (1-1/8 inch) embedment.

b. Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) diameter with depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).

c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete ceilings.

F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and approved for the application.

I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.

J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.

K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.



270533-8

VERSION: 171018

L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining collars.

3.7 BOX INSTALLATION

A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:

1. Flush mounted.

2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.

B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in operations.

C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.

D. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".

3.11 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONDUIT

A. Install the communication raceway system as shown on drawings.

B. Minimum conduit size of 19 mm (3/4 inch), but not less than the size shown on the drawings.

C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.

D. All 100 mm (four inch) conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends. Size boxes per the NEC.

E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the floor and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the ceiling of the floor below.

F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter communication closets next to the wall and be flush with the backboard.

G. Were drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams.

H. All empty conduits located in communication closets or on backboards shall be sealed with a standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases and to meet fire resistance requirements.

I. Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of communication conduit bends shall be as follows (special long radius):



270533-9

VERSION: 171018

Sizes of Conduit

Trade Size

Radius of Conduit Bends

mm, Inches

3/4 150 (6)

1 230 (9)

1-1/4 350 (14)

1-1/2 430 (17)

2 525 (21)

2-1/2 635 (25)

3 775 (31)

3-1/2 900 (36)

4 1125 (45)

J. Furnish and install 19 mm (3/4 inch) thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section 06 10 00, ROUGH CARPENTRY on the wall of communication closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood with the bottom edge 300 mm (one foot) above the finished floor.

K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).

- - - E N D - - -

Technical Specifications Section 283100 – Fire Detection and Alarm


283100-1

VERSION: 171018

SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified. The fire alarm system shall not be combined with other systems such as building automation, energy management, security, etc.

B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of the Florida Fire Prevention Code and NFPA

72. C. Fire alarm signals:

1. Building(s) shall have a general evacuation fire alarm signal to notify all occupants in the building to evacuate.

D. Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by device

not reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control unit located as indicated on the drawings.

E. The main fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central

station using a digital alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.

1.2 SCOPE

A. A fully addressable fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.

B. Basic Performance:

1. Alarm and trouble signals from building fire alarm control panel shall be digitally encoded by UL listed electronic devices onto a multiplexed communication system.

2. Response time between alarm initiation (contact closure) and recording at the main fire alarm control unit (appearance on alphanumeric read out) shall not exceed 5 seconds.

3. Initiating device circuits (IDC) shall be wired SLC Class “B”, Style 3 or higher in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. Signaling line circuits (SLC) within building shall be wired SLC Class “B”, Style 3 or higher in accordance with NFPA 72. Individual signaling line circuits shall be limited to covering 22,500 square feet (2,090 square meters) of floor space or 3 floors whichever is less.

5. Notification appliance circuits (NAC) shall be wired NAC Class “B”, Style Y in accordance with NFPA 72.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit 5 copies in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.



283100-2

VERSION: 171018

B. Drawings: 1. Prepare drawings and include all contractor’s information. Bid drawing files on will not be

provided to the Contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical dimensions shown on the drawings.

2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.

3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring Styles on the riser diagram for all circuits.

4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment configuration.

5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer one (1) set of as-built drawings. As-built drawings (floor plans) shall show all new conduit used for the fire alarm system.

C. Manuals:

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.

a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion and maintenance.

b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.

c. Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including the input/output matrix chart.

d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.

e. Provide standby battery calculations under normal operating and alarm modes. f. Include information indicating who will provide emergency service and perform

post contract maintenance. g. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of

recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.

h. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule for all equipment. The schedule shall be provided on disk in a computer format acceptable to the Owner and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of all equipment. The schedule shall include the required times for systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all equipment. A print out of the schedule shall also be provided in the manual. Provide the disk in a pocket within the manual.



283100-3

VERSION: 171018

i. Furnish manuals in 3 ring loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder. j. A print out for all devices proposed on each signaling line circuit with spare

capacity indicated. 2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver 4 copies of the final updated maintenance and

operating manual to the Architect/Engineer. a. The manual shall be updated to include any information necessitated by the

maintenance and operating manual approval. b. Complete "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included that

shows all items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring. Show all final terminal identifications.

c. Complete listing of all programming information, including all control events per device including an updated input/output matrix.

d. Certificate of Installation as required by NFPA 72 for each building. The certificate shall identify any variations from the National Fire Alarm Code.

e. Certificate from equipment manufacturer assuring compliance with all manufacturers installation requirements and satisfactory system operation.

D. Certifications:

1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s representative who makes the certification.

2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components being furnished are compatible with the control unit.

3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72 requirements.

1.5 WARRANTY

All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall certify that the installation complies with all manufacturers’ requirements and that satisfactory total system operation has been achieved.

2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIRE

A. Conduit shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS and as follows: 1. All new conduits shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area. 3. All new conduits shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.



283100-4

VERSION: 171018

B. Wire:

1. Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.

2. Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded unless specifically accepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer in writing.

3. Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional power surge protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals due to lightning, voltage and current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements.

4. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be listed for wet locations.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:

1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements. 2. All boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70. 3. Covers shall be painted red, and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for

junction boxes and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) high.

4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70. Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.

5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at the base of each riser.

2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General: 1. Each building shall be provided with a fire alarm control unit and shall operate as a

supervised zoned fire alarm system. 2. Each power source shall be supervised from the other source for loss of power. 3. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity. 4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main

power failure, grounds and system wiring derangement. 5. Transmit digital alarm information to the main fire alarm control unit.

B. Enclosure: 1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface

mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for the system.

C. Power Supply:

1. The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated supply connected to the emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the standby battery and charger.

2. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit. 3. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or

voltage and current transients.



283100-5

VERSION: 171018

D. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification

appliance circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off switch.

E. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves

(PIV), and main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals.

F. Trouble signals:

1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching). 2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.

G. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system: 1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to

the main fire alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is in the off position.

2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position.

3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.

4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The system shall lock in alarm until reset.

5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the indicator lamps.

6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein.

7. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these devices.

H. Remote Transmissions:

1. Provide capability and equipment for transmission of alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to the main fire alarm control unit.

2. Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to such as timing, operation and other required features.

I. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded

in the future (to include the addition of 20 percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply.

2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLY

A. Batteries: 1. Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal. 2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 24

hours plus 5 minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell, upon a normal AC power failure.



283100-6

VERSION: 171018

3. Battery racks shall be steel with an alkali-resistant finish.

B. Battery Charger: 1. Shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining the battery

fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate from a 120-volt, 60 hertz emergency power source.

2. Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48 hours while simultaneously supplying any loads connected to the battery.

3. Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger. 4. Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC sides. 5. A trouble condition shall actuate the fire alarm trouble signal. 6. Charger shall have automatic AC line voltage regulation, automatic current-limiting

features, and adjustable voltage controls.

2.5 ANNUNCIATION

A. Annunciator, Alphanumeric Type (System): 1. Shall be a supervised, LCD display containing a minimum of 2 lines of 40 characters for

alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. Message shall identify building number, floor, zone, etc on the first line and device

description and status (pull station, smoke detector, waterflow alarm or trouble condition) on the second line.

3. The initial alarm received shall be indicated as such. 4. A selector switch shall be provided for viewing subsequent alarm messages. 5. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application.

2.7 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Bells: 1. Shall be electric, single-stroke or vibrating, heavy-duty, under-dome, solenoid type. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be 6 inches (150 mm) diameter and have

a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm). 3. Mount on removable adapter plates on outlet boxes. 4. Bells located outdoors shall be weatherproof type with metal housing and protective

grille. 5. Each bell circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.

B. Strobes: 1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other

areas with a flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72).

2. Backplate shall be red with 1/2 inch (13 mm) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.

3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity. 4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.

C. Fire Alarm Horns: 1. Shall be electric, utilizing solid state electronic technology operating on a nominal 24

VDC. 2. Shall be a minimum nominal rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet (3,000 mm). 3. Mount on removable adapter plates on conduit boxes. 4. Horns located outdoors shall be of weatherproof type with metal housing and protective

grille.



283100-7

VERSION: 171018

5. Each horn circuit shall have a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity.

2.8 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES

A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations: 1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type. 2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or

high impact plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type. 3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions

provided on front in raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE." 4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever

shall lock in alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or conducting tests and drills.

5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable finish.

B. Smoke Detectors:

1. Smoke detectors shall be photoelectric type and UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished.

2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 72.

3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing position.

4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type. 5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The

sensitivity of any photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot.

6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors, along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.

C. Water Flow and Pressure Switches:

1. Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler systems shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting interface device.

2. All new water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and non-accumulative retard type.

3. All new switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall be recorded and documented during testing.

D. Extinguishing System Connections:

1. Kitchen Range Hood and Duct Suppression Systems: a. Each suppression system shall be equipped with a micro-switch connected to the

building fire alarm control unit. Discharge of a suppression system shall automatically send a alarm signal to the building fire detection and alarm system for annunciation.

b. Operation of this suppression system shall also automatically shut off all sources of fuel and heat to all equipment requiring protection under the same hood.



283100-8

VERSION: 171018

2. Each gaseous suppression system shall be monitored for system alarm and system trouble conditions via addressable interface devices.

2.9 SUPERVISORY DEVICES

A. Duct Smoke Detectors: 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting

interface device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.

2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION".

3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position.

B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:

1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.

2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. 3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of

address reporting interface device. 4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that

shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves.

5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.

6. Where dry-pipe sprinkler systems are installed, high and low air pressure switches shall be provided and monitored by way of an address reporting interface devices.

2.10 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the building fire alarm panel. B. Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both alarm and

trouble conditions. C. Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they are

reporting from and the device that they are monitoring. D. Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are connected. E. Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building.

2.11 UTILITY LOCKS AND KEYS:

A. All key operated test switches, control units, annunciator panels and lockable cabinets shall be provided with a single standardized utility lock and key.



283100-9

VERSION: 171018

B. Key-operated manual fire alarm stations shall have a single standardized lock and key separate from the control equipment.

C. All keys shall be delivered to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit.

B. All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas

and may be exposed in unfinished areas. C. All new and exposed conduits shall be painted to match surrounding finished areas and red in

unfinished areas. D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush

mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. Exact locations are to be approved by the Architect/Owner.

E. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted with the bottom of the unit located 80 inches (2,000 mm)

above the floor or 6 inches (150 mm) below ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 36 inches (900 mm) clearance from side obstructions.

F. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1,050 mm) or more than 48 inches

(1,200 mm) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 60 inches (1,500 mm) of a stairway or an exit door.

G. Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) from

a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) from a valve. H. Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and

adjust to operate within 2 revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than 1/5 of the distance from its normal position.

3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION

A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations to occur: 1. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and flash all strobes in the building

in alarm until reset at the local fire alarm control unit in Building. 2. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire

department.

B. Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut down the ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate.

C. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure

switch, or fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.



283100-10

VERSION: 171018

3.3 TESTS

A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. Make all adjustments and tests in the presence of the Engineer.

B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection,

furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the Engineer. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been approved by the Engineer, the contractor may request a final inspection. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short

circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a

report listing all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds. 4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates. 5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.

B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment

shall repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. The demonstration shall be made in the presence of an Owner’s representative.

3.5 INSTRUCTION

A. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide instruction and training to the Owner as follows: 1. Six 1-hour sessions to engineering staff and central attendant personnel for simple

operation of the system. Two sessions at the start of installation, 2 sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.

2. Four 2-hour sessions to engineering staff for detailed operation of the system. Two sessions at the completion of installation and 2 sessions 3 months after the completion of installation.

B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten

"Sequence of Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the Owner. The sequence of operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder. When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as shown in NFPA 72.



283100-11

VERSION: 171018

C. Furnish the services of a competent instructor for instructing personnel in the programming requirements necessary for system expansion. Such programming shall include addition or deletion of devices, zones, indicating circuits and printer/display text.


Technical SpecificationsSection 323113 – Chain Link Fence & Gates


32 31 13 - 1VERSION: 171117

SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes industrial / commercial chain link fence and gates specifications:

1. Polymer coated steel chain link fabric2. Polymer coated galvanized steel framework and fittings3. Gates: swing4. Installation

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM F552 Standard Terminology Relating to Chain Link FencingB. ASTM F567 Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link FenceC. ASTM F626 Specification for Fence FittingsD. ASTM F668 Specification for Polymer Coated Chain Link Fence FabricE. ASTM F900 Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing GatesF. ASTM F934 Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated Chain LinkG. ASTM F1043 Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings of Steel Industrial Chain

Link Fence FrameworkH. ASTM F1083 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Welded, for Fence StructuresI. ASTM F1664 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming

Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain-Link Fence1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Shop drawings: Provide narrative for each location providing quantities of fence location

with dimensions, location of gates.B. Certifications: Manufacturers material certifications in compliance with the current ASTM

specifications.C. Material samples: When required, provide representative samples of chain link fabric,

framework and fittings.D. Specification Changes: May not be made after the date of bid.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer: Company headquartered in the United States having U.S. manufacturing

facility / facilities specializing in manufacturing chain link fence products with at least 5 years experience in the manufacturer of the products specified within the section.

B. Fence contractor: Company with demonstrated successful experience installing similar projects and products in accordance with ASTM F567 and have at least 5 years experience in successful installations of the products specified within the section.

C. Tolerances: Current published edition of ASTM specifications tolerances apply. ASTM specification tolerances supersede any conflicting tolerance.



32 31 13 - 2VERSION: 171117

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN LINK FABRICA. Steel Chain Link Fabric: Industrial / Commercial Chain link fabric. Height is to match

existing fence.1. ASTM: F6682. Height: 10’ (field verify)3. Mesh size: 2”4. Wire: 9 gauge5. Wire Break Strength: 1290 lb ft. (5740 N)6. Polymer Coated Steel Fabric: Wire gauge specified is that of the metallic coated

steel core wirea. Class 2b fused and adheredb. Color: dark green per ASTM F934

7. Fabric Selection Table: Steel chain link mesh sizes and gauges produced in one-piece widths 3 feet (910 mm) to 12 feet (3660 mm).

8. Fabric selvage: Standard fabric selvage for 2 in (50 mm) mesh, 72 in. (1.8 m) high and higher is knuckle selvage at top and bottom, K&K.

2.2 ROUND STEEL PIPE FENCE FRAMEWORKA. Round steel pipe and rail: Schedule 40 standard weight pipe, in accordance with ASTM

F1083, 1.8 oz/ ft² (550 g/m²) hot dip galvanized zinc exterior and 1.8 oz/ft² (550 g/m²) hot dip galvanized zinc interior coating. Regular Grade: Minimum steel yield strength 30,000 psi (205 MPa)

Item Fence Height OutsideDiameterInches (mm)

Schedule 40*F1083Weight - lb/ft (kg/m)

F1043-ICWT-40Weight - lb/ft (kg/m)

Line post 8 to 12 ft. (2.4 to 3.7 m)

2.875 (73.0) 5.79 (8.6) 4.64 (6.91)

Terminalpost

8 to 12 ft. (2.4 to 3.7 m)

4.000 (101.6) 9.11 (13.6) 6.56 (9.78)

Rails 1.660 (42.2) 2.27 (3.4) 1.84 (2.74)

*Regular Grade – ASTM F1083 - Schedule 40B. Polymer Coated Pipe: Polymer coated pipe shall have a PVC or Polyolefin coating

fused and adhered to the exterior zinc coating of the galvanized pipe in accordance with ASTM F1043. The minimum thickness of the PVC or Polyolefin coating shall be 10-mils (0.254 mm), for polyester 3 mils (0.0076 mm). Color to match fabric dark green per ASTM F934.



32 31 13 - 3VERSION: 171117

2.3 TENSION WIREA. Polymer Coated Steel Tension Wire: 7 gauge (0.177 in.) (4.50 mm) wire complying with

ASTM F1664. Wire gauge specified is the core wire gauge. Class 2b fused and adhered polymer Coated wire with dark green color per ASTM F934.

2.4 FITTINGSA. Tension and Brace Bands: Galvanized pressed steel complying with ASTM F626,

minimum steel thickness of 12 gauge (0.105 in.) (2.67 mm), minimum width of 3/4 in. (19 mm) and minimum zinc coating of 1.20 oz/ft² (366 g/m²). Secure bands with 5/16 in. (7.94 mm) galvanized steel carriage bolts.

B. Terminal Post Caps, Line Post Loop Tops, Rail and Brace Ends, Boulevard Clamps, Rail Sleeves: In compliance to ASTM F626, pressed steel galvanized after fabrication having a minimum zinc coating of 1.20 oz per ft² (366 g/m²).

C. Truss Rod Assembly: In compliance with ASTM F626, 3/8 in. (9.53 mm) diameter steel truss rod with a pressed steel tightener, minimum zinc coating of 1.2 oz per ft² (366 g/m²), assembly capable of withstanding a tension of 2,000 lbs. (970 kg).

D. Tension Bars: In compliance with ASTM F626. Galvanized steel one-piece length 2 in. (50 mm) less than the fabric height. Minimum zinc coating 1.2 oz. /ft² (366 g/m²). Bars for 2 in. (50 mm) and 1 ¾ in. (44 mm) mesh shall have a minimum cross section of 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) by 3/4 in. (19 mm).

E. Polymer Coated Color Fittings: In compliance with ASTM F626, PVC or Polyolefincoating minimum thickness 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) fused and adhered to the zinc coated fittings. Match color to fence system.

2.5 TIE WIRE and HOG RINGSA. Polymer coated, match the coating, class, and color to that of the chain link fabric.2.6 SWING GATESA. Swing Gates: Galvanized steel pipe welded fabrication in compliance with ASTM F900.

1. Gate frame members 1.900 in. OD (48.3 mm) ASTM F 1083 schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Frame members spaced no greater than 8 ft. (2440 mm) apart vertically and horizontally. Welded joints protected by applying zinc-rich paint in accordance with ASTM Practice A780. Positive locking gate latch,pressed steel galvanized after fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron or heavy gauge pressed steel post and frame hinges. Provide lockable drop bar and gate holdbacks with double gates.

2. Gateposts per ASTM F1083 schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Gatepost diameter and weight as indicated in the following table.

Gateposts

Gate leaf width Post O.D. Post Weight

up to 6 ft. (1.8 m) 2.875 in. (73.0 mm) 5.79 lb/ft (8.6 kg/m)

over 6 ft. to 12 ft. (1.8 to 3.7 m) 4.000 in. (101.6 mm) 9.11 lb/ft (13.6 kg/m)



32 31 13 - 4VERSION: 171117

over 12 ft. to 18 ft. (2.4 to 5.5 m) 6.625 in. (168.3 mm) 18.97 lb/ft (28.2

kg/m)

over 18 ft. to 24 ft. (5.5 to 7.3 m) 8.625 in. (219.1 mm) 28.58 lb/ft (42.5

kg/m)

3. Polymer coated gate frames and gateposts; match the coating type and color to that specified for the fence framework. Moveable parts such as hinges, latches and drop rods may be field coated using a liquid polymer touch up.

4. Gate Fabric: Match gate fabric to that of the fence systemB. Gateposts: Regular Grade ASTM F1083 Schedule 40 pipe

2.7 CONCRETEA. Concrete for post footings shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi. (17.2

MPa).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATIONA. Site Preparation:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for all surveys of existing conditions, layout,clearing, and removal of debris for any proposed work or any required clear areas adjacent to the fence.

B. Contractor shall remove existing 10' tall fencing fabric, haul off site, and dispose of properly.

C. Contractor shall remove existing line post, furnish and install new line post.

D. Contractor shall remove existing terminal post, furnish and install new terminal post.

E. Contractor shall remove existing top rail or bottom rail, furnish and install new rail.3.2 FRAMEWORK INSTALLATIONA. Posts: Posts shall be set plumb in concrete footings in accordance with ASTM F567.

Minimum footing depth, 24 in. (609.6 mm) plus an additional 3 in. (76.2 mm) depth for each 1 ft. (305 mm) increase in the fence height over 4 ft. (1220 mm). Minimum footing diameter four times the largest cross section of the post up to a 4.00” (101.6 mm)dimension and three times the largest cross section of post greater than a 4.00” (101.6mm) dimension. Top of concrete footing to be 6 inches (152 mm) below grade crowned to shed water away from the post. Line posts installed at intervals not exceeding 10 ft. (3.05 m) on center.

B. Top rail: When specified, install 21 ft. (6.4 m) lengths of rail continuous thru the line post or barb arm loop top. Splice rail using top rail sleeves minimum 6 in. (152 mm) long. Rail shall be secured to the terminal post by a brace band and rail end. Bottom rail or intermediate rail shall be field cut and secured to the line posts using boulevard clamps or brace band with rail end.

C. Terminal posts: End, corner, pull and gate posts shall be braced and trussed for fence 6



32 31 13 - 5VERSION: 171117

ft. (1.8 m) and higher and for fences 5 ft. (1.5 m) in height not having a top rail. The horizontal brace rail and diagonal truss rod shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F567.

D. Tension wire: Shall be installed 4 in. (101.6 mm) up from the bottom of the fabric. Fences without top rail shall have a tension wire installed 4 in. (101.6 mm) down from the top of the fabric. Tension wire to be stretched taut, independently and prior to the fabric, between the terminal posts and secured to the terminal post using a brace band. Secure the tension wire to each line post with a tie wire.

3.3 CHAIN LINK FABRIC INSTALLATION A. Chain Link Fabric: Install fabric to match the existing fabric side of the framework

maintaining a ground clearance of no more than 2 inches (50 mm). Attach fabric to the terminal post by threading the tension bar through the fabric; secure the tension bar to the terminal post with tension bands and 5/16 in. (7.94 mm) carriage bolts spaced no greater than 12 inches (304.8mm) on center. Chain link fabric to be stretched taut free of sag. Fabric to be secured to the line post with tie wires spaced no greater than 12 inches (304.8 mm) on center and to horizontal rail spaced no greater than18 inches (457.2 mm) on center. Preformed 9 gauge power-fastened wire ties shall be installed following ASTM F567: Wrap the tie a full 360° around the post or rail and fabric wire picket, using a variable speed drill, twist the two ends together three full turns, cut off any excess wire and bend over to prevent injury. Secure the fabric to the tension wire by crimping hogs rings around a fabric wire picket and tension wire.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATIONA. Swing Gates: Installation of swing gates and gateposts in compliance with ASTM F 567.

Direction of swing shall match the existing gate to be replaced. Gates shall be plumb in the closed position having a bottom clearance of 3 in. (76 mm), grade permitting. Hinge and latch offset opening space shall be no greater than 3 in. (76 mm) in the closed position. Double gate drop bar receivers shall be set in a concrete footing minimum 6 in. (152 mm) diameter 24 in. (609.6 mm) deep. Gate leaf holdbacks shall be installed for all double gates.

3.5 NUTS AND BOLTSA. Bolts: Carriage bolts used for fittings shall be installed with the head on the secure side

of the fence. All bolts shall be peened over to prevent removal of the nut.3.6 CLEAN UPA. Clean Up: The area of the fence line shall be left neat and free of any debris caused by

the installation of the fence.

END OF SECTION 32 31 13

Technical SpecificationsSection 328400 – Planting Irrigation

Project No. 1622Plant City Fire Station 3

100% SUBMITTAL

Page 1 of 12

SECTION 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. Scope:

1. The Work specified in this Section consists of the furnishing of all labor, drawings, transportation, materials and equipment necessary to install fully operational underground irrigation systems in proposed sod and landscape areas.

2. Obtain all permits and pay all required fees to any regulatory agency having jurisdiction over the work. Inspections required by local ordinances during the course of construction shall be scheduled as required. On completion of the work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect to show that all work has been installed in accordance with the ordinances and code requirements.

3. Submit unit price breakdowns as required for all irrigation components in the event additional areas will be added or deleted. This submittal shall be included with the Bid.

4. If any error or discrepancy is found in the Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall refer the same to the Landscape Architect for an interpretation and decision. In resolving conflicts between the Plans and Specifications, THE PLANS SHALL GOVERN over the Specifications. The Owner’s representative shall have the right to correct apparent errors or omissions in the Plans and Specifications and to make such interpretations as deemed necessary for the proper fulfillment of the intent of the Plans and Specifications.

5. Contractor to verify the required meters, backflow prevention devices, water supply, water pressure, development fees, point of connection installation fees, and local code requirements prior to bidding. Contractor shall pay all fees required for installation of the point of connection and shall coordinate installation with the regulatory agency which has jurisdiction over the work.

B. Related Work1. Section - Planting Soils2. Section - Sodding3. Section - Planting

1.2 DRAWINGSA. The Drawings indicate areas of proposed landscaping. All landscaped areas including sod

areas and proposed landscaping will be irrigated, unless otherwise noted on the plans. See limit of work on the plan sheets. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, proposed planting, and existing trees to remain. Deviations shall be brought to the Landscape Architect’s attention.

B. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of this work and plan his operations accordingly, furnishing all offsets, fittings and sleeves which may be required.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other trades to preclude any potential conflicts and to coordinate construction scheduling.

D. All materials and methods called for on the Drawings by notes and/or details, and/or as required to form a complete operational system shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in these specifications.

E. Any obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to construction. In the event that notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any and all revisions necessary.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 2 of 12

F. Irrigation plans are schematic only. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for any changes proposed to the plans as provided.

G. Contractor to provide as-built plans of all newly installed material, including bubblers, sprayheads, rotors, valves, pipes, meters and controllers at 20 scale on standard 24x36 plan sheets

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves.

B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs, above and below ground utility structures, and light standards.

C. Irrigation system using reclaimed water shall be designed to comply with S62-610FAC regarding cross connection, signage, color codes and misapplication of the water.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. General:

1. Forward submittals in sufficient time to permit proper consideration and approval action. Time submissions to assure adequate lead time for procurement required items. Delays attributed to untimely and rejected submittals will not serve as a basis for extending contract time for completion.

2. Materials, fabricated articles and the like shall match those of approved submittals.3. Wherever the terms “approve,” “approval” or “approved” are used in this Specification,

they shall mean the approval of the Landscape Architect of record in writing, and that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications on the basis of the product data, shop drawings, project record documents, samples, or operations and maintenance manuals submitted.

B. Product Data:1. Submit three (3) copies of all items herein specified for review and approval by the

Landscape Architect. Include information sufficient to evidence full compliance with specification requirements. After item has been approved, no change in brand or make will be permitted. The submittals shall include the following:a. Each type of pipe and size (lateral, electrical conduit, sleeving and other). b. Each type of fitting and size lateral conduit and other).c. Each wire type (power, communication, control valve).d. Each controller, required components (grounding, lightning protection) and

accessories. e. Irrigation Controller(s) and accessories (decoders, surge protection, and other)f. Each type of nozzle, sprayhead ,and rotor g. Each valve type and size (control).h. Each type and size valve box.i. PVC cement, primer and Teflon tape.j. Quick coupler, key and hose connector.k. Detector tape.l. Rain Sensor.m. Backflow Prevention Devicen. Booster Pump (if required)

C. Record Copy Drawings: During the course of installation, carefully show all field changes in red line on a print of the irrigation system as installed. This drawing shall be labeled “Record Copy”, and shall be made available for inspection.

D. Upon completion of the work of this section and as a condition of its acceptance, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner’s Representative the following:



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 3 of 12

1. As-Built Drawings: Submit three prints and one reproducible and electronic file (PDF) of as-built drawings. As-built drawings shall clearly show all original components of the Record Copy and all changes documented in the Record Copy. Main lines, drain valves, valve boxes, and valve markers and other buried equipment shall be positively located by a minimum of two dimensions each from fixed reference points. In addition, the following information shall be included for any Drip or Low Volume Irrigation systems:a. Emitter schedule (number of emitters per plant type)b. Emitter layout charts.

2. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Prepare and deliver to the Landscape Architect within fourteen (14) calendar days prior to completion of construction, a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following:a. Contractor’s name, address and telephone number.b. Catalog cuts of all irrigation materials installed.c. The duration of the guarantee period.d. The name and address of the local manufacturer’s representative.e. List and description of complete operating instructions and routine maintenance

procedures, start-up, and recommended schedule of operation including average application rates, with seasonal adjustments for each zone.

f. Provide maintenance personnel with instruction for major equipment and provide evidence this service has been rendered in writing to the Landscape Architect at conclusion of project construction.

g. Troubleshooting guide.h. Letter of warranty, dated as of the Final Inspection, shall be included in the

Operations and Maintenance Manual. 3. Controller Reference Chart: Submit one chart for each controller installed on site showing

the area covered by each sprinkler zone. The chart shall be a reduced copy of the as-built drawings, color coded to differentiate zone areas, sized to fit the controller door, and hermetically sealed between 20 mil. plastic sheets.

4. Supplemental Equipment: Submit two each of keys to the following: quick coupling valves, quick coupling valve lids, valve markers, manual drain valves, valve boxes, and controller cabinets.

1.5 OBSERVATION OF THE WORKA. The Owner’s Representative may inspect the work at any time. They may remove samples of

materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. Trenching, directional boring, and sleeving review.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Other manufacturers than those specified may only be substituted if approved by the Landscape

Architect. Any deviations from the specifications or design changes must be shown to comply with the system design intent and identify any necessary performance changes that are resultant from the deviation.

B. The Contractor shall store all PVC pipe and fittings out of direct sunlight and protect from physical damage.

C. The Contractor shall store and protect all specified components from adverse weather conditions until installation is complete.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 4 of 12

D. The Contractor shall handle all components as directed by the manufacturer’s handling and installation instructions. Damage from transportation or other handling of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

E. All local, municipal and state laws and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made part of these specifications and the Contractor shall carry out their provisions. Any specifications herein contained, shall not be construed to conflict with the above rules, regulations or requirements.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Inspection of the site: The Contractor shall inspect the site prior to construction and verify the

extent of work required. Commencement of construction by the Contractor designates acceptance of the site conditions apparent at outset.

B. The Contractor shall verify the locations of all exiting utilities, structures, and services before commencing work. The location of utilities, structures and services shown on these plans are approximate only. Any discrepancies between these plans and the actual field conditions shall be reported to the Owner’s Representative immediately.

C. Weather Limitations: Soil work shall be performed only when weather conditions do not detrimentally affect the quality of work.

D. Project Limits: Areas, as specified within which work is to be performed.

E. The Contractor shall protect all areas of work defined on the drawings and any existing on-site vegetation, structures, utilities, etc. All damage as a result of work under this contract shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of traffic control, barricades, safety guards, and any other structures or improvements necessary for the complete protection of the public.

F. The Contractor shall verify, locate and protect all existing utilities, vegetation, and features onand adjacent to the project site during construction and shall repair, at their own expense; all damage as a result of construction activities.

G. The Contractor shall, at all times, take adequate precautions to keep rock, dirt, gravel, debris, and all other foreign materials from entering piping, valves and other irrigation equipment.

H. All trenching or other work under the limb spread of any and all trees shall be performed by hand or by other methods so that no limbs or branches are damaged in any way. Trenching around existing plant material shall be performed by hand so as to minimize root disturbance. Buildings, walks, walls and other property shall be protected from damage. Open ditches left exposed shall be flared and barricaded by the Contractor.

I. The Contractor shall verify the “Point of Connection” for the irrigation system with the Owner’s representative prior to design of the system.

1.8 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.

B. Verify that sleeving and other conduits, of sizes and types specified, are installed as required.

1.9 GUARANTEEA. The Contractor guarantees that all new irrigation components installed, as part of this work shall

be free from defects in materials, design and workmanship for a period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 5 of 12

B. Upon notice from the Owner’s Representative of failure on any part of this equipment during the guarantee period, due to faulty installation procedures, new replacement parts shall be promptly furnished and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Damages to property or site improvements resulting from the failure of specified components shall be repaired promptly, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for grade settlement, and / or erosion of soil surfaces resulting from defects in irrigation installation throughout the specified warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTSA. Materials and equipment shall be new, delivered to site in original factory condition, and as

specified in the plans and this section.

B. Pipe bearing reclaimed water shall be purple colored or identified by other accepted method as described in S62-610FAC to differentiate reclaimed water from domestic or other water.

2.2 GALVANIZED PIPE

A. Galvanized pipe shall be threaded and hot dip galvanized standard steel pipe Schedule 30 standard weight.

2.3 GALVANIZED FITTINGS

A. Galvanized fittings shall be threaded and hot dip galvanized standard steel schedule 40 standard weight.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPEA. All plastic pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) continuously bearing the seal of the National

Sanitation Foundation, with the exception of polyethylene pipe specified as follows.1. Poly Chloride (PVC) pipe

a. Lateral Lines: PVC Class 200, Type 1, for non-potable use, NSF approved, solvent weld pipe meeting requirements of ASTM D2241-00.

b. Main Lines: PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40, for non-potable use.

c. Sleeves: PVC Class 200 pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241

B. Risers and Nipples: PVC, Type, Schedule 80 one piece, standard weight with molded threads, both ends, ASTM D1784-99a, D2464-99

C. Electrical Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 electrical conduit, standard weight, minimum 1-1/2 inch nominal diameter unless otherwise required.

D. Polyethylene Pipe and fittings: flexible, thick walled designed to withstand 400 psi burst pressure test. Quality and wall thickness equivalent to RainBird SP Series, or approved equal. Sized per manufacturer’s specified velocity tolerances.

E. Drip Tubing: Provide model and manufacturer shown on plans.

2.5 PLASTIC FITTINGSA. For Polyethylene Pipe: As specified by manufacturer of polyethylene pipe.

B. For PVC Class 200 Pipe: PVC Schedule 40 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2466-01.

C. For PVC Schedule 40 Pipe: Schedule 80 meeting the requirements of ASTM D2464-99 PVC.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 6 of 12

D. Manufactured Swing Joints ¾ inch (or greater in size shall be RainBird TSJ series or Hunter or approved equal).

2.6 PIPE JOINING COMPOUNDSA. Cement and Primer for Solvent Weld Joints: As recommended by manufacturer of PVC pipe.

B. Teflon Tape for Threaded Joints (PVC or galvanized): DuPont or approved equal.

2.7 ELECTRICAL CONTROL WIRE AND CONNECTORSA. Wire: 14 gauge direct burial wire, color coded as follows: red for zones; blue for master valve

and black for extras. Two black extra wires to be run to the furthest valve from controller in each direction. Wire splices shall be made at a common location, contained in a valve box and spliced using 3M DBY connectors. All wire to be brought to timer location with 6’ pigtail to facilitate hook-up.1. Provide 12 gauge white common wire for any runs over 100’.

B. Wire Connectors and Sealant: Use only 3M DBY Connectors. UL approved for direct burial. A valve box shall be used for all underground wire splices.

C. Install all above-ground wire runs and wire entries into buildings in conduit.

D. Power to controller is by contractor.

2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERA. Automatic Controller: Provide models and product types shown on plans. Controller shall have

ability for all zones to be fully operant and meet both normal and specified low volume system requirements and as required by site conditions.1. Controller shall be capable of a minimum of 2 start times per station per day and be

equipped with a minimum 7-day watering cycle2. Controller must be suitable either indoor or outdoor mounting. The Contractor shall

coordinate with the Owner’s Representative to identify location for Controller mount and provide appropriate, lockable cabinet for location.

2.9 BOOSTER PUMPA. Booster pump shall be housed in a sturdy, locking, weather-resistant case, furnished for

maximum exterior protection.

B. Booster pump (if required) shall be as indicated on the drawings, as manufactured by the following:1. RainBird2. Or approved equal

2.10 VALVES, FILTERS, PRESSURE REGULATORSA. Electric Valves: Provide models and product types shown on plans.

B. Master Valve: Provide models and product types shown on plans.

C. Gate Valves: Nibco Brass construction, female threaded on both sides, sized appropriate to source side delivery pipe, in line with electronic valve.

D. Manual Valves: Manufactured as follows: PVC Schedule 40 ball valves unless otherwise indicated.

E. Remote Control Valve(s): Normally closed 24 VAC solenoid actuated globe pattern, spring-loaded diaphragm type. The valve shall be pressure rated up to 200 psi at 150 degrees F.1. Provide models and product types shown on plans.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 7 of 12

F. Manual Drain Valve: ¾ inch size bronze angle valve with rising stem and cross type handle. Hammond, Buckner or approved equal.

G. Quick Coupling Valve: Provide models and product types shown on plans. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include one matching key(s).

H. Backflow Prevention Device: Verify local code requirements.

2.11 VALVE BOXESA. Plastic valve box with locking lid, sized to provide a minimum of 3 inches clear on all sides of the

valve to facilitate access, maintenance, repair or removal. Ametek, Carson, or approved equal.

B. Valve Boxes for Reclaimed Use shall be purple, and identified by accepted means as described in S62-610FAC to differentiate reclaimed water from other waters.

C. Wire splices not made at sprinkler valves and gate valves shall be placed in a Carson 920-12B10" round valve box with a Carson green lid or approved equal.

2.12 PIPING JOINING MATERIALSA. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick unless otherwise

indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.13 RAIN SHUTOFF DEVICEA. Manufacturer: Provide model and manufacturer shown on the plans.

1. The unit shall be mounted on an aluminum bracket with a thermoplastic housing and weather proof switch. Location and placement of this device shall be approved by the owner’s representative prior to installation.

2. Rainfall shutoff device shall meet State Code (FS373.62).

2.14 IRRIGATION HEADSA. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at

available water pressure.

B. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:1. Manufacturers: Heads shall be the size and type noted on the plans.

C. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:1. Manufacturers: Heads shall be the size and type noted on the plans.

D. Plastic, Pop-up Bubblers:1. Manufacturers: Heads shall be the size and type noted on the plans.

2.15 OTHER MATERIALSA. Rain Sensor: Provide model and manufacturer shown on plans and details.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 8 of 12

B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 3 inches maximum.

C. Valve Marker: Locking type RainBird, Weathermatic, Buckner or approved equal.

D. Manual Drain Valve key: Minimum length 30 inches

E. Tracer Wire: Alarmatape or approved equal.

F. Pipe Backfill: Clean, dry friable topsoil void of stones larger than 1” in diameter and other material deleterious to specified pipe. Soil shall be suitable for compaction to eliminate settlement conditions of specified finish grades.

G. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper irrigation system installation, shall be new and of first quality and must be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to installation on site.

H. Water Source:1. Existing Reclaim Water Line2. Water Meter – Per City’s Standards and Specs

I. Signage -Re-Use: signs and or labeling necessary for reclaimed water in accordance with FAC -S62-610.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Prior to all work of this section, the Contractor shall carefully inspect all previous installed work

and verify that all such work is complete to the point where specified installation may properly commence.

B. Verify that the irrigation system may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes, regulations, the referenced standards and manufacturer’s specifications.

3.2 TRENCHINGA. Stake out the location of each run of pipe, sprinkler heads, sprinkler valves and isolation valves

prior to trenching. Excavation shall be open vertical construction sufficiently wide to provide free working space around the work installed and to provide ample space for backfilling and tamping. Trenches for pipe shall be cut to required grade lines and compacted to provide accurate grade and uniform bearing for the full length of the line. The bottom of trenches shall be free of rock or other sharp- edged objects.

B. Minimum cover shall be 16" for mainline pipe and 16" for lateral line pipe. All pipe lines shall have a 6" minimum clearance from each other and from lines of other crafts. Minimum clearances shall conform with all applicable municipal and agency requirements. Backfill shall be compacted to undisturbed soils, and shall conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, lumps or other irregularities.

C. Hand Trench Work: Conduct under limb spread of trees or use other method so that no limbs or branches are damaged in any way. Maintain the trenching or excavation a minimum of twenty feet from the trunk of any existing tree or shrub.

D. Pavement/ Sidewalk Minor Sleeving: PVC sleeves shall be utilized beneath all sidewalk crossings. PVC laterals pipe sleeving shall be installed a minimum of 16”. Mainlines shall be a minimum of 16” and sleeves will be 24” below finish grade (36” below vehicular surfaces), and shall extend a minimum of 6” beyond edge of sidewalk.

3.3 PIPE INSTALLATIONA. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 9 of 12

1. Irrigation Mainline Piping: 16 inches.2. Lateral line Piping: 16 inches.3. Sleeves: 24 inches.4. Sleeves beneath vehicular traffic: 36 inches

B. Install thrust blocks and other bracing at all change in pipe directions and as necessary on all mainline piping.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Pipes conveying reclaimed water shall be separated from other piping or utility services by 3 feet horizontal distance. An 18 inch vertical separation shall be maintained where reclaimed lines cross other piping or utility services.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONSA. Solvent weld PVC pipe only during non- freeze weather. Solvent weld PVC pipes only under

cover in rainy weather. Do not allow flooding of welded piping until manufacturer’s cure time has elapsed.

B. Air temperature of PVC mating surfaces for plastic pipe and fittings shall be between 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.

C. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. Wrap with minimum of three wraps of Teflon tape in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

D. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for solvent welding of PVC pipe and fittings to achieve tight and inseparable joints.

E. Cementing plastic pipe:1. Cut all ends squarely with approved pipe cutting tool. Bevel ends with deburring tool.2. Clean all pipe ends prior to assembly.3. Clear all pipe lengths of dirt and debris. Protect from contamination.4. Do not use excess primer and solvent when joining pipe ends.5. Insert pipe ends to full depth of fitting, hold tightly as necessary to insure full depth

bonding.6. Allow 15 minutes curing time following joint assembly prior to moving or handling jointed

pipe.7. Install slip and/or barbed fittings for drip system components per manufacturers

specifications.

F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.

3.5 BACKFILLINGA. Initial backfill on PVC lines shall be pulverized native soil, free of foreign matter. Within radius of

4" of the pipe shall be clean soil or sand. Plant locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and pipe locations. Coordinate the placing of specimen trees and shrubs with the routing of lines and final head locations.

B. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement after the backfilling is completed. Clean the site of the work continuously of excess waste materials as the backfilling progresses, and leave in a neat condition. No trenches shall be left open for a period of more than 48 hours. Protect open trenches as required. Conform with all applicable code requirements.

C. Carefully backfill excavated materials approved for back-filling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and other approved materials, free of rock and debris over 1" in size. Backfill within all landscape beds shall be Prepared Topsoil.

D. Conform to the requirements of Earthwork Specifications for methods and required compacting percentages, for roads and paving.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 10 of 12

E. Hand place the first 6" of backfill or to top of pipe and mechanically compact so as to secure the position of the pipe and wire.

F. No wheel rolling will be allowed. Remove rock or debris extracted from backfill material and dispose of off site. Fill all voids left in backfill with approved backfill material.

3.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE INSTALLATIONA. Comply with state and local codes. Conceal in planting beds where possible.

3.7 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION CONTROLLER INSTALLATIONA. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications, and respective State and

Local codes. Coordinate controller location with Owner prior to installation.

3.8 WIRING INSTALLATIONA. Tracer Wires:

1. Install tracer wire on all nonmetallic (plastic) irrigation mainline.2. Place tracer wire on the bottom of the trench under the vertical position of the pipe.

Splice and solder joints and cover them with insulation type tape.3. Tracer wire shall follow the mainline pipe and branch lines and terminate in the valve box

with the control wires.

B. Remote Control Wiring:1. Provide one control wire and one common ground wire to service each valve in system.

Provide 30 inch minimum expansion loop at each valve to permit removal and maintenance of valves.

2. Install control wires and irrigation piping in common trench wherever possible.3. Control wire splices shall not be permitted on wire runs of less than 300 feet. All splicing

shall occur within valve or junction boxes. Splices shall be made waterproof by following manufacturer’s instructions for wire connections and sealant.

4. Numbering and tagging; Identify direct burial control wires from remote control valves to terminal strips of controller at terminal strip by tagging wire with number of connected valve.

3.9 VALVE INSTALLATIONA. Install as shown on drawings. Valve and valve box locations shall be located in a manner so as

not to interrupt plant massing or groups, hedge lines or otherwise alter the character of the proposed plantings.1. Place valves and valve boxes in low growing ground cover areas offset from adjacent

paving by a minimum of 2 times the specified groundcover spacing.2. In public areas where valve boxes may be readily visible to the public, verify their location

with Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

B. Install quick coupling valve as shown on drawings. Quick coupling valves shall be installed along mainline at intervals not exceeding 100 feet as to allow manual watering of landscape area with a 50 foot hose.

C. Drain Valves: Install one manual drain valve at all low points in mainline to allow for complete drainage of mainline.

D. Gate Valve: Install as shown on drawings and details.

E. Valves being reclaimed water shall be purple in color or identified by other accepted method as described in S62-610FAC in differentiate reclaimed water from domestic or other water.

3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 11 of 12

B. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

C. Install all sprinklers on flexible risers, using flexible polyethylene pipe or PVC swing joints.

D. Sprinklers located on slopes which are less than three percent shall be installed plumb. Those that are located on slopes greater than three percent shall be installed at an angle midway between plumb and perpendicular to the slope.

3.11 RAINFALL SHUTOFF DEVICEA. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations near the control equipment. Rain sensor shall be

installed on building fascia or parapet if at all practical. The rain sensor can also be placed on a wall but must extend out a minimum of 18 inches from the wall. Sensors can also be place on other stationary structures, such as posts or fences. The vertical area directly above the rain sensor shall be unobstructed to the sky and shall be installed above the height of sprinkler spray. Verify installation location with owner’s representative.

B. In systems pressurized by a pump, provisions shall be made to ensure shutoff device does not allow pump to activate.

3.12 SIGNAGE - RE-USEA. Provide all necessary signs and or labeling necessary for reclaimed water in accordance with

FAC - S62-610.

3.13 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22

Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches.

3.14 PRESSURE TESTINGA. Conduct test in presence of Owner’s Representative.

B. Test shall be conducted with backflow prevention, quick couplers, control valves and manual drain valves in place and prior to backfilling. Laterals will be visually inspected for proper solvent welds and leaks prior to backfilling but no pressure test will be required.

C. Correct defects and retest until Owner’s Representative approves.

D. Notify Owner’s Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance when requesting inspection of pressure test.

3.15 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust settings of controllers. Contractor shall calculate three irrigation programs: Spring / Early

Summer, Summer, Late Summer / Early Fall. System operation requirements shall be based on annual precipitation rates, plant material maturation requirements, solar exposure and topography and soil conditions. Submit seasonal controller program with as-built record drawings and include a laminated copy of program at controller location in controller cabinet. Include total application quantities in inches per week for all zones, for establishment and normal operation.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 12 of 12

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.

C. Balancing and Adjustment:1. Balance and adjust the various components of the system so the overall operation of the

system is most efficient. This includes a synchronization of the controllers, adjustments to pressure regulators, pressure relief valves, part circle sprinkler heads, and individual station adjustments on the controllers.

3.16 FINAL INSPECTIONA. Thoroughly clean, adjust and balance the installed irrigation system. Adjust spray pattern of

nozzles to reduce throw of water onto buildings, structures, vehicles, and paved surfaces. Monitor and re-adjust system operation until components operate continually as specified.

B. The Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Owner’s Representative to demonstrate satisfactory performance and coverage. The Contractor shall give the Owner’s Representative a minimum of 48 hours advance notice when requesting final inspection.

C. The Contractor shall demonstrate complete operation of the system, including controller operating program, start-up, and deliver all supplemental equipment to the Owner’s designated operating personnel.

3.17 MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTYA. The Contractor shall provide a one-year maintenance and warranty period. The warranty period

shall start on the day following the date of written acceptance of system installation by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Review site conditions and plant vitality on a monthly basis and adjust the watering schedule and components and necessary to maintain plant health.

C. Repair and adjust system throughout warranty period, and prior to turning maintenance schedule over to Owner’s operating personnel.


Technical SpecificationsSection 329100 – Planting Soil


100% SUBMITTAL

Page 1 of 15

SECTION 329100 – PLANTING SOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment, facilities,

transportation and services necessary for, and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of Planting Soil and /or the modification of existing site soil for use as Planting Soil, complete as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. The scope of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:1. Locate, purchase, deliver and install Imported Planting Soil and soil amendments.2. Fine grade Planting Soil.3. Install Compost into Planting Soil.4. Clean up and disposal of all excess and surplus material.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTSA. Shall consist of specifications, general conditions, and the drawings. The intent of these

documents is to include all labor, materials, and services necessary for the proper execution of the work. The documents are to be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any parts shall be as binding as if called for in all parts.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCESA. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division I specifications, apply to work of this section.

2. Related Specification Sectiona. Section – Irrigationb. Section – Soddingc. Section – Planting

B. References: The following specifications and standards of the organizations and documents listed in this paragraph form a part of the Specification to the extent required by the references thereto. In the event that the requirements of the following referenced standards and specification conflict with this specification section the requirements of this specification shall prevail. In the event that the requirements of any of the following referenced standards and specifications conflict with each other the more stringent requirement shall prevail.1. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials cited section numbers.2. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service, 2003. National

Soil Survey Handbook, title 430-VI. Available Online.3. US Composting Council www.compostingcouncil.org and

http://compostingcouncil.org/admin/wp-content/plugins/wp-pdfupload/pdf/191/LandscapeArch_Specs.pdf.

4. Methods of Soil Analysis, as published by the Soil Science Society of America (http://www.soils.org/).

5. Up by Roots: healthy soils and trees in the built environment. 2008. J. Urban. International Society of Arboriculture, Champaign, IL.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 2 of 15

1.4 VERIFICATIONA. All scaled dimensions on the drawings are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, the

Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and quantities, and shall immediately inform the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancies between the information on the drawings and the actual conditions, refraining from doing any work in said areas until given approval to do so by the Owner’s Representative.

1.5 PERMITS AND REGULATIONSA. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits related to this section of the work unless

previously excluded under provision of the contract or general conditions. The Contractor shall comply with all laws and ordinances bearing on the operation or conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that a conflict exists between permit requirements and the work outlined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing including a description of any necessary changes and changes to the contract price resulting from changes in the work.

B. Wherever references are made to standards or codes in accordance with which work is to be performed or tested, the edition or revision of the standards and codes current on the effective date of this contract shall apply, unless otherwise expressly set forth.

C. In case of conflict among any referenced standards or codes or among any referenced standards and codes and the specifications, the more restrictive standard shall apply or Owner’s Representative shall determine which shall govern.

1.6 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONA. The Contractor shall adequately protect the work, adjacent property, and the public, and shall be

responsible for any damages or injury due to the Contractor’s actions.

1.7 CHANGES IN WORKA. The Owner’s Representative may order changes in the work, and the contract sum adjusted

accordingly. All such orders and adjustments plus claims by the Contractor for extra compensation must be made and approved in writing before executing the work involved.

B. All changes in the work, notifications and contractor’s request for information (RFI) shall conform to the contract general condition requirements.

1.8 CORRECTION OF WORKA. The Contractor shall re-execute any work that fails to conform to the requirements of the

contract and shall remedy defects due to faulty materials or workmanship upon written notice from the Owner’s Representative, at the soonest possible time that can be coordinated with other work and seasonal weather demands but not more than 180 (one hundred and eighty)days after notification.

1.9 DEFINITIONSA. Acceptable drainage: Drainage rate is sufficient for the plants to be grown. Not too fast and

not too slow. Typical rates for installed Planting Soil are between 1 - 5 inches per hour. Turf soils are often higher, but drainage rates above 2 - 3 inches per hour will dry out very fast. In natural undisturbed soil a much lower drainage rate, as low as 1/8th inch per hour can still support good plant growth. Wetland plants can grow on top of perched water layers or even within seasonal perched water layers, but could become unstable in high wind events.

B. Amendment: material added to Topsoil to produce Planting Soil Mix. Amendments are classified as general soil amendments, fertilizers, biological, and pH amendments.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 3 of 15

C. Biological Amendment: Amendments such as Mycorrhizal additives, compost tea or other products intended to change the soil biology.

D. Compacted soil: soil where the density of the soil is greater that the threshold for root limiting, and further defined in this specification.

E. Compost: well decomposed stable organic material as defined by the US Composting Council and further defined in this specification.

F. Drainage: The rate at which soil water moves through the soil transitioning the soil from saturated condition to field capacity. Most often expressed as saturated hydraulic conductivity (Ksat; units are inches per hour).

G. End of Warranty Acceptance: The date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that the plants and work in this section meet all the requirements of the warranty. It is intended that thematerials and workmanship warranty for Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation (if applicable) work run concurrent with each other, and further defined in this specification.

H. Existing Soil: Mineral soil existing at the locations of proposed planting after the majority of the construction within and around the planting site is completed and just prior to the start of work to prepare the planting area for soil modification and/or planting, and further defined in this specification.

I. Fertilizer: amendment used for the purpose of adjusting soil nutrient composition and balance.

J. Fine grading: The final grading of the soil to achieve exact contours and positive drainage, often accomplished by hand rakes or drag rakes other suitable devices, and further defined inthis specification, and further defined in this specification.

K. Finished grade: surface or elevation of Planting Soil after final grading and 12 months of settlement of the soil, and further defined in this specification.

L. Graded soil: Soil where the A horizon has been stripped and relocated or re-spread; cuts and fills deeper than 12 inches, and further defined in this specification.

M. Installed soil: Planting soil and existing site soil that is spread and or graded to form a planting soil, and further defined in this specification.

N. Owner’s Representative: The person or entity, appointed by the Owner to represent their interest in the review and approval of the work and to serve as the contracting authority with the Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may appoint other persons to review and approve any aspects of the work.

O. Ped: a clump or clod of soil held together by a combination of clay, organic matter, and fungal hyphae, retaining the original structure of the harvested soil.

P. Planting Soil: Topsoil, or Planting Soil Mixes which are imported or existing at the site, or made from components that exist at the site, or are imported to the site; and further defined in this specification.

Q. Poor drainage: Soil drainage that is slower than that to which the plants can adapt. This is a wide range of metrics, but generally if the soil is turning grey in color it is reasonable preferable to either to plant moisture adaptive plants at smaller sizes that are young in age with shallow root balls or look at options to improve the drainage.

R. Scarify: Loosening and roughening the surface of soil and sub soil prior to adding additional soil on top, and further defined in this specification.

S. Soil Horizons: as defined in the USDA National Soil Survey Handbook http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/wps/portal/nrcs/detail/soils/scientists/?cid=nrcs142p2_054242.

T. Soil Tilling: Loosening the surface of the soil to the depths specified with a rotary tine tilling machine, roto tiller, (or spade tiller).



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 4 of 15

U. Subgrade: surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing Planting Soil.

V. Substantial Completion Acceptance: The date at the end of the Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation (if applicable) where the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in these sections is complete and the Warranty period has begun. This date may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project, and further defined in this specification.

W. Topsoil: naturally produced and harvested soil from the A horizon or upper layers or the soil as further defined in this specification.

1.10 SUBMITTALSA. See the contract General Conditions for policy and procedures related to submittals.

B. Submit all product submittals eight weeks prior to the start of the soil work.

C. Product data and certificates: For each type of manufactured product, submit data and certificates that the product meets the specification requirements, signed by the product manufacturer, and complying with the following:1. Submit manufacturers or supplier’s product data and literature certified analysis for

standard products and bulk materials, complying with testing requirements and referenced standards and specific requested testing.a. For each Compost product submit the following analysis by a recognized

laboratory:1) pH2) Salt concentration (electrical conductivity)3) Moisture content %, wet weight basis4) Particle size % passing a selected mesh size, dry weight basis5) Stability carbon dioxide evolution rate mg CO2-C per g OM per day6) Solvita maturity test7) Physical contaminants (inerts) %, dry weight basis8) US EPA Class A standard, 40CFR § 503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels Chemical

Contaminants mg/kg (ppm)2. For Coarse Sand product submit the following analysis by a recognized laboratory:

a. pHb. Particle size distribution (percent passing the following sieve sizes):

3/8 inch (9.5 mm)No 4 (4.75 mm)No 8 (2.36 mm)No 16(1.18 mm)No 30 (.60 mm)No 50 (.30 mm)No 100 (.15 mm)No 200 (.075 mm)

D. Samples: Submit samples of each product and material, where required by Part 2 of the specification, to the landscape architect for approval. Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. 1. Submit samples a minimum of 8 weeks prior to the anticipated date of the start of soil

installation.2. Samples of all Topsoil, Coarse Sand, Compost and Planting Soil shall be submitted at the

same time as the particle size and physical analysis of that material.

E. Soil testing for Imported and Existing Topsoil, existing site soil to be modified as Planting Soil and Planting Soil Mixes.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 5 of 15

1. Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting Soil Mix testing: Submit soil test analysis report for each sample of Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting Soil from an approved soil-testing laboratory and where indicated in Part 2 of the specification as follows:a. Submit Topsoil, Planting Soil, Compost, and Coarse Sand for testing at least 8

weeks before scheduled installation of Planting Soil Mixes. Submit Planting Soil Mix test no more than 2 weeks after the approval of the Topsoil, Compost and Coarse Sand. Do not submit to the testing laboratory, Planting Soil Mixes, for testing until all Topsoil, Compost and Coarse Sand have been approved.

b. If tests fail to meet the specifications, obtain other sources of material, retest and resubmit until accepted by the Owner’s Representative.

c. All soil testing will be at the expense of the Contractor.2. Provide a particle size analysis (% dry weight) and USDA soil texture analysis. Soil testing

of Planting Soil Mixes shall also include USDA gradation (percentage) of gravel, coarse sand, medium sand, and fine sand in addition to silt and clay.

3. Provide the following other soil properties:a. pH and buffer pH.b. Percent organic content by oven dried weight.c. Nutrient levels by parts per million including: phosphorus, potassium, magnesium,

manganese, iron, zinc and calcium. Nutrient test shall include the testing laboratory recommendations for supplemental additions to the soil for optimum growth of the plantings specified.

d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil water sample measured in Milliohm per cm.

e. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC).

1.11 OBSERVATION OF THE WORKA. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time. They may remove samples of

materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.1. The Owner’s Representative may utilize the Contractor’s penetrometer and moisture

meter at any time to check soil compaction and moisture.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’s Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. EXISTING SOIL CONDITIONS REVIEW: Prior to the start of any soil modification that will

utilize or modify the existing soil.2. EXCAVATION REVIEW: Observe each area of excavation prior to the installation of any

Planting Soil.3. COMPLETION of SOIL MODIFICATIONS REVIEW: Upon completion of all soil

modification and installation of planting soil.4. COMPLETION OF FINE GRADING AND SURFACE SOIL MODIFICATIONS REVIEW:

Upon completion of all surface soil modifications and fine grading but prior to the installation of shrubs, ground covers, or lawns.

1.12 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCEA. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days

before beginning work to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 6 of 15

1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall be a firm having at least 5 years of experience of a

scope similar to that required for the work, including the preparation, mixing and installation of soil mixes to support planting. 1. The bidders list for work under this section shall be approved by the Owner’s

Representative.2. Installer Field Supervision: When any Planting Soil work is in progress, installer shall

maintain, on site, an experienced full-time supervisor who can communicate in English with the Owner’s Representative.

3. Installer’s field supervisor shall have a minimum of five years experience as a field supervisor installing soil, shall be trained and proficient in the use of field surveying equipment to establish grades and can communicate in English with the Owner’s Representative.

4. The installer’s crew shall be experienced in the installation of Planting Soil, plantings, and irrigation (where applicable) and interpretation of planting plans, soil installation plans, and irrigation plans (where applicable).

5. Submit references of past projects and employee training certifications that support that the Contractors meet all of the above installer qualifications and applicable licensures.

B. Soil Testing / Amendments: Contractor shall conduct a soil test prior to application of any soil amendments, fertilizers and backfill mixtures. The results of the soil test shall be submitted to the owner’s representative and landscape architect for review prior to the application of said material. Contractor shall examine the soils of all planting areas prior to submitting bids for the suitability to sustain healthy plant growth as called for on the planting plan, details, and these specifications. The contractor shall bear all costs of testing soils, amendments, etc. associated with the work and included in the specifications. Submit certificates of inspection, as required by governmental authorities, and manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments, herbicides, insecticides and fertilizer materials, submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

C. Soil testing laboratory qualifications: an independent laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in USDA agricultural soil testing, Planting Soil Mixes, and the types of tests to be performed. Geotechnical engineering testing labs shall not be used.

D. All delivered and installed Planting Soil shall conform to the approved submittals sample color, texture and approved test analysis.1. The Owner’s Representative may request samples of the delivered or installed soil be

tested for analysis to confirm the Planting Soil conforms to the approved material.2. All testing shall be performed by the same soil lab that performed the original Planting Soil

testing.3. Testing results shall be within 10% plus or minus of the values measured in the approved

Planting Soil Mixes.4. Any Planting Soil that fails to meet the above criteria, if requested by the Owner’s

Representative, shall be removed and new soil installed.

E. Soil compaction testing: following installation or modification of soil, test soil compaction with a penetrometer.1. Maintain at the site at all times a soil cone penetrometer with pressure dial and a soil

moisture meter to check soil compaction and soil moisture.a. Penetrometer shall be AgraTronix Soil Compaction Meter distributed by Ben

Meadows, www.benmeadows.com or approved equal.b. Moisture meter shall be “general digital soil moisture meter” distributed by Ben

Meadows, www.benmeadows.com or approved equal.2. Prior to testing the soil with the penetrometer check the soil moisture and penetrometer

readings in the mockup soils. Penetrometer readings are impacted by soil moisture and



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 7 of 15

excessively wet or dry soils will read significantly lower or higher than soils at optimum moisture.

3. The penetrometer readings shall be within 20% plus or minus of the readings in the approved mockup when at similar moisture levels.

1.14 SITE CONDITIONSA. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of all surface and subsurface conditions, and

to notify the Owner’s Representative, in writing, of any circumstances that would negatively impact the health of plantings. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.1. Should subsurface drainage or soil conditions be encountered which would be detrimental

to growth or survival of plant material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in writing, stating the conditions and submit a proposal covering cost of corrections. If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner’s Representative of such conditions, they shall remain responsible for plant material under the warrantee clause of the specifications.

2. This specification requires that all Planting Soil and Irrigation (if applicable) work be completed and accepted prior to the installation of any plants.

1.15 SOIL COMPACTION – GENERAL REQUIREMENTSA. Except where more stringent requirements are defined in this specification. The following

parameters shall define the general description of the threshold points of soil compaction in existing, modified or installed soil and subsoil.

B. The following are threshold levels of compaction as determined by each method.1. Acceptable Compaction: Good rooting anticipated, but increasing settlement expected as

compaction is reduced and/or in soil with a high organic matter content.a. Bulk Density Method – Varies by soil type see Chart on page 32 in Up By Roots.b. Standard Proctor Method – 75-85%; soil below 75% is unstable and will settle

excessively.c. Penetration Resistance Method – about 75-250 psi, below 75 psi soil becomes

increasingly unstable and will settle excessively.2. Root limiting Compaction: Root growth is limited with fewer, shorter and slower growing

roots.a. Bulk Density Method – Varies by soil type see Chart on page 32 in Up By Roots.b. Standard Proctor Method – above approximately 85%.c. Penetration Resistance Method – about 300 psi.

3. Excessive Compaction: Roots not likely to grow but can penetrate soil when soil is above field capacity.a. Bulk Density Method – Varies by soil type see Chart on page 32 in Up By Roots.b. Standard Proctor Method – Above 90%.c. Penetration Resistance Method – Approximately above 400 psi

1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Weather: Do not mix, deliver, place or grade soils when frozen or with moisture above field

capacity.

B. Protect soil and soil stockpiles, including the stockpiles at the soil blender’s yard, from wind, rain and washing that can erode soil or separate fines and coarse material, and contamination by chemicals, dust and debris that may be detrimental to plants or soil drainage. Cover stockpiles with plastic sheeting or fabric at the end of each workday.

C. All manufactured packaged products and material shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers and stored in a dry enclosed space suitable for the material and meeting all



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 8 of 15

environmental regulations. Biological additives shall be protected from extreme cold and heat. All products shall be freshly manufactured and dated for the year in which the products are to be used.

D. Deliver all chemical amendments in original, unopened containers with original labels intact and legible, which state the guaranteed chemical analysis. Store all chemicals in a weather protected enclosure.

E. Bulk material: Coordinate delivery and storage with Owner’s Representative and confine materials to neat piles in areas acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

1.17 EXCAVATING AND GRADING AROUND UTILITIESA. Contractor shall carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with

the existing underground conditions before digging.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.

C. Notification of “Sunshine”, 1-800-432-4770, is required for all planting areas. The Contractor is responsible for knowing the location and avoiding utilities that are not covered by “Sunshine”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IMPORTED TOPSOILA. Imported Topsoil definition: Fertile, friable soil containing less than 5% total volume of the

combination of subsoil, refuse, roots larger than 1 inch diameter, heavy, sticky or stiff clay, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter, or any substances deleterious to plant growth. The percent (%) of the above objects shall be controlled by source selection not by screening the soil. Topsoil shall be suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. Imported Topsoil shall not contain weed seeds in quantities that cause noticeable weed infestations in the final planting beds. Imported Topsoil shall meet the following physical and chemical criteria:1. Soil texture: USDA loam, sandy clay loam or sandy loam with clay content between 15

and 25%. And a combined clay/silt content of no more than 55%.2. pH value shall be between 5.5 and 7.0.3. Percent organic matter (OM): 2.0-5.0%, by dry weight.4. Soluble salt level: Less than 2 mmho/cm.5. Soil chemistry suitable for growing the plants specified.

B. Imported Topsoil shall be a harvested soil from fields or development sites. The organic content and particle size distribution shall be the result of natural soil formation. Manufactured soils where Coarse Sand, Composted organic material or chemical additives has been added to the soil to meet the requirements of this specification section shall not be acceptable. Retained soil peds shall be the same color on the inside as is visible on the outside.

C. Imported Topsoil for Planting Soil shall NOT have been screened and shall retain soil peds or clods larger than 2 inches in diameter throughout the stockpile after harvesting.

D. Stockpiled Existing Topsoil at the site meeting the above criteria may be acceptable.

E. Provide a two gallon sample from each Imported Topsoil source with required soil testing results. The sample shall be a mixture of the random samples taken around the source stockpile or field. The soil sample shall be delivered with soil peds intact that represent the size and quantity of expected peds in the final delivered soil.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 9 of 15

2.2 COMPOSTA. Compost: Blended and ground leaf, wood and other plant based material, composted for a

minimum of 9 months and at temperatures sufficient to break down all woody fibers, seeds and leaf structures, free of toxic material at levels that are harmful to plants or humans. Source material shall be yard waste trimmings blended with other plant or manure based material designed to produce Compost high in fungal material.1. Compost shall be commercially prepared Compost and meet US Compost Council

STA/TMECC criteria or as modified in this section for “Compost as a Landscape Backfill Mix Component”. http://compostingcouncil.org/admin/wp-content/plugins/wp-pdfupload/pdf/191/LandscapeArch_Specs.pdf

2. Compost shall comply with the following parameters:a. pH: 5.5 - 8.0.b. Soil salt (electrical conductivity): maximum 5 dS/m (mmhos/cm).c. Moisture content %, wet weight basis: 30 – 60.d. Particle size, dry weight basis: 98% pass through 3/4 inch screen or smear.e. Stability carbon dioxide evolution rate: mg CO2-C/ g OM/ day < 2.f. Solvita maturity test: > 6.g. Physical contaminants (inerts), %, dry weight basis: <1%.h. Chemical contaminants, mg/kg (ppm): meet or exceed US EPA Class A standard,

40CFR § 503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels.i. Biological contaminants select pathogens fecal coliform bacteria, or salmonella,

meet or exceed US EPA Class A standard, 40 CFR § 503.32(a) level requirements.

B. Provide a two gallon sample with manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

2.3 COURSE SANDA. Clean, washed, sand, free of toxic materials

1. Coarse concrete sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, with a Fines Modulus Index of 2.8 and 3.2.

2. Coarse Sands shall be clean, sharp, natural Coarse Sands free of limestone, shale and slate particles. Manufactured Coarse Sand shall not be permitted.

3. pH shall be lower than 7.0.4. Provide Coarse Sand with the following particle size distribution:

Sieve Percent passing

3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100

No 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100

No 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100

No 16 (1.18 mm) 50-85

No 30 (.60 mm) 25-60

No 50 (.30 mm) 10-30

No 100 (.15 mm) 2-10

No 200 (0.75 mm 2-5

B. Provide a two gallon sample with manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 10 of 15

2.4 FERTILIZER, BIOLOGICAL, AND OTHER AMENDMENTSA. Soil testing shall be performed in all planting areas (including sodded areas) prior to construction

with results submitted to landscape architect. Provide fertilizer uniform in composition, dry, and in a free-flowing condition for application by suitable equipment, and deliver in unopened bags or containers, each fully labeled.

B. Fertilizer for trees, shrubs, and groundcovers shall be complete, organic, and slow-release with the following source compounds and applied at a rate as recommended by the soil test:1. Nitrogen derived from ammonium nitrate.2. Phosphorous derived from super phosphate.3. Potassium derived from potassium sulfate.4. Magnesium derived from magnesium sulfate.5. The fertilizer shall be neutral and contain the essential micro-nutrients (Chelated Fe, Mn,

Zn, Mo, Bo, Cu) in sulfates unless otherwise indicated in ppm. Fertilizer shall be slow release.

C. Fertilizer for sod shall be granular, non-burning product composed of a complete, organic, slow-release, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer.1. Type A: Starter fertilizer containing nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash by weight or

similar approved composition. Fertilizer shall be complete and applied at a rate as recommended by the soil test. Provide at least 50% of the phosphoric acid from normal super phosphate or an equivalent source providing a minimum of two units of sulfur. The amounts of sulfur and all other chemicals shall be indicated on the quantitative analysis card attached to the unopened bag.

2. Type B: Top dressing fertilizer containing 31% nitrogen, 3% phosphoric acid, and 10% potash by weight or similar approved composition.

2.5 LIMEA. ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate

equivalent and as follows:1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a

minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.2. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

B. Provide manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

2.6 PLANTING SOIL MIXESA. General definition: Mixes of Existing Soil or Imported Topsoil, Coarse Sand, and or Compost to

make a new soil that meets the project goals for the indicated planting area. These may be mixed off site or onsite, and will vary in Mix components and proportions as indicated.

B. Planting Mix - moderately slow draining soil for trees and shrub beds1. A Mix of Imported Topsoil, Coarse Sand and Compost. The approximate Mix ratio shall

be:

Mix component % by moist volume

Imported Topsoil unscreened 45-50%

Coarse sand 40-45%

Compost 10%2. Final tested organic matter between 2.75 and 4% (by dry weight).3. Mix the Coarse Sand and Compost together first and then add to the Topsoil. Mix with a

loader bucket to loosely incorporate the Topsoil into the Coarse Sand/Compost Mix. DO



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 11 of 15

NOT OVER MIX! Do not mix with a soil blending machine. Do not screen the soil. Clumps of Soil, Compost and Coarse Sand will be permitted in the overall Mix.

4. At the time of final grading, add fertilizer if required to the Planting Soil at rates recommended by the testing results for the plants to be grown.

5. Provide a two gallon sample with testing data that includes recommendations for chemical additives for the types of plants to be grown. Samples and testing data shall be submitted at the same time.

2.7 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDESA. Chemical herbicides are designed to prevent seeds of selective plants from germinating. Exact

type of herbicide shall be based on the specific plants to be controlled and the most effective date of application.

B. Submit report of expected weed problems and the recommendation of the most effective control for approval by Owner’s Representative. Provide manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATIONA. Prior to installation of Planting Soil, examine site to confirm that existing conditions are

satisfactory for the work of this section to proceed.1. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. 2. Confirm that all surface areas to be filled with Planting Soil are free of construction debris,

refuse, compressible or biodegradable materials, stones greater than 2 inches diameter, soil crusting films of silt or clay that reduces or stops drainage from the Planting Soil into the subsoil; and/or standing water. Remove unsuitable material from the site.

3. Confirm that no adverse drainage conditions are present.4. Confirm that no conditions are present which are detrimental to plant growth.5. Confirm that utility work has been completed per the drawings.6. Confirm that irrigation work, which is shown to be installed below prepared soil levels, has

been completed.

B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative immediately to determine corrective action before proceeding.

3.2 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT WORKA. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.

B. Prior to the start of work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

C. Coordinate the relocation of any irrigation lines, heads or the conduits of other utility lines that are in conflict with tree locations. Root balls shall not be altered to fit around lines. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts encountered.

3.3 GRADE AND ELEVATION CONTROLA. Provide grade and elevation control during installation of Planting Soil. Utilize grade stakes,

surveying equipment, and other means and methods to assure that grades and contours conform to the grades indicated on the plans.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 12 of 15

3.4 SITE PREPARATIONA. Excavate to the proposed subgrade. Maintain all required angles of repose of the adjacent

materials as shown on the drawings or as required by this specification. Do not over excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures. Maintain a supporting 1:1 side slope of compacted subgrade material along the edges of all paving and structures where the bottom of the paving or structure is above the bottom elevation of the excavated planting area.

B. Remove all construction debris and material including any construction materials from the subgrade.

C. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope approximately parallel to the finished grade.

D. In areas where Planting Soil is to be spread, confirm subgrade has been scarified.

E. Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage or staining by the soil. Use 1/2 inch plywood and or plastic sheeting as directed to cover existing concrete, metal and masonry work and other items as directed during the progress of the work.1. At the end of each working day, clean up any soil or dirt spilled on any paved surface.2. Any damage to the paving or site features or work shall be repaired at the Contractor’s

expense.

3.5 SOIL MOISTUREA. Volumetric soil moisture level, in both the Planting Soil and the root balls of all plants, prior to,

during and after planting shall be above permanent wilt point and below field capacity for each type of soil texture within the following ranges.

Soil texture Permanent wilting point Field capacitySand, Loamy sand, Sandy loam 5-8% 12-18%

Loam, Sandy clay, Sandy clay loam 14-25% 27-36%

Clay loam, Silt loam 11-22% 31-36%

Silty clay, Silty clay loam 22-27% 38-41%

B. The Contractor shall confirm the soil moisture levels with a moisture meter (Digital Soil Moisture Meter, DSMM500 by General Specialty Tools and Instruments, or approved equivalent). If moisture is found to be too low, the planting holes shall be filled with water and allowed to drain before starting any planting operations. If the moisture is too high, suspend planting operations until the soil moisture drains to below field capacity.

3.6 PLANTING SOIL AND PLANTING SOIL MIX INSTALLATIONA. Prior to installing any Planting Soil from stockpiles or Planting Soil Mixes blended off site, the

Owner’s Representative shall approve the condition of the subgrade and the previously installed subgrade preparation.

B. All equipment utilized to install or grade Planting Soils shall be wide track or balloon tire machines rated with a ground pressure of 4 psi or less. All grading and soil delivery equipment shall have buckets equipped with 6 inch long teeth to scarify any soil that becomes compacted.

C. In areas of soil installation above existing subsoil, scarify the subgrade material prior to installingPlanting Soil.1. Scarify the subsoil of the subgrade to a depth of 3 – 6 inches with the teeth of the back

hoe or loader bucket, tiller or other suitable device.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 13 of 15

2. Immediately install the Planting Soil. Protect the loosened area from traffic. DO NOT allow the loosened subgrade to become compacted.

3. In the event that the loosened area becomes overly compacted, loosen the area again prior to installing the Planting Soil.

D. Install the Planting Soil in 12 - 18 inch lifts to the required depths. Apply compacting forces to each lift as required to attain the required compaction. Scarify the top of each lift prior to adding more Planting Soil by dragging the teeth of a loader bucket or backhoe across the soil surface to roughen the surface.

E. Phase work such that equipment to deliver or grade soil does not have to operate over previously installed Planting Soil. Work in rows of lifts the width of the extension of the bucket on the loader. Install all lifts in one row before proceeding to the next. Work out from the furthest part of each bed from the soil delivery point to the edge of the each bed area.

F. Where possible place large trees first and fill Planting Soil around the root ball.

G. Installing soil with soil or mulch blowers or soil slingers shall not be permitted due to the over mixing and soil ped breakdown cause by this type of equipment.

H. Where travel over installed soil is unavoidable, limit paths of traffic to reduce the impact of compaction in Planting Soil. Each time equipment passes over the installed soil it shall reverse out of the area along the same path with the teeth of the bucket dropped to scarify the soil. Comply with the paragraph “Compaction Reduction” (section 3.9) in the event that soil becomes over compacted.

I. The depths and grades shown on the drawings are the final grades after settlement and shrinkage of the compost material. The Contractor shall install the Planting Soil at a higher level to anticipate this reduction of Planting Soil volume. A minimum settlement of approximately 10 -15% of the soil depth is expected. All grade increases are assumed to be as measured prior to addition of surface Compost till layer, mulch, or sod.

3.7 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLED PLANTING SOILA. Compact installed Planting Soil to the compaction rates indicated. Compact each soil lift as the

soil is installed.

B. Installed Planting Soil Mix and re-spread existing soil shall have a soil density through the required depth of the installed layers of soil, such that the penetrometer reads approximately 75 to 250 psi at soil moisture approximately the mid-point between wilt point and field capacity. This will be approximately between 75 and 82% of maximum dry density standard proctor.

C. Planting Soil compaction shall be tested at each lift using a penetrometer calibrated to themockup soil and its moisture level.

D. Maintain moisture conditions within the Planting Soil during installation or modification to allow for satisfactory compaction. Suspend operations if the Planting Soil becomes wet. Apply water if the soil is overly dry.

E. Provide adequate equipment to achieve consistent and uniform compaction of the Planting Soils. Use the smallest equipment that can reasonably perform the task of spreading and compaction.

F. Do not pass motorized equipment over previously installed and compacted soil except as authorized below. 1. Light weight equipment such as trenching machines or motorized wheel barrows is

permitted to pass over finished soil work. 2. If work after the installation and compaction of soil compacts the soil to levels greater than

the above requirements, follow the requirements of the paragraph "Over Compaction Reduction" below.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 14 of 15

3.8 OVER COMPACTION REDUCTIONA. Any soil that becomes compacted to a density greater than the specified density shall be dug up

and reinstalled. This requirement includes compaction caused by other sub-contractors after the Planting Soil is installed and approved.

B. Surface roto tilling shall not be considered adequate to reduce over compaction at levels 6 inches or greater below finished grade.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF CHEMICAL ADDITIVESA. Following the installation of each soil and prior to fine grading, apply chemical additives as

recommended by the soil test, and appropriate to the soil and specific plants to be installed.

B. Types, application rates and methods of application shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to any applications.

3.10 FINE GRADINGA. The Owner’s Representative shall approve all rough grading prior to the installation of Compost,

fine grading, planting, and mulching.

B. Grade the finish surface of all planted areas to meet the grades shown on the drawings, allowing the finished grades to remain higher (10 – 15% of depth of soil modification) than the grades on the grading plan, as defined in paragraph Planting Soil Installation, to anticipate settlement over the first year.

C. Utilize hand equipment, small garden tractors with rakes, or small garden tractors with buckets with teeth for fine grading to keep surface rough without further compaction. Do not use the flat bottom of a loader bucket to fine grade, as it will cause the finished grade to become overly smooth and or slightly compressed.

D. Provide for positive drainage from all areas toward the existing inlets, drainage structures and or the edges of planting beds. Adjust grades as directed to reflect actual constructed field conditions of paving, wall and inlet elevations. Notify the Owner’s Representative in the event that conditions make it impossible to achieve positive drainage.

E. Provide smooth, rounded transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. Modify the grade so that the finish grade before adding mulch and after settlement is one or two inches below all paving surfaces or as directed by the drawings.

F. Fill all dips and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the slope. The tolerance for dips and bumps in shrub and ground cover planting areas shall be a 2 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet. The tolerance for dips and bumps in lawn areas shall be a 1 inch deviation from the plane in 10 feet.

3.11 CLEAN-UPA. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an

orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week.1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the

Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property.

B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period.1. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage to the work or other work at the site.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 15 of 15

2. Remove and dispose of all excess Planting Soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor.

3.12 PLANTING SOIL PROTECTIONA. The Contractor shall protect installed and/or modified Planting Soil from damage including

contamination and over compaction due to other soil installation, planting operations, and operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until acceptance. Utilize fencing and matting as required or directed to protect the finished soil work. Treat, repair or replace damaged Planting Soil immediately.

B. Loosen compacted Planting Soil and replace Planting Soil that has become contaminated as determined by the Owner’s Representative. Planting Soil shall be loosened or replaced at no expense to the Owner.1. Till and restore grades to all soil that has been driven over or compacted during the

installation of plants.

3.13 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTIONA. The Contractor shall protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to

planting operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers.1. Maintain protection during installation until the date of plant acceptance (see

specifications section – Planting). Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.2. Provide temporary erosion control as needed to stop soil erosion until the site is stabilized

with mulch, plantings or turf.

B. Damage done by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed plants, or any other parts of the work or existing features to remain, including large existing trees, soil, paving, utilities, lighting, irrigation, other finished work and surfaces including those on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall determine when such cleaning, replacement or repair is satisfactory. Damage to existing trees shall be assessed by a certified arborist.

3.14 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCEA. Upon written notice from the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall review the work and

make a determination if the work is substantially complete.

B. The date of substantial completion of the planting soil shall be the date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in Planting, Sodding, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation sections is complete.

3.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE / SOIL SETTLEMENTA. At the end of the plant warranty and maintenance period, (see Specification section - Planting)

the Owner’s Representative shall observe the soil installation work and establish that all provisions of the contract are complete and the work is satisfactory.1. Restore any soil settlement and or erosion areas to the grades shown on the drawings.

When restoring soil grades remove plants and mulch and add soil before restoring the planting. Do not add soil over the root balls of plants or on top of mulch.

B. Failure to pass acceptance: If the work fails to pass final acceptance, any subsequent observations must be rescheduled as per above. The cost to the Owner for additional observations will be charged to the Contractor at the prevailing hourly rate of the Owner’s Representative.


Technical SpecificationsSection 329223 – Sodding


100% SUBMITTAL

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 329223 – SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTIONA. Provide sodded lawn as shown and specified. The work includes:

1. Soil preparation.2. Sodding lawns3. Maintenance.4. Sodding disturbed areas in areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of

construction operations.

1.2 RELATED WORKA. Section - Irrigation

B. Section - Planting Soils

C. Section - Planting

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Sod: Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) classes of sod material. Sod

must be Certified Argentine Bahiagrass sod and Certified Floritam St. Augustine sod (as shown on plans), grown and maintained on a well drained sandy root zone soil. The sod must be weed and insect free.

B. Provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the Engineer and/or Landscape Architect. Provide the following data:1. Test representative materials samples proposed for use.2. Soil analysis of existing conditions.

a. Soil pH and recommendations for correction. Ideal pH for sod is 5.0 - 6.0.b. Nematode infestation check and recommendation for eradication. c. Organic matter check and recommendation.d. Starter fertilizer check and recommendations.

C. SUBMITTALS1. Submit sod growers certification of grass species. Identify source location.2. Submit the following material samples:

a. Topsoil.3. Submit the following material certification:

a. Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities and manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments, herbicides, insecticides and fertilizer materials; submit other data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

b. Submit soil analysis report.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Cut, deliver and install sod within a 24-hour period.

1. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect Sod survival.2. Protect sod from sun, wind, and dehydration prior to installation.3. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 2 of 5

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Work notification: Notify Owner’s representative at least 7 working days prior to start of sodding

operations.

B. Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities from damage caused by sodding operations.

C. Perform sodding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed.

D. Existing soil to be amended as determined necessary from soil analysis, including: soil pH, nematode infestation, organic matter check and starter fertilizer check.

E. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established.

F. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.

G. The irrigation system will be installed prior to sodding. Locate, protect and maintain the irrigation system during sodding operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged during sodding operations at this contractor’s expense.

1.6 WARRANTYA. Warrant sodded lawns to remain alive and be in healthy, vigorous condition for a period of 90

days after Substantial Completion Acceptance.

B. Provide a uniform stand of grass by watering, mowing and maintaining lawn areas until Substantial Completion Acceptance and for a period of 90 days during the warranty period.Resod areas, with specified materials, which fail to provide a uniform stand of grass until all affected areas are accepted by the Owner’s representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALSA. Sod: An “approved” nursery grown sod composed of Certified Argentine Bahiagrass sod grown

on a well drained sandy root zone soil and an “approved” nursery grown sod composed of Certified Floritam St. Augustine sod grown on a well drained sandy root zone soil.1. Provide well-rooted, healthy sod, free of diseases, nematodes and soil borne insects.

Provide sod uniform in color, leaf texture, density, and free of weeds, undesirable grasses, stones, roots, thatch, and extraneous material; viable and capable of growth and development when planted.

2. Furnish sod, machine stripped, and of supplier’s standard width, length, and thickness: Uniformly 1-1/4” to 1-1/2” thick with clean cut edges. Mow sod before stripping.

B. Fertilizer: Granular, non-burning product composed of a complete, organic, slow-release, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer.1. Type A: Starter fertilizer containing nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash by weight or

similar approved composition. Fertilizer shall be complete and applied at a rate as recommended by the soil test. Provide at least 50% of the phosphoric acid from normal super phosphate or an equivalent source providing a minimum of two units of sulfur. The amounts of sulfur and all other chemicals shall be indicated on the quantitative analysis card attached to the unopened bag.

2. Type B: Top dressing fertilizer containing 31% nitrogen, 3% phosphoric acid, and 10% potash by weight or similar approved composition.

C. Ground Limestone: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 3 of 5

1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

D. Stakes1. Steel, tee shaped pins, 4” head x 8” leg.

E. Water: Free of substance harmful to sod growth. Hoses or other methods of transportation furnished by contractor.

F. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy character, without admixture of subsoil material, reasonably free from clay lumps, coarse sand stones, plants, roots and other foreign materials with an acidity level as specified by type of sod.1. Identify source location of topsoil.2. Contractor shall conduct a soil test prior to application of any soil amendments, fertilizers

and backfill mixtures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTIONA. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality, and depth. Do not start sodding work until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Apply approved herbicide or equal according to manufacturer’s rate and specification within

limits of areas to be planted. Protect existing plants and trees to remain from overspray or spray within root zone. Contractor to ensure total week eradication.

B. Remove any existing sub-base or compacted materials to expose a friable soil layer.

C. Loosen soil/topsoil of lawn areas to minimum depth of 8”. Remove stones over 1” in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and extraneous matter.

D. Add 3” topsoil or organic material as required from organic matter check. Till into top 8” of existing soil.

E. Grade lawn areas to smooth, free draining and even surface with a loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges and fill depressions as required to drain.

F. Apply limestone at rate determined by the soil test, to adjust pH of topsoil as specified. Distribute evenly by machine and incorporate thoroughly into topsoil.

G. Apply “Type A” fertilizer at rate determined by the soil test and as specified by manufacturer. Apply fertilizer by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and evenly incorporated with the soil to a depth of 3” by discing or other approved methods. Fertilize areas inaccessible to power equipment with hand tools and incorporate it into soil.

H. Dampen dry soil prior to sodding.

I. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded, settled or otherwise distributed after fine grading and prior to sodding.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly-fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod Strips. Do not

overlay edges. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Remove excess sod to avoid



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 4 of 5

smothering of adjacent grass. Provide sod pad top flush with adjacent curbs, sidewalks, drains and seed areas.

B. Do not lay dormant sod or install sod on saturated soil.

C. Install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to and lightly against previously installed row.

D. Peg sod on slopes greater than 3 to 1 to prevent slippage at a rate of 2 stakes per yd. of sod.

E. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying.

F. Roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with subgrade.

G. Sod indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations.

H. Top dress all seams of sodded area with specified topsoil.

3.4 MAINTENANCEA. Maintain sodded lawns for a period of at least 90 days after Substantial Completion Acceptance

of sodding operations.

B. Maintain sodded lawn areas, including watering, spot weeding, mowing, application of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides and resodding until a full, uniform stand of grass free of weed, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects is achieved and accepted by the Owner’s representative.1. During weekly watering, water sod thoroughly over 2 to 3 days, as required to establish

proper rooting.2. Repair, rework, and resod all areas that have washed out or are eroded. Replace

undesirable or dead areas with new sod.3. Mow lawn areas as soon as lawn top growth reaches a 3” height. Cut back to 2” height.

Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height. Not more than 40% of grass leaf shall be removed at any single mowing.

4. Apply “Type B” fertilizer to lawns approximately 30 days after sodding at rate determined by the soil test and as specified by the manufacturer. Apply with a mechanical rotary or drop type distributor. Thoroughly water into soil.

5. Apply herbicides as required to control weed growth or undesirable grass species.6. Apply fungicides and insecticides as required to control disease and insects.

3.5 ACCEPTANCEA. Inspection to determine acceptance of sodded lawns will be made by the Owner’s representative

and the Landscape Architect, upon contractor’s request. Provide notification at least five working days before requested inspection date.1. Sodded areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including maintenance, have

been complied with, and a healthy, even colored viable lawn is established, free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects.

B. Upon Substantial Completion Acceptance, contractor shall maintain area for 90 days. At the end of this period contractor shall request a final maintenance inspection for End of Warranty Final Acceptance.

C. Upon End of Warranty Final Acceptance at end of maintenance period the Owner will assume lawn maintenance.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 5 of 5

3.6 CLEANINGA. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the Work. Remove from

site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from sodding operations.


Technical SpecificationsSection 329300 – Planting


100% SUBMITTAL

Page 1 of 20

SECTION 329300 – PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. The scope of work includes all labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities,

transportation and services necessary for, and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of plant (also known as "landscaping”) complete as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. The scope of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:1. Locate, purchase, deliver and install all specified plants.2. Water all specified plants.3. Mulch, fertilize, stake, and prune all specified plants.4. Maintenance of all specified plants until the beginning of the warranty period. 5. Plant warranty.6. Clean up and disposal of all excess and surplus material. 7. Maintenance of all specified plants during the warranty period.

1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTSA. Shall consist of specifications and general conditions and the construction drawings. The intent

of these documents is to include all labor, materials, and services necessary for the proper execution of the work. The documents are to be considered as one. Whatever is called for by any parts shall be as binding as if called for in all parts.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCESA. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of contract including general and supplementary conditions and Division I specifications apply to work of this section

2. Related Specification Sectionsa. Section - Planting Soilb. Section - Irrigationc. Section - Sodding

B. References: The following specifications and standards of the organizations and documents listed in this paragraph form a part of the specification to the extent required by the references thereto. In the event that the requirements of the following referenced standards and specification conflict with this specification section the requirements of this specification shall prevail. In the event that the requirements of any of the following referenced standards and specifications conflict with each other the more stringent requirement shall prevail or as determined by the Owner’s Representative.1. ANSI Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock, most current edition.2. ANSI A 300 – Standard Practices for Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance,

most current edition and parts.3. Florida Grades and Standards for Nursery Stock, current edition (Florida Department of

Agriculture, Tallahassee FL).4. Interpretation of plant names and descriptions shall reference the following documents.

Where the names or plant descriptions disagree between the several documents, the most current document shall prevail.a. USDA - The Germplasm Resources Information Network (GRIN) http://www.ars-

grin.gov/npgs/searchgrin.htmlb. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants; Michael Dirr; Stipes Publishing, Champaign,

Illinois; Most Current Edition.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 2 of 20

5. Pruning practices shall conform to recommendations “Structural Pruning: A Guide For The Green Industry” most current edition; published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia, California.

6. Glossary of Arboricultural Terms, International Society of Arboriculture, Champaign IL, most current edition.

1.4 VERIFICATIONA. All scaled dimensions on the drawings are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, the

Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and quantities, and shall immediately inform the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancies between the information on the drawings and the actual conditions, refraining from doing any work in said areas until given approval to do so by the Owner’s Representative.

B. In the case of a discrepancy in the plant quantities between the plan drawings and the plant call outs, list or plant schedule, the number of plants or square footage of the planting bed actually drawn on the plan drawings shall be deemed correct and prevail.

1.5 PERMITS AND REGULATIONSA. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits related to this section of the work unless

previously excluded under provision of the contract or general conditions. The Contractor shall comply with all laws and ordinances bearing on the operation or conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that a conflict exists between permit requirements and the work outlined in the contract documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner’s Representative in writing including a description of any necessary changes and changes to the contract price resulting from changes in the work.

B. Wherever references are made to standards or codes in accordance with which work is to be performed or tested, the edition or revision of the standards and codes current on the effective date of this contract shall apply, unless otherwise expressly set forth.

C. In case of conflict among any referenced standards or codes or between any referenced standards and codes and the specifications, the more restrictive standard shall apply or Owner’s Representative shall determine which shall govern.

1.6 PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONA. The Contractor shall adequately protect the work, adjacent property, and the public, and shall be

responsible for any damages or injury due to his/her actions.

1.7 CHANGES IN THE WORKA. The Owner’s Representative may order changes in the work, and the contract sum should be

adjusted accordingly. All such orders and adjustments plus claims by the Contractor for extra compensation must be made and approved in writing before executing the work involved.

B. All changes in the work, notifications and contractor’s request for information (RFI) shall conform to the contract general condition requirements.

1.8 CORRECTION OF WORKA. The Contractor, at their own cost, shall re-execute any work that fails to conform to the

requirements of the contract and shall remedy defects due to faulty materials or workmanship upon written notice from the Owner’s Representative, at the soonest as possible time that can be coordinated with other work and seasonal weather demands.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 3 of 20

1.9 DEFINITIONSAll terms in this specification shall be as defined in the “Glossary of Arboricultural Terms” or as modified below.

A. Boxed trees: A container root ball package made of wood in the shape of a four-sided box.

B. Container plant: Plants that are grown in and/or are currently in a container including boxed trees.

C. Defective plant: Any plant that fails to meet the plant quality requirement of this specification.

D. End of Warranty Final Acceptance: The date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that the plants and work in this section meet all the requirements of the warranty. It is intended that the materials and workmanship warranty for Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation work run concurrent with each other.

E. Field grown trees (B&B): Trees growing in field soil for at least 12 months prior to harvest.

F. Healthy: Plants that are growing in a condition that expresses leaf size, crown density, color; and with annual growth rates typical of the species and cultivar’s horticultural description, adjusted for the planting site soil, drainage and weather conditions.

G. Kinked root: A root within the root package that bends more than 90 degrees.

H. Maintenance: Actions that preserve the health of plants after installation and as defined in this specification.

I. Maintenance period: The time period, as defined in this specification, which the Contractor is to provide maintenance.

J. Normal: the prevailing protocol of industry standard(s).

K. Owner’s Representative: The person appointed by the Owner to represent their interest in the review and approval of the work and to serve as the contracting authority with the Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may appoint other persons to review and approve any aspects of the work.

L. Reasonable and reasonably: When used in this specification relative to plant quality, it is intended to mean that the conditions cited will not affect the establishment or long term stability, health or growth of the plant. This specification recognizes that it is not possible to produce plants free of all defects, but that some accepted industry protocols and standards result in plants unacceptable to this project.

When reasonable or reasonably is used in relation to other issues such as weeds, diseased, insects, it shall mean at levels low enough that no treatment would be required when applying recognized Integrated Plant Management practices.

This specification recognizes that some decisions cannot be totally based on measured findings and that professional judgment is required. In cases of differing opinion, the Owner’s Representative’s expert shall determine when conditions are judged as reasonable.

M. Root ball: The mass of roots including any soil or substrate that is shipped with the tree within the root ball package.

N. Root ball package. The material that surrounds the root ball during shipping. The root package may include the material in which the plant was grown, or new packaging placed around the root ball for shipping.

O. Root collar (root crown, root flare, trunk flare, flare): The region at the base of the trunk where the majority of the structural roots join the plant stem, usually at or near ground level.

P. Shrub: Woody plants with mature height approximately less than 15 feet.

Q. Stem: The trunk of the tree.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 4 of 20

R. Substantial Completion Acceptance: The date at the end of the Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation where the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in these sections iscomplete and the Warranty period has begun. This date may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project.

S. Stem girdling root: Any root more than ¼ inch diameter currently touching the trunk, or with the potential to touch the trunk, above the root collar approximately tangent to the trunk circumference or circling the trunk. Roots shall be considered as Stem Girdling that have, or are likely to have in the future, root to trunk bark contact.

T. Structural root: One of the largest roots emerging from the root collar.

U. Tree: Single and multi-stemmed plants with mature height approximately greater than 15 feet.

1.10 SUBMITTALSA. See contract general conditions for policy and procedure related to submittals.

B. Submit all product submittals 8 weeks prior to installation of plantings.

C. Product data: Submit manufacturer product data and literature describing all products required by this section to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Provide submittal eight weeks before the installation of plants.

D. Plant growers’ certificates: Submit plant growers’ certificates for all plants indicating that each meets the requirements of the specification, including the requirements of tree quality, to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Provide submittal eight weeks before the installation of plants.

E. Samples: Submit samples of each product and material where required by the specification to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

F. Plant sources: Submit sources of all plants as required by Article – “Selection of Plants” to the Owner’s Representative for approval.

G. Close out submittals: Submit to the Owner’s Representative for approval.1. Plant maintenance data and requirements.

1.11 OBSERVATION OF THE WORKA. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time. They may remove samples of

materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The cost of testing materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. The Owner’s Representative shall be informed of the progress of the work so the work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process. The Owner’s Representative shall be afforded sufficient time to schedule visit to the site. Failure of the Owner’sRepresentative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting all the requirements of this specification. 1. SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO THE START OF PLANTING: review the soil and drainage

conditions.2. COMPLETION OF THE PLANT LAYOUT STAKING: Review of the plant layout.3. PLANT QUALITY: Review of plant quality at the time of delivery and prior to installation.

Review tree quality prior to unloading where possible, but in all cases prior to planting.4. COMPLETION OF THE PLANTING: Review the completed planting.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 5 of 20

1.12 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCEA. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days

before beginning work to review any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative procedures during construction and project work schedule.

1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Substantial Completion Acceptance - Acceptance of the work prior to the start of the warranty

period:1. Once the Contractor completes the installation of all items in this section, the Owner’s

Representative will observe all work for Substantial Completion Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date of the observation.

2. Substantial Completion Acceptance by the Owner’s Representative shall be for general conformance to specified size, character and quality and not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species.

3. Any plants that are deemed defective as defined under the provisions below shall not be accepted.

B. The Owner’s Representative will provide the Contractor with written acknowledgment of the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance and the beginning of the warranty period and plant maintenance period (if plant maintenance is included).

C. Contractor’s Quality Assurance Responsibilities: The Contractor is solely responsible for quality control of the work.

D. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall be a firm having at least 5 years of successful experience of a scope similar to that required for the work, including the handling and planting of large specimen trees in urban areas. The same firm shall install planting soil (where applicable) and plant material.1. The bidders list for work under this section shall be approved by the Owner’s

Representative.2. Installer Field Supervision: When any planting work is in progress, installer shall maintain,

on site, a full-time supervisor who can communicate in English with the Owner’s Representative.

3. Installer’s field supervisor shall have a minimum of five years experience as a field supervisor installing plants and trees of the quality and scale of the proposed project, and can communicate in English with the Owner’s Representative.

4. The installer’s crew shall have a minimum of 3 years experienced in the installation of Planting Soil, Plantings, and Irrigation (where applicable) and interpretation of soil plans, planting plans and irrigation plans.

5. Submit references of past projects, employee training certifications that support that the Contractors meets all of the above installer qualifications and applicable licensures.

1.14 PLANT WARRANTYA. Plant Warranty:

1. The Contractor agrees to replace defective work and defective plants. The Owner’s Representative shall make the final determination if plants meet these specifications or that plants are defective.

Plants warranty shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance and continue for the following periods, classed by plant type: a. Trees – 1 Year.b. Shrubs – 1 Year.c. Ground cover and perennial flower plants – 1 Year.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 6 of 20

2. When the work is accepted in parts, the warranty periods shall extend from each of the partial Substantial Completion Acceptances to the terminal date of the last warranty period. Thus, all warranty periods for each class of plant warranty, shall terminate at one time.

3. All plants shall be warrantied to meet all the requirements for plant quality at installation in this specification. Defective plants shall be defined as plants not meeting these requirements. The Owner’s representative shall make the final determination that plants are defective.

4. Plants determined to be defective shall be removed immediately upon notification by the Owner’s Representative and replaced without cost to the Owner, as soon as weather conditions permit and within the specified planting period.

5. Any work required by this specification or the Owner’s Representative during the progress of the work, to correct plant defects including the removal of roots or branches, or planting plants that have been bare rooted during installation to observe for or correct root defects shall not be considered as grounds to void any conditions of the warranty. In the event that the Contractor decides that such remediation work may compromise the future health of the plant, the plant or plants in question shall be rejected and replaced with plants that do not contain defects that require remediation or correction.

6. The Contractor is exempt from replacing plants, after Substantial Completion Acceptance and during the warranty period, that are removed by others, lost or damaged due to occupancy of project, lost or damaged by a third party, vandalism, or any natural disaster.

7. Replacements shall closely match adjacent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this specification. Make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner.

8. The warranty of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional one-year period from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended warranty period, the Owner’s Representative may elect one more replacement items or credit for each item. These tertiary replacement items are not protected under a warranty period.

9. During and by the end of the warranty period, remove all tree wrap, ties, guying andstaking unless agreed to by the Owner’s Representative to remain in place. All trees that do not have sufficient caliper to remain upright, or those requiring additional anchorage in windy locations, shall be staked or remain staked, if required by the Owner's Representative.

B. End of Warranty Final Acceptance - Acceptance of plants at the end of the warranty period.1. At the end of the warranty period, the Owner’s Representative shall observe all warranted

work, upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date for final observation.

2. End of Warranty Final Acceptance will be given only when all the requirements of the work under this specification and in specification sections Planting Soil and Irrigation have been met.

1.15 SELECTION AND OBSERVATION OF PLANTSA. The Owner’s Representative may review all plants subject to approval of size, health, quality,

character, etc. Review or approval of any plant during the process of selection, delivery, installation and establishment period shall not prevent that plant from later rejection in the event that the plant quality changes or previously existing defects become apparent that were not observed.

B. Plant Selection: The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to select and observe all plants at the nursery prior to delivery and to reject plants that do not meet specifications as set forth in this specification. If a particular defect or substandard element can be corrected at the nursery, as determined by the Owner’s Representative, the agreed upon remedy may be applied by the nursery or the Contractor provided that the correction allows the plant to meet the requirements



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 7 of 20

set forth in this specification. Any work to correct plant defects shall be at the contractor’s expense.1. The Owner’s Representative may make invasive observation of the plant’s root system in

the area of the root collar and the top of the root ball in general in order to determine that the plant meets the quality requirements for depth of the root collar and presence of roots above the root collar. Such observations will not harm the plant.

2. Corrections are to be undertaken at the nursery prior to shipping.

C. The Contractor shall bear all cost related to plant corrections.

D. All plants that are rejected shall be immediately removed from the site and acceptable replacement plants provided at no cost to the Owner.

E. Trees shall be purchased from the growing nursery. Re-wholesale plant suppliers shall not be used as sources unless the Contractor can certify that the required trees are not directly available from a growing nursery. When Re-wholesale suppliers are utilized, the Contractor shall submit the name and location of the growing nursery from where the trees were obtained by the re-wholesale seller. The re-wholesale nursery shall be responsible for any required plant quality certifications.

F. The Contractor shall require the grower or re-wholesale supplier to permit the Owner’s Representative to observe the root system of all plants at the nursery or job site prior to planting including random removal of soil or substrate around the base of the plant. Observation may be as frequent and as extensive as needed to verify that the plants meet the requirements of the specifications and conform to requirements.

G. Where requested by the Owner’s Representative, submit photographs of plants or representative samples of plants. Photographs shall be legible and clearly depict the plant specimen. Each submitted image shall contain a height reference, such as a measuring stick. The approval of plants by the Owner’s Representative via photograph does not preclude the Owner’s Representative's right to reject material while on site.

1.16 PLANT SUBSTITUTIONS FOR PLANTS NOT AVAILABLEA. Submit all requests for substitutions of plant species, or size to the Owner’s Representative, for

approval, prior to purchasing the proposed substitution. Request for substitution shall be accompanied with a list of nurseries contacted in the search for the required plant and a record of other attempts to locate the required material. Requests shall also include sources of plants found that may be of a smaller or larger size, or a different shape or habit than specified, or plants of the same genus and species but different cultivar origin, or which may otherwise not meet the requirements of the specifications, but which may be available for substitution.

1.17 SITE CONDITIONSA. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of all surface and sub-surface conditions,

and to notify the Owner’s Representative, in writing, of any circumstances that would negatively impact the health of plantings. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Should subsurface drainage or soil conditions be encountered which would be detrimental

to growth or survival of plant material, the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative in writing, stating the conditions and submit a proposal covering cost of corrections. If the Contractor fails to notify the Owner’s Representative of such conditions, he/she shall remain responsible for plant material under the warranty clause of the specifications.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with the local growing conditions, and if any specified plants will be in conflict with these conditions. Report any potential conflicts, in writing, to the Owner’s Representative.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 8 of 20

C. This specification requires that all Planting Soil and Irrigation (if applicable) work be completed and accepted prior to the installation of any plants.1. Planting operations shall not begin until such time that the irrigation system is completely

operational for the area(s) to be planted, and the irrigation system for that area has been preliminarily observed and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

D. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practices.1. Do not install plants into saturated or frozen soils. Do not install plants during inclement

weather, such as rain or snow or during extremely hot, cold or windy conditions.

1.18 PLANTING AROUND UTILITIESA. Contractor shall carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with

the existing underground conditions before digging.

B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.

C. Notification of “Sunshine”, 1-800-432-4770, is required for all planting areas. The Contractor is responsible for knowing the location and avoiding utilities that are not covered by “Sunshine”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTS: GENERALA. Standards and measurement: Provide plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety or

cultivars as shown and scheduled in contract documents. 1. All plants including the root ball dimensions or container size to trunk caliper ratio shall

conform to ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock” latest edition, unless modified by provisions in this specification. When there is a conflict between this specification and ANSI Z60.1, this specification section shall be considered correct.

2. Plants larger than specified may be used if acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Use of such plants shall not increase the contract price. If larger plants are accepted the root ball size shall be in accordance with ANSI Z-60.1. Larger plants may not be acceptable if the resulting root ball cannot be fit into the required planting space.

3. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. The measurements specified are the minimum and maximum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required.

B. Proper Identification: All trees shall be true to name as ordered or shown on planting plans and shall be labeled individually or in groups by genus, species, variety and cultivar.

C. Compliance: All trees shall comply with federal and state laws and regulations requiring observation for plant disease, pests, and weeds. Observation certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants.

D. Plant Quality: 1. General: Provide healthy stock, grown in a nursery and reasonably free of die-back,

disease, insects, eggs, bores, and larvae. At the time of planting all plants shall have a root system, stem, and branch form that will not restrict normal growth, stability and health for the expected life of the plant.

2. Plant quality above the soil line:a. Plants shall be healthy with the color, shape, size and distribution of trunk, stems,

branches, buds and leaves normal to the plant type specified. Tree quality above



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 9 of 20

the soil line shall comply with Florida Grades and Standards, tree grade Florida Fancy or Florida #1, and the following:1) Crown: The form and density of the crown shall be typical for a young

specimen of the species or cultivar pruned to a central and dominant leader. a) Crown specifications do not apply to plants that have been specifically

trained in the nursery as topiary, espalier, multi-stem, clump, or unique selections such as contorted or weeping cultivars.

2) Leaves: The size, color, and appearance of leaves shall be typical for the time of year and stage of growth of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not show signs of prolonged moisture stress or over watering as indicated by wilted, shriveled, or dead leaves.

3) Branches: Shoot growth (length and diameter) throughout the crown should be appropriate for the age and size of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not have dead, diseased, broken, distorted, or otherwise injured branches.a) Main branches shall be distributed along the central leader not

clustered together. They shall form a balanced crown appropriate for the cultivar/species.

b) Branch diameter shall be no larger than two-thirds (one-half is preferred) the diameter of the central leader measured 1 inch above the branch union.

c) The attachment of the largest branches (scaffold branches) shall be free of included bark.

4) Trunk: The tree trunk shall be relatively straight, vertical, and free of wounds that penetrate to the wood (properly made pruning cuts, closed or not, are acceptable and are not considered wounds), sunburned areas, conks (fungal fruiting bodies), wood cracks, sap leakage, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers, girdling ties, or lesions (mechanical injury).

5) Temporary branches, unless otherwise specified, can be present along the lower trunk below the lowest main (scaffold) branch, particularly for trees less than 1 inch in caliper. These branches should be no greater than 3/8-inch diameter. Clear trunk should be no more than 40% of the total height of the tree.

b. Trees shall have one central leader. If the leader was headed, a new leader (with a live terminal bud) at least one-half the diameter of the pruning cut shall be present. 1) All trees are assumed to have one central leader trees unless a different

form is specified in the plant list or drawings.c. All graft unions, where applicable, shall be completely closed without visible sign of

graft rejection. All grafts shall be visible above the soil line. d. Trunk caliper and taper shall be sufficient so that the lower five feet of the trunk

remains vertical without a stake. Auxiliary stake may be used to maintain a straight leader in the upper half of the tree.

3. Plant quality at or below the soil line:a. Plant roots shall be normal to the plant type specified. Root observations shall take

place without impacting tree health. Root quality at or below the soil line shall comply with the project Root Acceptance details and the following:

1) The roots shall be reasonably free of scrapes, broken or split wood. 2) The root system shall be reasonably free of injury from biotic (e.g., insects

and pathogens) and abiotic (e.g., herbicide toxicity and salt injury) agents. Wounds resulting from root pruning used to produce a high quality root system are not considered injuries.

3) A minimum of three structural roots reasonably distributed around the trunk (not clustered on one side) shall be found in each plant. Root distribution shall be uniform throughout the root ball, and growth shall be appropriate for the species.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 10 of 20

a) Plants with structural roots on only one side of the trunk (J roots) shall be rejected.

4) The root collar shall be within the upper 2 inches of the substrate/soil. Two structural roots shall reach the side of the root ball near the top surface of the root ball. The grower may request a modification to this requirement for species with roots that rapidly descend, provided that the grower removes all stem girdling roots above the structural roots across the top of the root ball.

5) The root system shall be reasonably free of stem girdling roots over the root collar or kinked roots from nursery production practices.

6) At time of observations and delivery, the root ball shall be moist throughout. Roots shall not show signs of excess soil moisture conditions as indicated by stunted, discolored, distorted, or dead roots.

E. Submittals: Submit for approval the required plant quality certifications from the grower where plants are to be purchased, for each plant type. The certification must state that each plant meets all the above plant quality requirements. 1. The grower’s certification of plant quality does not prohibit the Owner’s Representative

from observing any plant or rejecting the plant if it is found to not meet the specification requirements.

2.2 ROOT BALL PACKAGE OPTIONS:

The following root ball packages are permitted. Specific root ball packages shall be required where indicated on the plant list or in this specification. Any type of root ball packages that is not specifically defined in this specification shall not be permitted.

A. BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS1. All Balled and Burlapped Plants shall be field grown, and the root ball packaged in a

burlap and twine and/or burlap and wire basket package.2. Plants shall be harvested with the following modifications to standard nursery practices.

a. Prior to digging any tree that fails to meet the requirement for maximum soil and roots above the root collar, carefully removed the soil from the top of the root ball of each plant, using hand tools, water or an air spade, to locate the root collar and attain the soil depth over the structural roots requirements. Remove all stem girdling roots above the root collar. Care must be exercised not to damage the surface of the root collar and the top of the structural roots.

b. Trees shall be dug for a minimum of 4 weeks and a maximum of 52 weeks prior to shipping. Trees dug 4 to 52 weeks prior to shipping are defined as hardened-off. Digging is defined as cutting all roots and lifting the tree out of the ground and either moving it to a new location in the nursery or placing it back into the same hole. Tress that are stored out of the ground shall be placed in a holding area protected from extremes of wind and sun with the root ball protected by covering with mulch or straw and irrigated sufficiently to keep moisture in the root ball above wilt point and below saturation.

c. If wire baskets are used to support the root ball, a “low profile” basket shall be used. A low profile basket is defined as having the top of the highest loops on the basket no less than 4 inches and no greater than 8 inches below the shoulder of the root ball package. 1) At nurseries where sandy soils prevent the use of “low profile baskets”,

baskets that support the entire root ball, including the top, are allowable.d. Twine and burlap used for wrapping the root ball package shall be natural,

biodegradable material. If the burlap decomposes after digging the tree then the root ball shall be re-wrapped prior to shipping if roots have not yet grown to keep root ball intact during shipping.

B. CONTAINER (INCLUDING ABOVE-GROUND FABRIC CONTAINERS AND BOXES) PLANTS 1. Provided plants shall be established and well rooted in removable containers.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 11 of 20

2. Container class size shall conform to ANSI Z60.1 for container plants for each size and type of plant.

C. IN-GROUND FABRIC BAG-GROWN1. Provide plants established and well rooted.2. Trees grown in grow bags or grow bag type material must have the grow bag removed

entirely prior to planting.

2.3 PLANTING SOILA. Planting Soil as used in this specification means the soil at the planting site, or imported as

modified and defined in specification Section Planting Soil. If there is no Planting Soil specification, the term Planting Soil shall mean the soil at the planting site within the planting hole.

2.4 MULCHA. Mulch shall be shredded melaleuca wood chips. Plant beds within stormwater basins shall be

mulched with pine straw mulch. All mulch shall be clean, bright and free from weeds, moss, sticks, and other debris. Mulch shall be spread at a minimum of three (3) inches deep and a maximum of four (4) inches deep or as otherwise noted.

B. Submit supplier’s product specification data sheet and a one gallon sample for approval.

2.5 TREE STAKING AND GUYING MATERIALA. Tree guying to be flat woven polypropylene material, 3/4 inch wide, and 900 lb. break strength.

Color to be Green. Product to be ArborTie manufactured by Deep Root Partners, L.P. or approved equal.

B. Below ground anchorage systems to be constructed of 2 x 2 dimensional untreated wood securing (using 3 inch long screws) horizontal portions to 4 feet long vertical stakes driven straight into the ground outside the root ball.

C. Submit manufacturer’s product data for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATIONA. Examine the surface grades and soil conditions to confirm that the requirements of the

Specification Section – Planting Soil - and the soil and drainage modifications indicated on the Planting Soil Plan and Details (if applicable) have been completed. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and storage. Adequately protect plants from

drying out, exposure of roots to sun, wind or extremes of heat and cold temperatures. If planting is delayed more than 24 hours after delivery, set plants in a location protected from sun and wind. Provide adequate water to the root ball package during the shipping and storage period. 1. All plant materials must be available for observation prior to planting.2. Using a soil moisture meter, periodically check the soil moisture in the root balls of all

plants to assure that the plants are being adequately watered. Volumetric soil moisture shall be maintained above wilting point and below field capacity for the root ball substrate or soil.

B. Do not deliver more plants to the site than there is space with adequate storage conditions. Provide a suitable remote staging area for plants and other supplies.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 12 of 20

1. The Owner’s Representative or Contractor shall approve the duration, method and location of storage of plants.

C. Provide protective covering over all plants during transporting.

3.3 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONSA. No planting shall take place during extremely hot, dry, windy or freezing weather.

3.4 COORDINATION WITH PROJECT WORKA. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.

B. Prior to the start of work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

C. Coordinate the relocation of any irrigation lines, heads or the conduits of other utility lines that are in conflict with tree locations. Root balls shall not be altered to fit around lines. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts encountered.

3.5 LAYOUT AND PLANTING SEQUENCEA. Relative positions of all plants and trees are subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Notify the Owner’s Representative, one (1) week prior to layout. Layout all individual tree and shrub locations. Place plants above surface at planting location or place a labeled stake at planting location. Layout bed lines with paint for the Owner’s Representative’s approval. Secure the Owner’s Representative’s acceptance before digging and start of planting work.

C. When applicable, plant trees before other plants are installed.

D. It is understood that plants are not precise objects and that minor adjustments in the layout will be required as the planting plan is constructed. These adjustments may not be apparent until some or all of the plants are installed. Make adjustments as required by the Owner’s Representative including relocating previously installed plants.

3.6 SOIL PROTECTION DURING PLANT DELIVERY AND INSTALLATIONA. Protect soil from compaction during the delivery of plants to the planting locations, digging of

planting holes and installing plants.1. Where possible deliver and plant trees that require the use of heavy mechanized

equipment prior to final soil preparation and tilling. Where possible, restrict the driving lanes to one area instead of driving over and compacting a large area of soil.

2. Till to a depth of 6 inches, all soil that has been driven over during the installation of plants.

3.7 SOIL MOISTUREA. Volumetric soil moisture level, in both the planting soil and the root balls of all plants, prior to,

during and after planting shall be above permanent wilting point and below field capacity for each type of soil texture within the following ranges.

Soil texture Permanent wilting point Field capacitySand, Loamy sand, Sandy loam 5-8% 12-18%

Loam, Sandy clay, Sandy clay loam 14-25% 27-36%

Clay loam, Silt loam 11-22% 31-36%



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 13 of 20

Silty clay, Silty clay loam 22-27% 38-41%

1. Volumetric soil moisture shall be measured with a digital moisture meter. The meter shall be the Digital Soil Moisture Meter, DSMM500 by General Specialty Tools and Instruments, or approved equivalent.

B. The Contractor shall confirm the soil moisture levels with a moisture meter. If the moisture is too high, suspend planting operations until the soil moisture drains to below field capacity.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF PLANTS: GENERALA. Observe each plant after delivery and prior to installation for damage of other characteristics that

may cause rejection of the plant. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any condition observed.

B. No more plants shall be distributed about the planting bed area than can be planted and watered on the same day.

C. The root system of each plant, regardless of root ball package type, shall be observed by the Contractor, at the time of planting to confirm that the roots meet the requirements for plant root quality in Part 2 Products: Plants General: Plant Quality. The Contractor shall undertake at the time of planting, all modifications to the root system required by the Owner’s Representative to meet these quality standards.1. Modifications, at the time of planting, to meet the specifications for the depth of the root

collar and removal of stem girdling roots and circling roots may make the plant unstable or stress the plant to the point that the Owner’s Representative may choose to reject the plant rather than permitting the modification.

2. Any modifications required by the Owner’s Representative to make the root system conform to the plant quality standards outlined in Part 2 Products: Plants General: Quality, or other requirements related to the permitted root ball package, shall not be considered as grounds to modify or void the plant warranty.

3. The resulting root ball may need additional staking and water after planting. The Owner’s Representative may reject the plant if the root modification process makes the tree unstable or if the tree is not healthy at the end of the warranty period. Such plants shall still be covered under the warranty

4. The Contractor remains responsible to confirm that the grower has made all required root modifications noted during any nursery observations.

D. Container and Boxed Root Ball Shaving: The outer surfaces of ALL plants in containers and boxes, including the top, sides and bottom of the root ball shall be shaved to remove all circling, descending, and matted roots. Shaving shall be performed using saws, knives, sharp shovels or other suitable equipment that is capable of making clean cuts on the roots. Shaving shall remove a minimum of one inch of root mat or up to 2 inches as required to remove all root segments that are not growing reasonably radial to the trunk.

E. Exposed Stem Tissue after Modification: The required root ball modifications may result in stem tissue that has not formed trunk bark being exposed above the soil line. If such condition occurs, wrap the exposed portion of the stem in a protective wrapping with a white filter fabric. Secure the fabric with biodegradable masking tape. DO NOT USE string, twine, green nursery ties or any other material that may girdle the trunk if not removed.

F. Excavation of the Planting Space: Using hand tools or tracked mini-excavator, excavate the planting hole into the Planting Soil to the depth of the root ball measured after any root ball modification to correct root problems, and wide enough for working room around the root ball or to the size indicated on the drawing or as noted below. 1. For trees and shrubs planted in soil areas that are NOT tilled or otherwise modified to a

depth of at least 12 inches over a distance of more than 10 feet radius from each tree, or 5 feet radius from each shrub, the soil around the root ball shall be loosened as defined below or as indicated on the drawings.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 14 of 20

a. The area of loosening shall be a minimum of 3 times the diameter of the root ball at the surface sloping to 2 times the diameter of the root ball at the depth of the root ball.

b. Loosening is defined as digging into the soil and turning the soil to reduce the compaction. The soil does not have to be removed from the hole, just dug, lifted and turned. Lifting and turning may be accomplished with a tracked mini excavator, or hand shovels.

2. If an auger is used to dig the initial planting hole, the soil around the auger hole shall be loosened as defined above for trees and shrubs planted in soil areas that are NOT tilled or otherwise modified.

3. The measuring point for root ball depth shall be the average height of the outer edge of the root ball after any required root ball modification.

4. If motorized equipment is used to deliver plants to the planting area over exposed planting beds, or used to loosen the soil or dig the planting holes, all soil that has been driven over shall be tilled to a depth of 6 inches.

G. For trees to be planted in prepared Planting Soil that is deeper than the root ball depth, compact the soil under the root ball using a mechanical tamper to assure a firm bedding for the root ball. If there is more than 12 inches of planting soil under the root ball excavate and tamp the planting soil in lifts not to exceed 12 inches.

H. Set top outer edge of the root ball at the average elevation of the proposed finish. Set the plant plumb and upright in the center of the planting hole. The tree graft, if applicable, shall be visible above the grade. Do not place soil on top of the root ball.

I. The Owner’s Representative may request that plants orientation be rotated when planted based on the form of the plant.

J. Backfill the space around the root ball with the same planting soil or existing soil that was excavated for the planting space. See Specification Section Planting Soil, for requirements to modify the soil within the planting bed.

K. Brace root ball by tamping Planting Soil around the lower portion of the root ball. Place additional Planting Soil around base and sides of ball in six-inch (6") lifts. Lightly tamp each lift using foot pressure or hand tools to settle backfill, support the tree and eliminate voids. DO NOT over compact the backfill or use mechanical or pneumatic tamping equipment. Over compaction shall be defined as greater than 85% of maximum dry density, standard proctor or greater than 250 psi as measured by a cone penetrometer when the volumetric soil moisture is lower than field capacity. 1. When the planting hole has been backfilled to three quarters of its depth, water shall be

poured around the root ball and allowed to soak into the soil to settle the soil. Do not flood the planting space. If the soil is above field capacity, allow the soil to drain to below field capacity before finishing the planting. Air pockets shall be eliminated and backfill continued until the planting soil is brought to grade level.

L. Where indicated on the drawings, build a 4 inch high, level berm of Planting Soil around the outside of the root ball to retain water. Tamp the berm to reduce leaking and erosion of the saucer.

M. Thoroughly water the Planting Soil and root ball immediately after planting.

N. Remove all nursery plant identification tags and ribbons as per Owner’s Representative instructions. The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on plants until the end of the warranty period.

O. Remove corrugated cardboard trunk protection after planting.

P. Follow additional requirements for the permitted root ball packages.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 15 of 20

3.9 ROOT BALL PACKAGES AND SPECIAL PLANTING REQUIREMENTSA. The following are permitted root ball packages and special planting requirements that shall be

followed during the planting process in addition to the above General planting requirements.

B. BALLED AND BURLAPPED PLANTS1. After the root ball has been backfilled, remove all twine and burlap from the top of the root

ball. Cut the burlap away; do not fold down onto the Planting Soil.2. If the plant is shipped with a wire basket that does not meet the requirements of a “Low

Rise” basket, remove the top 6 - 8 inches of the basket wires just before the final backfilling of the tree.

3. Earth root balls shall be kept intact except for any modifications required by the Owner’s Representative to make root package comply with the requirement in Part 2 Products.

C. CONTAINER (INCLUDES BOXED AND ABOVE-GROUND FABRIC CONTAINERS) PLANTS1. This specification assumes that most container plants have significant stem girdling and

circling roots, and that the root collar is too low in the root ball. 2. Remove the container. 3. Perform root ball shaving as defined in Installation of Plants: General above.4. Remove all substrate at the bottom of the root ball that does not contain roots.5. Using a hose, power washer or air excavation device, wash out the substrate from around

the trunk and top of the remaining root ball and find and remove all stem girdling roots within the root ball above the top of the structural roots.

D. IN-GROUND FABRIC CONTAINERS1. Remove the fabric container from the root ball. Cut roots at the edge of the container as

needed to extract the fabric from the roots. Make clean cuts with sharp tools; do not tear roots away from the fabric.

2. Observe the root system after the container is removed to confirm that the root system meets the quality standards.

3.10 GROUND COVER, PERENNIAL AND ANNUAL PLANTSA. Assure that soil moisture is within the required levels prior to planting. Irrigation, if required, shall

be applied at least 12 hours prior to planting to avoid planting in muddy soils.

B. Assure that soil grades in the beds are smooth and as shown on the plans.

C. Plants shall be planted in even, triangularly spaced rows, at the intervals called out for on the drawings, unless otherwise noted. The first row of Annual flower plants shall be 6 inches from the bed edge unless otherwise directed.

D. Dig planting holes sufficiently large enough to insert the root system without deforming the roots. Set the top of the root system at the grade of the soil.

E. Schedule the planting to occur prior to application of the mulch. If the bed is already mulched, pull the mulch from around the hole and plant into the soil. Do not plant the root system in the mulch. Pull mulch back so it is not on the root ball surface.

F. Press soil to bring the root system in contact with the soil.

G. Spread any excess soil around in the spaces between plants.

H. Apply mulch to the bed being sure not to cover the tops of the plants with or the tops of the root ball with mulch.

I. Water each planting area as soon as the planting is completed. Apply additional water to keep the soil moisture at the required levels. Do not over water.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 16 of 20

3.11 STAKING AND GUYINGA. Do not stake or guy trees unless specifically required by the Contract Documents, or in the event

that the Contractor feels that staking is the only alternative way to keep particular trees plumb. 1. The Owner’s Representative shall have the authority to require that trees are staked or to

reject staking as an alternative way to stabilize the tree. 2. Trees that required heavily modified root balls to meet the root quality standards may

become unstable. The Owner’s Representative may choose to reject these trees rather than utilize staking to temporarily support the tree.

B. Trees that are guyed shall have their guys and stakes removed after one full growing season or at other times as required by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Tree guying shall utilize the tree staking and guying materials specified. Guying to be tied in such a manner as to create a minimum 12-inch loop to prevent girdling. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations and the planting detail for installation. 1. Plants shall stand plumb after staking or guying. 2. Stakes shall be driven to sufficient depth to hold the tree rigid.

D. For trees planted in planting mix over waterproofed membrane, use dead men buried 24 inches to the top of the dead man, in the soil. Tie the guy to the dead man with a double wrap of line around the dead man followed by a double half hitch. When guys are removed, leave the dead men in place and cut the guy tape 12 inches above the ground, leaving the tape end covered in mulch.

3.12 STRAIGHTENING PLANTSA. Maintain all plants in a plumb position throughout the warranty period. Straighten all trees that

move out of plumb including those not staked. Plants to be straightened shall be excavated and the root ball moved to a plumb position, and then re-backfilled.

B. Do not straighten plants by pulling the trunk with guys.

3.13 INSTALLATION OF FERTILIZER AND OTHER CHEMICAL ADDITIVESA. Do not apply any soluble fertilizer to plantings during the first year after transplanting unless soil

test determines that fertilizer or other chemical additives is required. Apply chemical additives only upon the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

B. Controlled release fertilizers shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s instructions and standard horticultural practices.

3.14 PRUNING OF TREES AND SHRUBSA. Prune plants as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Pruning trees shall be limited to

addressing structural defects as shown in details; follow recommendations in “Structural Pruning: A Guide For The Green Industry” published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia CA.

B. All pruning shall be performed by a person experienced in structural tree pruning.

C. Except for plants specified as multi-stemmed or as otherwise instructed by the Owner’s Representative, preserve or create a central leader.

D. Pruning of large trees shall be done using pole pruners or if needed, from a ladder or hydraulic lift to gain access to the top of the tree. Do not climb in newly planted trees. Small trees can be structurally pruned by laying them over before planting. Pruning may also be performed at the nursery prior to shipping.

E. Remove and replace excessively pruned or malformed stock resulting from improper pruning that occurred in the nursery or after.

F. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. G. No tree paint or sealants shall be used.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 17 of 20

3.15 MULCHING OF PLANTSA. Apply 3 inches of mulch before settlement, covering the entire planting bed area. Install no more

than 1 inch of mulch over the top of the root balls of all plants. Taper to 2 inches when abutting pavement.

B. For trees planted in lawn areas the mulch shall extend to a 5 foot radius around the tree or to the extent indicated on the plans.

C. Lift all leaves, low hanging stems and other green portions of small plants out of the mulch if covered.

3.16 PLANTING BED FINISHINGA. After planting, smooth out all grades between plants before mulching.

B. Separate the edges of planting beds and lawn areas with a smooth, formed edge cut into the turf with the bed mulch level slightly lower, 1 and 2 inches, than the adjacent turf sod or as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Bed edge lines shall be a depicted on the drawings.

3.17 WATERINGA. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure that adequate water is provided to all plants

from the point of installation until the date of Substantial Completion Acceptance. The Contractor shall adjust the automatic irrigation system, if available, and apply additional or adjust for less water using hoses as required.

B. Hand water root balls of all plants to assure that the root balls have moisture above wilt point and below field capacity. Test the moisture content in each root ball and the soil outside the root ball to determine the water content.

3.18 CLEAN-UPA. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an

orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week.1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the

Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property.

B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period.

C. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage by the plant installer to the work or other work at the site.

D. Remove and dispose of all excess planting soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor.

3.19 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTIONA. The Contractor shall protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to

planting operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until Substantial Completion Acceptance. Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.

B. Damage done by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed plants, or any other parts of the work or existing features to remain, including roots, trunk or branches of large existing trees, soil, paving, utilities, lighting, irrigation, other finished work and surfaces



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 18 of 20

including those on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall determine when such cleaning, replacement or repair is satisfactory.

3.20 PLANT MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCEA. During the project work period and prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance, the Contractor

shall maintain all plants.

B. Maintenance during the period prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, removal of dead material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of guys, repairing and replacing of damaged tree wrap material, resetting plants to proper grades and upright position, and furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to keep plantings reasonably free of damaging insects and disease, and in healthy condition. The threshold for applying insecticides and herbicide shall follow established Integrated Pest Management (IPM) procedures. Mulch areas shall be kept reasonably free of weeds, grass.

3.21 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCEA. Upon written notice from the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall review the work and

make a determination if the work is substantially complete.1. Notification shall be at least 7 days prior to the date the contractor is requesting the

review.

B. The date of substantial completion of the planting shall be the date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation sections is complete.

C. The Plant Warranty period begins at date of written notification of substantial completion from the Owner’s Representative. The date of substantial completion may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project.

3.22 MAINTENANCE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD BY THE PLANT INSTALLERA. During the first ninety (90) days of the warranty period, provide all maintenance for all plantings

to keep the plants in a healthy state and the planting areas clean and neat.

B. General requirements:1. All work shall be undertaken by trained planting crews under the supervision of a foreman

with a minimum of 5 years experience supervising commercial plant maintenance crews.2. All chemical and fertilizer applications shall be made by licensed applicators for the type

of chemicals to be used. All work and chemical use shall comply with all applicable local, provincial and federal requirements.

3. Assure that hoses and watering equipment and other maintenance equipment does not block paths or be placed in a manner that may create tripping hazards. Use standard safety warning barriers and other procedures to maintain the site in a safe manner for visitors at all times.

4. All workers shall wear required safety equipment and apparel appropriate for the tasks being undertaken.

5. The Contractor shall not store maintenance equipment at the site at times when they are not in use unless authorized in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

6. Maintenance vehicles shall not park on the site including walks and lawn areas at any time without the Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

7. Maintain a detailed log of all maintenance activities including types of tasks, date of task, types and quantities of materials and products used, watering times and amounts, and number of each crew. Periodically review the logs with the Owner’s Representative, and submit a copy of the logs at the end of each year of the maintenance agreement.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 19 of 20

8. Meet with the Owner’s Representative a minimum of three times a year to review the progress and discuss any changes that are needed in the maintenance program. At the end of the warranty period attend a hand over meeting to formally transfer the responsibilities of maintenance to the Owner’s Representative. Provide all information on past maintenance activities and provide a list of critical tasks that will be needed over the next 12 months. Provide all maintenance logs and soil test data. Make the Contractor’s supervisor available for a minimum of one year after the end of the warranty period to answer questions about past maintenance.

C. Provide the following maintenance tasks:1. Watering; Provide all water required to keep soil within and around the root balls at

optimum moisture content for plant growth.a. Maintain all watering systems and equipment and keep them operational.b. Monitor soil moisture to provide sufficient water. Check soil moisture and root ball

moisture with a soil moisture meter on a regular basis and record moisture readings. Do not over water.

2. Soil nutrient levels: Take a minimum of 4 soil samples from around the site in the spring and fall and have them tested by an accredited agricultural soil testing lab for chemical composition of plant required nutrients, pH, salt and % organic matter. Test results shall include laboratory recommendations for nutrient applications. Apply fertilizers at rates recommended by the soil test.a. Make any other soil test and/or plant tissue test that may be indicated by plant

conditions that may not be related to soil nutrient levels such as soil contaminated by other chemicals or lack of chemical uptake by the plant.

3. Plant pruning: Remove cross over branching, shorten or remove developing co dominant leaders, dead wood and winter-damaged branches. Unless directed by the Owner’s Representative, do not shear plants or make heading cuts.

4. Restore plants: Reset any plants that have settled or are leaning as soon as the condition is noticed.

5. Guying and staking: Maintain plant guys in a taught position. Remove tree guys and staking after the first full growing season unless directed by Owner’s Representative.

6. Weed control: Keep all beds free of weeds. Hand-remove all weeds and any plants that do not appear on the planting plan. Chemical weed control is permitted only with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Schedule weeding as needed but not less 3times during the maintenance period.

7. Trash removal: Remove all trash and debris from all planting beds and maintain the beds in a neat and tidy appearance. The number of trash and debris removal visits shall be no less than 3 times during the maintenance period and may coincide with other maintenance visits.

8. Plant pest control: Maintain disease, insects and other pests at manageable levels. Manageable levels shall be defined as damage to plants that may be noticeable to a professional but not to the average person. Use least invasive methods to control plant disease and insect outbreaks. a. The Owner’s Representative must approve in advance the use of all chemical

pesticide applications.9. Plant replacement: Replace all plants that are defective as defined in the warranty

provisions, as soon as the plant decline is obvious and in suitable weather and season for planting as outlined in above sections. Plants that become defective during the maintenance period shall be covered and replaced under the warranty provisions.

10. Mulch: Refresh mulch to maintain complete coverage but do not over mulch. At no time shall the overall mulch thickness be greater than 4 inches. Do not apply mulch within 6 inches of the trunks or stems of any plants. Replacement mulch shall meet the requirements of the original approved material. Mulch shall be no more than one inch on top of the root ball surface.

11. Bed edging: Check and maintain edges between mulch and lawn areas in smooth neat lines as originally shown on the drawings.



100% SUBMITTAL

Page 20 of 20

12. Leaf, fruit and other plant debris removal: Remove fall leaf, spent flowers, fruit and plant part accumulations from beds and paved surfaces. Maintain all surface water drains free of debris. Debris removal shall be undertaken at each visit to weed or pick up trash in beds.

13. Damage from site use: Repair of damage by site visitors and events, beyond normal wear, are not part of this maintenance. The Owner’s Representative may request that the Contractor repair damage beds or plantings for an additional cost. All additional work shall be approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative.

3.23 END OF WARRANTY FINAL ACCEPTANCE / MAINTENANCE OBSERVATIONA. At the end of the Warranty and Maintenance period the Owner’s Representative shall observe

the work and establish that all provisions of the contract are complete and the work is satisfactory.1. If the work is satisfactory, the maintenance period will end on the date of the final

observation.2. If the work is deemed unsatisfactory, the maintenance period will continue at no additional

expense to the Owner until the work has been completed, observed, and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

B. FAILURE TO PASS OBSERVATION: If the work fails to pass final observation, any subsequent observations must be rescheduled as per above. The cost to the Owner for additional observations will be charged to the Contractor at the prevailing hourly rate of the Owners Representative.
